Learn how price is really delivered.

An interactive course built from ICT's Mentorships — 78 lessons across two sections. Every word comes from ICT's mentorship notes and the original ICT video transcripts; every chart is pulled from the notes.

Section 1 — the ICT Core Content — is 38 lessons across 4 months: market maker templates, equilibrium & fair valuation, liquidity, institutional order flow, PD arrays, and the market maker traps. Section 2 — the 2022 Mentorship — is 40 lessons across 6 parts, one per episode: a single stripped-down intraday model taught end to end, from fair value gaps and market structure shifts to the killzones, the daily bias and risk.

How to use this course: work through the lessons in order — the material builds from one lesson to the next. Flip the concept cards, study every chart (click to zoom), then take the lesson check. Your progress and quiz answers are saved in your browser automatically.

Revise & test yourself

When you've worked through a section, the summary re-teaches the whole thing in one read and the final exam tells you what to go back to.

Month 1 · Lesson 1

Elements Of A Trade Setup

The two primary concerns behind every setup: the framework price is operating in, and the reference points institutional order flow leaves behind.

Primary Concern A — Context / Framework

What makes an idea favorable for a trade? Not an indicator, not a support & resistance level — there has to be something that builds a reason to want the trade. Price is always in one of these four conditions:

Expansion
Price moves quickly from a level of equilibrium — the market makers reveal their intended repricing model.
Retracement
Price moves back inside the recently created price range — repricing to levels not efficiently traded, for fair value.
Reversal
Price moves opposite to the current direction — the market makers have run a level of stops; a significant move should unfold in the new direction.
Consolidation
Price moves inside a clear range with no willingness to go significantly higher or lower — orders are building on both sides. Expect a new expansion near term.
Click a card to flip it
The interbank algoPrice for currencies is ~90% delivered by electronic algorithms — the interbank price delivery algorithm. There is no auction market anymore; it's a price engine, and it's highly manipulated — especially foreign exchange. Because of that, the fingerprints are easy to see once you understand the operations and conditions it functions in. And there's no such thing as the market "doing nothing" in a consolidation — it's accumulating orders.
RuleAll moves start from a consolidation. The market maker keeps price in a defined range until there's enough money on both the upper and lower end — whichever side has the most money to be absorbed, that's the direction it moves. We don't always know which it is, so we always wait for the first expansion — that gives us all the insight we need. Sometimes it expands too far to do anything with: then wait for the retracement or the next consolidation. That's normal — you're not going to catch every move.

Primary Concern B — Pairing Each Condition With An ICT Tool

Each condition couples directly with a specific reference point in institutional order flow:

Expansion
Orderblock — when price leaves a level quickly, don't chase; wait for price to come back to the orderblock the market makers left at or near equilibrium (the down candle right before the up move)
Retracement
Fair value gaps & liquidity voids — quick runs up/down leave gaps that price wants to come back into and close in
Reversal
Liquidity pools — just above an old high and just below an old low; price runs just past those levels, rejects, and goes the other way (turtle soups & false breaks)
Consolidation
Equilibrium — the halfway point of the range, defined by the bodies of the candles, not the wicks; wait for the impulse swing away from it
One setup is enoughOne of these conditions will become your bread and butter. Some traders will trust the equilibrium, some the orderblock, some the void. You don't need all of them — find one element, couple it with an ICT tool, and wait for those conditions. You won't get a trade every day, but you can get a couple every week. (Watch four major pairs with one condition and you'd find a trade every day — but that comes later.) Go through your charts and outline the examples that already happened on the left side.
Month 1 · Lesson 2

How Market Makers Condition The Market

A small group moves the markets — and they run price through repeating daily and weekly templates.

The Market Efficiency Paradigm

Retail believes its sheer vastness drives price — supply & demand, trendlines, moving average crossovers. That's a facade. A small circle of traders — the banks — is the actual drive shaft that makes the markets go around. They are the liquidity provider; everyone else is liquidity. The markets are always efficient — but efficient for the smart money, not for the speculators.

Paradigm shiftYou are not trading against a person anymore — it's a computer program that delivers price, and it knows human behavior because it's always been the same: fear and greed. Your stop getting run, the move that "looked exactly like it was going up" but came all the way down first — that's not your broker, it's the interbank feed. Are you a lamb or a lion? Leave the herd; the small circle doesn't draw attention to itself — it just quietly does its thing.

The Daily Template

Every day the interbank price delivery algorithm runs the same generic, systematic structure — expansion, retracement, reversal, consolidation applied to time of day:

Asian range
Consolidation = price equilibrium — the day starts here, orders build
After midnight NY
Manipulation — the Judas swing, always by way of some news event/driver at or just before it; on a buy day it drops down making the false move for the low
London open
Reversal — the classic scenario: it shoots down, runs the stops, makes the higher low of the day, then range expansion into 5:00 AM NY
5:00–8:00 AM NY
Consolidation
8:00–8:30 AM NY
Retracement (the news injection window)
New York session
Reversal or another expansion — the range makes the rest of the day into 10:00–11:00 AM NY
10–11 AM / London close
Reversal
After
Consolidation — ending the true day

The Rules of Conditions

Rules — the algo has only a few options
  • A consolidation always goes to an expansion. It can't retrace — it hasn't moved anywhere; it can't reverse — it has to come out of the consolidation first.
  • From expansion it goes to a retracement or a reversal — retracing means coming back to the orderblock it just left behind, recapitalizing it, then making another leg in the same direction.
  • A consolidation can NEVER go directly into a reversal or retracement.
  • Consolidation → expansion never goes directly into another consolidation.
  • After a reversal there'll be another expansion, then back to consolidation.

When you see a consolidation or holding pattern, think: the next leg is an explosive move — an impulse price swing. These processes are time sensitive, day sensitive, and intermarket related — when one market is being held while a correlated one is let run (why the EuroPound matters when trading fiber or cable), that's where the trade is setting up.

The Weekly Template

The same repeating format plays out across the weekly range:

Sunday open
Consolidation
Monday
Expansion
Tuesday (or Monday)
Reversal
Wednesday
Another expansion
Midweek
Consolidation
Friday
Reverse or retrace
Key ideaWith the higher-timeframe directional premise understood, this price delivery model repeats over and over — it's very generic, it will not break, and it will not stop working. It doesn't matter what timeframe you're looking at; the daily range just makes it easy to study every single day.
Month 1 · Lesson 3

What To Focus On Right Now

Build the daily price-action log habit and resist the urge to forecast.

Two Perspectives — Who Is The Victim?

The uninformed money doesn't acknowledge that smart money exists; its perspective is that indicators are the answer — that overbought/oversold is the precursor to a move ("indicator-itis"). If you're new and not infected with that yet, you actually have the advantage. The smart money perspective is that of the liquidity provider: everyone else is liquidity — in the form of buy stops, sell stops and pending orders above and below the most recent highs and lows. 90% of traders lose; a huge new pool of liquidity enters the market every single day.

Who sets priceCurrency is owned by the bank — the central bank sets the value of that bank note, at any time, at any price they want (look at the Swiss franc when the euro was de-pegged: instantaneous wipeout). We don't vilify the market maker and we don't vilify retail — we just think in terms of efficiency, and price is slanted to lace the pockets of the smart money.

Daily Price Action Logs — Start Here

Come in with no previous knowledge — go back to square one, even if you've made money before (if anything outside institutional order flow led to your profitability, it was coincidence). The very first thing: create a daily price action log with price charts, with this much data displayed per timeframe:

Daily chart
12 months of data — no less than 9; not multiple years
4-hour chart
3 months
60-minute chart
At least 3 weeks — the bellwether chart for a day trader, like their "daily"
15-minute chart
3–4 days

What To Note On The Charts

  • Where price has shown a quick movement from a specific level — those big candles will be influential later.
  • Recent highs and lows that haven't been retested — they'll influence future price delivery.
  • Clean highs (two equal highs in close proximity): buy stops build above them and the market usually comes back up and runs through that. Equal lows: a big area for sell stops — the market has a willingness to go down and test that liquidity.
  • What day the weekly high/low forms, and what time of day / killzone (London or New York) — it lends to prognostication.
  • The daily high and daily low of every single trading day, and when they form. Note previous day's high/low and draw them out to 0 GMT.

Work the levels top-down: mark them on the daily, drop to the 4-hour — the same levels transpose immediately and more highs/lows become visible — then the hourly (which defines the weekly range), then a separate 15-minute chart covering the last 3–4 days.

Process rules
  • One currency pair — and pick one apart from the pound and euro, since the mentorship uses those; you want a unique perspective you arrived at yourself.
  • Keep the annotated level-charts separate from the executable chart — don't let charts get too busy.
  • Three charts total: the executable, the 15-minute MTF, and the HTF.
  • Resist the urge to forecast price movements — that's not for this stage; it only leads to frustration.
  • Never marry your analysis — if real-time price stops making sense for your expected conditions, you need the flexibility to switch gears or go to the sidelines. We don't know direction with certainty; we know probabilities.
  • Do it every single trading day — even after 23 years, ICT still keeps these logs. It's what professionals do.
Why it works — example from the notesWednesday ran through Tuesday's high (~9790), didn't continue, sold off — all the way down to Tuesday's low, breached it by a pip or two, then consolidated. Thursday traded inside Wednesday's range, sold off just below its low, consolidated. Friday rolled straight up through Thursday's high and ran out all the stops resting above Wednesday's high — the weekly high. The previous days' highs and lows are the reference points.
Month 1 · Lesson 4

Equilibrium Vs. Discount

The fib means nothing by itself — it only matters when displacement defines the swing, and price returns to equilibrium or better.

The Fib Has No Magic

Fibonacci has no significance by itself — any other time it will fail you. The 62–79% levels work only because they're measuring how far the current price range has been — the foundations behind price action cause the indicator to work, never the other way around. Price alone — the open, high, low and close — gives you everything: direction, entries and exits.

Defining the Swing

  • First you need movement: an impulsive price swing means displacement — someone with a lot of money and strong conviction has entered. Banks accumulate at the lows, then keep offering price higher as long as they find buyers.
  • A swing high is 3 candles — a high with a lower candle on the left and a lower candle on the right. Then you wait for the 4th candle to be lower than the highest one — only then do you start waiting for equilibrium.
  • Only fib pure, obvious swings — and don't count the Sunday candle (MT4/Forex LTD shows it; it's a non-event).
  • Keep the same range as long as its low is not violated; once an old high is taken, re-draw the fib on the new, larger price leg — the parent price swing currently being traded in.
  • Use the swing that showed reaction — the leg that moved away from an area you expected it to move from.

Equilibrium → Discount → Explosion

Rules
  • Equilibrium = fair market value — the 50% of the impulse swing. On the banking level the market is permitted to be bought at EQ or less. It cannot be bought above it — they won't come in, they won't do it.
  • Best buys come at equilibrium or less. Anything below EQ is a discount.
  • Markets do not sustain discount prices very long when the underlying tone is bullish — expect a very dynamic, explosive move away. That's your built-in relative strength study: if orders are really there, price reacts immediately at the level.
  • OTE — the optimal trade entry sweet spot: 62%, 70.5%, 79% retracement. Below equilibrium into OTE = the highest probable degree of bullishness.
  • If price blows through OTE / 62 / 79 while you're still bullish → don't panic, find the low it just blew out and expect the turtle soup buy there — then you're buying at a really deep discount.

Turtle Soup — The Stop Run

If conditions are bullish and a low gets swept, that's when you anticipate a turtle soup — a false breakout below the low. Why do market makers run price below old lows? Because tripping the sell stops injects sellers — counterparties to their buy orders. Once it hits the level, the orders go hot and it explodes upward. It only needs to breach by a little; it should reject immediately. This is also how you answer "will it keep going lower?" — if it already took the stops out, it's probably done reaching.

Exits — Where the Market Makers Distribute

  • Take profits above an old high — any old high, it doesn't have to be the oldest one. If it gives you two chances and you hold for more, that's greed.
  • Market makers only allow price to retrace so that buy stops build above an old high — that's how they engineer liquidity. Those buy stops become market orders to buy, and smart money sells its accumulated longs to them. That's all institutional order flow is: the storyline between the highs and the lows.
  • Intraday, markets reach for stops in grades of 10 and 20 pips above a high.
  • Consolidations form at equilibrium — then expansion goes hunting the liquidity above (the buy stops over the clean/equal highs you marked).
Reality checkSometimes EQ gets hit and it fails — you'll take losses; it's not going to be perfect. On a daily chart you get roughly one really good high-odds opportunity per week. Traders that make money professionally are not chasing everything — they know exactly what they're waiting for. The example moves in the notes ran 140→300+ pips from these entries.
Month 1 · Lesson 5

Equilibrium Vs. Premium

Selling is not the mirror of buying at EQ — sell from 62% or higher, in premium.

Everything here is diametrically opposed to equilibrium vs. discount. A premium means price is at a really high level relative to its current trading range — you don't need overbought/oversold indicators to classify it; you just need the current range, and anything above the 50% level starts going into premium.

Selling Rules

Rules
  • Anchor the fib from the high down to the low of the impulse swing. After a swing low forms (3 candles), watch the 4th candle show willingness to go higher — then wait for the retracement up.
  • Price must at least touch equilibrium — but 50% alone is not where ICT sells. Other disciplines sell the 50; sell in the 62–79% zone (OTE for sells), at a premium.
  • If price only reaches EQ and immediately sells off — that's a missed opportunity. Let those price legs go without you.
  • Only fib pure, clear, discernible swings — if it looks sloppy or questionable, skip it.
  • Keep re-anchoring to the newest high→low ranges as they form — anchoring to the wrong swing hides the real OTE.

Turtle Soup Sells

When price goes above equilibrium and takes out an old high at the same time — running the stops while in premium — that's really good in terms of probabilities: a turtle soup sell. Target the lows already established in the marketplace: take first profit below the first low, then the next low (aim ~10 pips below a range low, plus a few pips for spread).

Stop-outs happenSometimes it runs right through your OTE and takes your stop — even twice in a row. Do not try to avoid it; it's going to happen. If you're stopped, look for the next old high to be breached while still above 50% — that's the next turtle soup sell scenario.
Key ideaYou don't need a bias — you need to know how to trade inside a range. Ranges are always there, whether the market is trending, consolidating or reversing, and you don't need a breakout to make money. If the market is in a long consolidation, this is your go-to: trade turtle soups, or premium and discount. Professional traders sell at premium prices — you own a car, you don't sell it at a discount. And there's no better place to sell than above an old high, because there are willing buyers right there in the form of buy stops.

Even on the daily chart these setups run 70–100+ pips — this is for those who can't day trade. The concepts are universal across timeframes.

Month 1 · Lesson 6

Fair Valuation

Equilibrium is fair value. The strongest clue to direction is which swing broke most recently — then think from the smart-money point of view.

Two Perspectives of Fair Value

1. Equilibrium
Fair value as the equal-distance midpoint of a defined high-to-low range.
2. Market Maker
Fair Value
The valuation at which market makers accumulate or liquidate their positions — not what retail calls fair.
Click a card to flip it

Voids, Gaps & Where Fair Value Lives

  • A liquidity void: sudden movement with large ranges, very little wicks, quick — price spent very little time at those levels. It will want to trade back up into that area and close it in later (not always immediately).
  • A fair value gap (FVG): the range between the two up candles bracketing a down move — nothing filled in there, only one-way movement. Define it by the bodies.
  • Where price only moved one way, no real buying (or selling) occurred — the market runs back up to close in the range where only selling took place.

At Equilibrium, Which Way?

RuleAt equilibrium the market can go either way. The easiest way to determine the probable direction: where did market structure break most recently — a swing high or a swing low? If it broke a swing high and came back down to EQ, the highest probability is long.

Stacking the Overlap

High-probability fair valuation is an overlap of factors:

  1. The total (parent) range — are you in the lower third? That's a deep discount.
  2. The equilibrium of the most recent smaller range — below it is discount.
  3. An institutional reference — e.g. the bullish orderblock (down candle before the move up through a short-term high) being hit at the same time as EQ. Its stated counterpart is the up candle before the market drops"that up candle is exactly where resistance is on an institutional basis, so that's where selling occurs."

That confluence is where market makers build a net long book. They accumulate at a deep discount and liquidate at what retail sees as premium — it's fair value to the market maker to liquidate there. Price chasers buying up there are buying at a premium; the void being filled is where smart money scales out, wick by wick.

The same thing for a shortEverything above reads off the buy side. For a sell or short position it mirrors: look for the areas where the market in the past has moved up a great deal with speed, and for the lows where stops would be building up below them — the liquidity pools in the form of sell stops — and take the lower end of the most recent range as the valuation.
The cycleMarkets move from buy stops to sell stops and sell stops to buy stops, and from fair value → discount → premium → fair value. Are we at a discount, a premium, or fair value? Those combined give you the clues: are they accumulating, manipulating, or distributing?
Confirmations from the notes
  • If a turtle soup takes out buy stops and wants to go lower, it should go lower quickly — if it just sits in a sideways consolidation instead, it's building equilibrium again and pointing higher.
  • We don't play the breakout game — we anticipate the breakout: price action gives clues about which side the consolidation breaks.
  • Real example: the AUDUSD weekly call at 7665 — placed ~10 pips below where price was ultimately expected to reach (the FVG above), so the exit fills before the level.
  • Buying deep discounts: scale some out — you don't know if it only fills the void and then goes lower.
DisciplineIf you mess up or miss a move, do not worry about it — these phenomena repeat almost daily. Don't look at the market with the retail mindset; ask "I am the bank, where's the most efficient price level for me to unload my longs or shorts?"
Month 1 · Lesson 7

Liquidity Runs

Liquidity is the orders resting above old highs and below old lows — but not all runs are equal.

Liquidity (formally): the degree to which an asset can be quickly bought or sold without dramatically affecting its price. In ICT terms it's simpler: buy orders and sell orders.

The Story of the Stops

A short taken at a swing high is profitable as price falls — its buy stop rests just above that high (often right at it). A long from a low has its sell stop below the low. The market tends to find an interest in going back to where that large body of interest rests. So we're not looking for patterns for the sake of patterns — we're looking at where existing orders reside: liquidity above old highs, liquidity below old lows. It's just that simple, and it removes the retail, indicator-leaning perspective entirely — no bias relative to anything except price itself.

High Resistance
Liquidity Run
Lots of peaks and troughs in the way — old lows as resistance, old highs as stop clusters. Least probable; avoid it.
Low Resistance
Liquidity Run
A sharp one-way move with very little retracement — price cuts through like a hot knife through butter.
Click a card to flip it

High Resistance — Why You Avoid It

  • To run an old high, price must fight through every old low (standard resistance) and every intermediate high on the way — those stops are highly defended.
  • Generally only a sharp injection of volatility — non-farm payroll, FOMC, a black swan — cuts through that kind of price action.
  • This is the element of price action to trade least frequently.

Low Resistance — The Easiest Trading There Is

  • After a sharp one-way decline breaks an old low, the run back up through the short-term highs created on the way down is low resistance — buy stops sit above every one of them, and each retracement sets up the next drive through.
  • The low-resistance zone is defined from the broken low back up to where the drop began. Once price returns to the level of the old broken low, the probabilities fall off precipitously — it becomes a high resistance run for anything beyond it.
  • Reverse it for the sell side: consolidation → expansion up breaking a short-term high → the fall back down through that one-sided run is low resistance, with sell-stop liquidity below every short-term low (and bottom-chasers building it up).
Rules
  • The more price action there is around a level, the more that level is being defended on an institutional price model.
  • Trade away from defended levels — that puts you in sync with institutional order flow, and your trades find very low resistance in the form of profitable exits and very little drawdown.
  • Old highs kept intact flip the field: every rally into them is high resistance, which makes the runs on the lows below low resistance — that's your bearish bias, and vice versa.
Month 1 · Lesson 8

Impulse Price Swings & Market Protraction

Three protraction moves per 24 hours — the manipulation that seeks liquidity before the real move.

Impulse Price Swings

When you look at price action, think in terms of impulse price swings — high down to a low, up to a high, down to a low, over and over. Inside the impulse swings is where the detail lives. But there are smaller, more specific impulse swings with far more influence: the ones that are manipulative.

Market Protraction

Protraction is a time-sensitive impulse price swing — a small move that is highly sensitive to the time of day, designed and intended for manipulation only. It runs counter to the major direction you'll see after that time of day: if it moves higher at the protraction time, think the opposite direction. Its design is to fake out those who chase the initial move — to draw participants onto the wrong side, or to reach for liquidity (e.g. clearing out lows before the rally).

The 3 Protraction Times (per 24h)

0 GMT (8 PM NY)
One small move away right at the day's delineation — Asia isn't that influential beyond this
After midnight NY
The London protraction — the Judas swing: a false initial move (a false rally to sell into when bearish)
After 7 AM NY
The New York protraction — if London moved lower, expect the retracement higher that entices buyers, then the reversal. It has to happen after 7 o'clock.
Blending it with Month 1Measure the impulse swing down, wait for the retracement above equilibrium into the 62% premium — sell there expecting the run below the old lows (find them in previous days). After an impulse swing, the protraction phase reaches into a premium/discount level, then the next expansion takes out the stops below the equal lows. Use this for session drills — it builds context for your practice and your anticipatory price skills.

Tip from the notes: hold Ctrl and tap Y (on the platform) to add the vertical 0 GMT delineations so you can see the time-sensitive swings.

Month 2 · Lesson 1

Growing Small Accounts

Compounding takes time — respect risk over reward and let selectivity do the heavy lifting.

What to Avoid

  • Rushing massive gains — in pips or percent. Pips are a trophy thing for Twitter/Instagram; percent returns are what build consistent wealth, and you don't even need high percentages.
  • Large risk in hopes of equally large returns — it's a misnomer that you need a lot of money and a lot of risk. Forex is not the lottery.
  • Assuming small risk won't grow the account — compound interest is the missing element. Even $100 grows exponentially over time if you submit to it, and nothing says you can't add funds once you're confident.
  • Sacrificing equity to poor planning — you need consistent parameters and well-defined low-risk setups: ideally 2% risk, no more, as a new trader.

The Reality of Reward-to-Risk vs. Accuracy

Greed puts you into the trade; once you're in, it transfers into fear. Learn to respect the risk side before you execute — nobody goes broke taking profits; they go broke taking too much risk.

75% accuracy
Very little RR needed per $1 risked
50/50
$1 for $1
40%
~$1.50 per $1
25–33%
Minimum $2–3 per $1 — at 3:1 you can be wrong 75% of the time and still be net profitable

As your accuracy grows while you keep hunting 3:1 trades, your equity grows exponentially — and you never demanded high accuracy.

Rules
  • Identify setups that permit 3R or higher; frame them so a loss has little impact.
  • Drawdown is the most important thing — it hurts you psychologically and monetarily. Avoid large drawdown; that "King Kong feeling" after big wins is what precedes the fall.
  • Know your profit targets and where price should be drawn to before entry.
  • Banks trade off daily levels — that's where institutional sponsorship is.

The 6% Per Month Model

Focus on 6% of equity compounding per month — it doubles your money every year, whatever your account size. It only takes 20 pips per week, 1.5% risk, and a 1:1 ratio — and those setups form every single trading day (that doesn't mean trade every day: highly selective conditions only). A $1,000 account risks $15 a trade — a loss you can absorb without taking it out on anyone.

The easiest 6% setups form on the daily chart orderblock: the down candle before the move up; the body's open-to-high = the fair value gap. Wait for price to return, add ~5 pips spread to the limit order, stop 20 pips below (under the middle of the down candle), then graduate your exits: take half at the first multiple (banking 0.75%), stop to breakeven after the second multiple, scale the rest at the logical liquidity levels — the buy stops you mapped in advance. One setup like that framed on the daily is a 5:1, one-shot-one-kill.

PerspectiveICT's stated average goal: 50–75 pips a week (a shown month: 10 trades, 51.8-pip average win, 518 pips). A 50% month is possible but not a standard — do not expect it. And $1,000 at 6%/month compounds past $2,000 in a year — and past $1,000,000 in 10 years without adding a penny. Where will you be ten years from now?
Month 2 · Lesson 2

Framing Low Risk Trade Setups

Select on the higher timeframe, execute on the lower — that's how the stop gets small without the idea getting weak.
  • Select setups on higher timeframe charts — that's the primary function of a high-odds trade. The HTF gives the directional bias, the institutional order flow, and the framing of the buy or sell idea.
  • Why? Because large institutions and banks analyze markets on a daily, weekly and monthly basis — without that view you limit your exposure to high-probability setups.
  • HTF setups form slowly and provide ample time to plan — you don't need to be a day trader; jobs, businesses and life don't stop you from trading these.
  • The HTF has more influence on price, so focus there — then transpose the HTF levels to lower timeframe charts to reduce the overall pip exposure of the stop. Smaller stop = lower risk by default.

The Refinement Ladder (Aussie Case Study)

Same setup, three levels of refinement — the daily bullish orderblock at 7512, with an old low violated down into it (sell stops taken into a level where banks have bought before):

1-hour
Entry 7542 at the OB, stop 20 pips below the mean threshold
15-minute
The refined OB off the level: buyer at 7520, with ICT's stated 17-pip stop, and buying far lower
5-minute
The violated down candle at the level itself: entry ~7515 (level + spread), stop 7507 — under 10 pips; 3R is reached before price even hits the 1-hour entry

With ~8 pips of risk, you're at a multiple of 3R before the 5-minute buy stops are even taken. Price only reaches 7542 — the hourly entry — after that, so the hourly trader is still being filled at the point where the refined trade is already several R in front.

Warnings
  • Breaking old lows alone is not a reason to expect a reversal — you need the HTF premise: why should there be buying below that old low? Because the daily level is an old bullish orderblock.
  • Ultra-short stops require understanding what you're doing and why price should respond at the level — you can't just slap tight stops on without the price-action reasoning.
Month 2 · Lesson 3

How Traders Make 10% Per Month

Small risk makes the money — at levels the institutions sponsor.

Continuing the Aussie 7512 case study: framed with 2% risk and the refined 5-minute stop, the trade pays out in stages against the liquidity pools mapped in advance:

  • Take half off at 3:1 — the buy stops don't even have to be blown out yet. That banks 3% on the trade with under 10 pips of risk.
  • The remaining half aims at the higher-grade liquidity pools — the 15-minute buy stops paid 9R, the hourly pool 15R.
  • The potential range was ~100 pips. You don't need the absolute high or low — the lion's share is enough. Even collapsing the runner at half the range tacks on 21%+ for the month; the full range nets 46%+. If all you ever got was the 3:1 first objective, that alone is over 10% per month.
The real secretIt's not having big risk that makes the money — it's having small risk. Frame trades on levels that should see institutional sponsorship — the banks propel price higher or lower off daily, weekly and monthly chart levels, because that's where the real orders are. It has nothing to do with your indicators or your supply-and-demand theory.
Pay yourselfPay the trader — take partials. Anyone who tells you taking partials before the final objective is a weakness does not make money consistently. You don't know if your trade is going to pay in full, but once you've banked 3:1 you're already living in an environment that pays exceedingly well — and the second portion of the trade will always make more than the first. Don't be binary, all-or-nothing. 10% per month compounded is over 300% per year — no fund manager will raise their hand to do that for you.
Month 2 · Lesson 4

No Fear Of Losing

1% risk makes millionaires. Accuracy comes with experience — the fear leaves when the risk is right.

What Fear of Losing Does

  • Staying concerned about taking a loss promotes fear-based decision-making — it keeps your focus on the adverse and fosters trade paralysis (the inability to execute efficiently).
  • Equity managed by traders who cannot take a loss can't profit long-term. Losing is inevitable.
  • The professional equity manager understands: losses are costs of doing business. Over a long career your loss column will be very long — and it doesn't remove the profitability.

Framing the Trade

  • The bullish orderblock's high-to-open defines the fair value gap — the most probable support.
  • The mean threshold = the middle of the down candle; you don't want it violated on a closing basis.
  • A simple 20-pip stop easily frames 3:1 and 5:1 reward multiples against the old high above.
  • Position sizing: 1% of $5,000 = $50; divide by your stop (e.g. 25 pips) for your dollar-per-pip leverage.

The Math That Kills the Fear ($5,000 account, 10 trades/month)

30% acc · 3:1 · 1%
+2% month — marginal, but 2%/month compounded is an astronomical return for managed funds
30% acc · 5:1 · 1%
+8% month — losing 70% of your trades
30% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+15% month
40% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+28% month — from just a 10% accuracy increase
50% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+40% month
50% acc · 5:1 · 1%
+20% month — the optimal trading goal
Key lines
  • One percent makes millionaires. 2% is the industry standard — you're doing half of it.
  • You can afford to be wrong half the time with 5:1 framing and 1% risk. You'll never need to demand better than 50/50 — accuracy increases by default with experience.
  • Large funds target 1–2% per month (20–28%/year) — millions of dollars would love someone who delivers that. You don't need astronomical returns to manage money.
  • There is no fear justified in taking losses — it's all part of your job as an equity manager.
Month 2 · Lesson 5

How To Mitigate Losing Trades Effectively

The rule after a loss: cut the risk in half on the next attempt at the same idea.

The Scenario

You go long at the orderblock but place your stop just below the mean threshold — too tight — and get swept out for a full loss. The trade idea hasn't unraveled; you were just inaccurate in where the stop was placed. When a new down candle forms and price trades above it, that authorizes any return to it as a buying opportunity — re-enter at the top of that candle, but this time put the stop below the entire orderblock and allow more movement against you.

The Half-Risk Rule

Rules
  • Go back in with one half the position size of the initial loss: lost 2% → next trade 1%; lost 1% → 0.5%.
  • At a multiple of R2 with half the risk, the initial loss is fully mitigated — and you didn't even need price to take the old highs.
  • As a developing trader, take it off there. Get back to even, relax, regroup. Especially late in the week: if it's Thursday or Friday and the market offers your loss back — take it, close the week flat. Do not go into the weekend with a net loss if the market presents the opportunity.
  • Next stage of development: instead of closing, lock the stop at the mitigation point — never permit price to take you back below the equity high you had before the drawdown. At R3 you've made a new net gain on the same idea.
  • One trade doesn't have to erase all your losses — it can come back over several setups.
Why reduce, not increaseEquity preservation is the number one rule of this game. How do you know that first loss isn't the beginning of a 10-trade losing string? Keeping the same risk — or worse, increasing it — is throwing good money after bad; it builds toxic thinking, beats you down emotionally, and grows into the fear-based trading we're avoiding. The rushed urge to "get it back on the next trade" is exactly the emotion that loses. You mitigate losses by reducing risk and having the patience to let R2 arrive.
Month 2 · Lesson 6

Secrets To Selecting High Reward Setups

Process-oriented thinking, a binary defined narrative, and seven things in agreement.

Process-Oriented Thinking

  • Efficiency in trading comes by way of process-oriented thinking — not reactionary or impulsive thinking, which leads to rushing entries prematurely. Professional traders are not in a rush to put money to work.
  • Decisions must be binary — do X or do Y, black or white, like a flow chart. Without that structure, a vacuum forms where emotional, psychological and impulsive trading creeps in.
  • You want your trading to be boring — monotonous, mundane, routine. Emotions are only allowed on the weekend after a smashing week.
  • Your trading plan is uniquely yours — you can't copy someone else, and you're not trying to share it with anybody. Nobody else's opinion of your model matters.

The Three Perspectives — 7 Things In Agreement

Big picture (2 of 4)
Macro analysis (inflationary vs deflationary), interest rate analysis (trends, unexpected changes, differentials/carry), intermarket analysis (CRB commodities vs USDX — usually inverse), seasonal influences
Intermediate (2 of 3)
Top-down analysis (monthly/weekly/daily key levels — only one timeframe needed), COT data (commercials at 12-month / 4-year extremes = likely hedging change), market sentiment (extreme bullish/bearish — the least significant of the three)
Short-term (1 from each)
Correlation analysis (USDX SMT / correlated-pair SMT — the "cracking correlation"), time & price theory (quarterly effect, monthly effect, weekly range, daily range / power of three, time of day), IPDA (institutional order flow — where the liquidity is and why the market will seek it)
The count2 + 2 + 3 = seven things in agreement, across all three perspectives aligned in the same direction = a high reward trade setup. This isn't execution or entry — it's the framework that makes the trade high reward. The entry signal is the least of your concerns.
Rhythm & timing
  • The big picture and intermediate perspectives are set on the weekend; the intermediate can shift mid-week (Tuesday/Wednesday); the short-term perspective changes day by day.
  • The quarterly effect: every 3–4 months a new price shift — a trending market tends to consolidate or reverse over the next quarter.
  • Intraday charts have no influence over price — they only reflect what the monthly, weekly and daily charts arrive at. Those three timeframes are what make markets move; funds do their work on monthly/weekly and execute on the daily.
  • ICT defines himself as a weekly range trader — one shot one kill, capturing the lion's share of the weekly range.
  • Your losses will come mostly from the short-term perspective — forcing something, or the market being in transition. Trades framed on the HTF premise generally serve you well.
  • Smart money isn't always returning to its own orders (as supply & demand teaches) — it seeks where existing orders are: old highs for buy stops, old lows for sell stops — a forced injection of liquidity to be counterparty to their book.
Month 2 · Lesson 7

Market Maker Trap — False Flag

Flag patterns are consistent in continuations — but they form at trend ends, where the trap springs.

The Classic Pattern — and the Trap

A bull flag: an impulse leg up (the flagpole), a small consolidation sideways or sloping lower (the flag), then a measured move — an equal leg added to the breakout. It's consistent in nice strong immature trends. The problem: in mature bull trends or at higher-timeframe distribution levels (premium), price prints FALSE bull flags — retail sees the classic continuation buy and it reverses. Same in reverse: false bear flags form at HTF accumulation levels (discount). Price does not move based on any pattern — chart patterns for the sake of patterns is how ICT himself fell victim early on.

Diagnosing the False Bull Flag (top-down)

  1. Daily: fib the swing high→low — the flag is forming in premium, inside a big up candle (a bearish orderblock). That's distribution territory.
  2. 4-hour: liquidity voids running up then down through the area — the whole range is treated as a bearish OB with a mean threshold.
  3. 5-minute refinement: the up candle(s) right before the down move = the bearish orderblock. With two consecutive up candles, measure body-low to body-high across both — the equilibrium of that range is the mean threshold (which lands at the bottom of the last up candle).
  4. Focus on the bodies — ignore the big wick; the sensitivity for selling short sits at the bodies and low-end wicks of the up candles.
The tradeThe "breakout" only clears the bodies of the old candles — the turtle soup: it pokes a short-term higher high, gets flag-traders excited, then rolls over. Sell the first return to the bearish orderblock (the last up candle's open — 76.97 in the example, matching to the pip on both the 5m and 15m). Stop above the flag's high (the wick) — very few pips of risk. First objective: close the liquidity void the false flag created.

The False Bear Flag (the buy side)

  • On the daily, the decline is only running the stops below the bodies of old candles (ignore the wicks) — returning to the area for the first time in months.
  • Don't just buy the rally — wait for a swing high to be created and violated on the upside. Then buy the return to the last down candle (the bullish OB), stop below the flag's low.
  • Objectives: fill the down-candle range, the stops above the equal highs (clean levels), then the bearish OBs and liquidity pools above.
The takeaway"When I look at price action, I'm looking for reasons why other traders will view the opposite side of the marketplace." It's a sentiment play combined with HTF institutional order flow: after a rapid one-sided delivery, IPDA pauses in consolidation — the rally-then-flag is bait. Go back through old data and find the flags that failed — that's the homework.
Month 2 · Lesson 8

Market Maker Trap — False Breakouts

The market always seeks liquidity — and the liquidity is at the candle bodies.

Who Gets Trapped

At some measure of equilibrium, price moves into a trading range. Neophyte and breakout traders bracket the range — buy stops above the old highs, sell stops below the old lows — hoping to catch a trend either way because they have no idea what's going on. Those brackets are the trap:

Bearish market
False breakouts occur above the consolidation — market makers send price above the range to neutralize the buy stops
Bullish market
False breakouts occur below the consolidation — price is sent below the range to neutralize the sell stops

The Buy Model, Step by Step

  1. Price breaks below the consolidation — the tripped sell stops are used to pair smart money's long orders (their counterparties).
  2. Price expands (think IPDA) up to the liquidity above the old high — the buy stops are used to pair long exits: scaling out, taking profit, hedging.
  3. New consolidation forms → sell stops build below it again → the cycle repeats, each time stacking orders a little higher. Every consolidation is priming.
  • All the volume is in the bodies of the candles — so the liquidity rests above the bodies, not the wicks.
  • Measured moves confirm the model: the first impulse leg out of a false breakout projects the next legs (108.75→109.25, 108.85→109.80 in the example — the 109.90 terminus tied directly to the daily bearish orderblock).
Directional biasThe market will always seek liquidity — it's the number one driver in price action. Ask: where is the most recent area of untapped liquidity with the least resistance getting to it? That gives you the directional bias.
Think like the market makerDon't vilify them — they're providing liquidity; that's their job. And don't try to beat or outsmart them — get in line with their motive: if you had complete control of price, where would you drive it to facilitate other traders' orders? The easiest way to see a bullish profile: every time the market consolidates it seeks the sell stops below, absorbs them, and quickly runs the other way through the buy stops. Every drop below a consolidation = a false breakout; anticipate the accumulation, then the repricing higher.
Month 3 · Lesson 1

Timeframe Selection & Defining Setups

The daily chart gives the bias. The model works on all timeframes — and there are only three patterns.

What Each Timeframe Is For

Monthly
Position trading. Only enormous money moves a monthly chart — banks and institutions. ICT's precision has a lot to do with direction derived from the monthly. Great for the intraday-intolerant.
Weekly
Swing trading — typically one or two trades within a three-month period (a setup roughly every quarter). Requires deep patience.
Daily
Short-term trading — the best chart there is. The best of both worlds: a long-term perspective plus all the near-term banking levels. If a gun were held to ICT's head to pick one chart, it's the daily. It gives the directional bias everyone begs for — the hard part is trusting it.
4-hour or less
Day trading — inherently tied to time-of-day concepts.
Start hereEven if you know in your heart you'll be a day trader — start on the daily chart. It's the bellwether. And the reason ICT day-trades isn't that it's better: it's money velocity — putting money to work, getting the return, compounding it, and putting it back to work faster. Higher timeframes compound exceedingly well too; it's about your unique alignment — your patience, aptitude, and what your life allows.

The Monthly Chart Seed (EURUSD Case Study)

  • Smart money sells up-moves and buys down-moves — on the monthly, your eyes go straight to the last up candle before the breakdown: the bearish orderblock.
  • The return to that monthly OB took 13 months to set up — then the move unfolded in 6: 2,900+ pips.
  • Below the clean, equal monthly lows (look at the bodies — too clean): the sell stops of large trend-following funds, who leave stops in for a very long time. That's the target.
  • With the range known in advance (OB high → equal lows), lay the fib across it and grade the swing — setups form every 25% of the range, on the way to the terminus.
  • Every monthly candle holds ~20 trading days and ~4 weekly candles of setups — see the apple seed, but also every tree inside it.
  • Hold the bias until it's clearly proven wrong — or the terminus is hit.

ICT's Only 3 Setups

1. Trade Inside
the Range
Return to an exposed range / liquidity void — buy the close-in, aim for the known range. Not 5,000 pips — just the known range.
2. Orderblocks
& Breakers
Sell a return to a bearish orderblock (or a breaker — the down candle before the up move that took out a high).
3. Stop Runs
(Turtle Soup)
Sell the false break above an old high when bearish — the market absorbing buy-side liquidity before expansion.

ICT names the same three a second way later in the same lecture, as the three forms of discipline to gravitate toward — orderblocks, stop runs (turtle soup) and liquidity voids: "it may be order blocks, but for some of you the order block is going to be problematic… but you'll clearly see where the stop runs are and you'll be able to trade turtle soups. But maybe you can't do that either — well, you'll trade in liquidity voids." Same three setups, named from the other end: the range you trade inside is the liquidity void.

Click a card to flip it
Find YOUR patternYou only need one good pattern. If a friend excels at orderblocks but you can clearly see the stop runs — the stop run is your pattern; don't force it. All three exist on every timeframe, and when you understand all three characteristics, nothing evades you: not a reversal, not a trend-following pullback, not an expansion out of consolidation.
Month 3 · Lesson 2

Institutional Order Flow

Bodies matter, wicks are retail. Every move is a hedge between the extremes of the range.

Bodies vs. Wicks

  • The bodies of the candles are where the institutional volume is — the bulk of the bodies is as close to interbank prices as you'll get. The wick is generally comprised of retail pricing (brokers opening the spread — allow that erroneous, extreme price delivery).
  • Do your analysis around the bodies. Price only needs to reach below the bodies, not through the wicks, to seek the truest volume.
  • The bodies respect the mean threshold — the middle of the orderblock candle.

Rebalancing — Every Down Candle Needs an Up Candle

RuleWherever price has been delivered on the sell side (a run of down candles / a liquidity void), it must at some point be offered on the buy side to rebalance — the range gets closed in. Ask the market efficiency paradigm question: where is the maximum liquidity relative to where the market has traded from and where it is now? Once the stops below are absorbed, price seeks the liquidity on the other side — the last up candle where they sold, the void above.

Everything Is a Hedge

BookmakingBetween every two range extremes there's hedging and bookmaking — a bank can run a net bearish book going down, but they still have to buy back the longs they used at the other extreme. That unwinding at the top of a range is the basis of the market maker sell profile: consolidation → return to consolidation → accumulation → smart-money reversal (low-risk short) → redistribution → the run below the consolidation for the stops. A mitigation block (the wick-to-body of the last up candle) is where their underwater shorts get taken off — buying to cover plus new longs = the explosive reaction.

Mapping It Top-Down

  • Mark the bullish/bearish institutional order flow zones on the monthly, then drop into the weekly and daily — the same shaded logic maps years of price (the notes map EURUSD mid-2008 → mid-2012 this way).
  • The tell for a shift: when the last up candle is violated, expect downside expansion (and vice versa).
  • The daily chart will always seek the fund-level institutional order flow — the stops found on the monthly and weekly charts. That's where the whales (large funds, billions of dollars) reside. The banks can't counterparty with retail — even collectively we're too small.
  • Keep the monthly/weekly levels on your daily chart and you'll see every significant price swing coming before it gets there — that's why the daily shows "unexplainable" sensitivity at levels that have no visible reference on the daily itself.
DefinitionInstitutional order flow is the seeking of large institutional liquidity — found on the monthly and weekly, traded into on the daily. The market goes to those levels to either take those participants out of the marketplace or draw them in as counterparties to its intended purpose: a buyer counterparty to sell stops, or a seller counterparty to buy stops.
Month 3 · Lesson 3

Institutional Sponsorship

Sponsorship is a willingness to protect a price swing. If the response at your level is lethargic — there are no institutional orders there.
  • Sponsorship = the willingness to protect an underlying price swing that has a high probability of unfolding — the impact of large institutions, banks and big equity traders funding the side of the marketplace you anticipate.
  • Price is fractal — everything you see on one timeframe replicates on higher and lower timeframes, so the same low-violation pattern can be hunted on the LTF as the HTF level is hit.
  • The elephant in the pool: a daily chart doesn't move dynamically without a large entity behind it — displacement is the water overflowing. Go back to where the move began: that root price level is the institutional sponsorship level.

Criteria for a Long (reverse everything for shorts)

  1. HTF price displacement — a reversal, an expansion, or a return to fair value.
  2. Intermediate-term imbalance — a move to discount, or a sell-side liquidity run (old low taken).
  3. Short-term buy liquidity above the marketplace — ideal for pairing your long exits to sell to.
  4. Plus time-of-day influence — e.g. London open for the low of the day, or a New York session low.
The litmus testYou need an immediate, dynamic response at the level. If it's lethargic and unwilling to move right away — there are no institutional orders there: reduce risk, cut the position in half, or bail entirely. Never marry the idea; you can always re-enter. If you're on the right side, the market moves dynamically almost as soon as you're in.

4 Stages of a Price Swing

Stage 1
Origin — the start of the swing (support here is usually quick; they don't want to let you in)
Stage 2
Equilibrium / midway point
Stage 3
~75% of the swing
Stage 4
Terminus — above the old high, into the buy stops

Once market structure breaks bullish (the old high violated), sponsorship should protect price from ever returning to the origin — don't wait for the whole retracement back down; it's not coming. Each level of buy stops consumed just shifts focus to the next pool above; don't hunt reversal patterns or divergences at each old high.

Midnight NY Open — the blue linesMark the opening price at midnight New York. If you suspect bullishness: anything below the midnight opening price should be accumulated — day after day the market opens, dips below the opening, and sponsorship steps in. The buys come at down candles (bullish orderblocks) from the previous London or New York sessions, recapitalized below the day's opening price. This is power of 3 in action: buying near or below the open of an up day and exiting toward the close — easy to say, but 99% can't do it without this framework.
Why old resistance fails — and when it worksTraditional S/R sellers short the old high, their buy stops go just above it, and they get run — repeatedly. Classic support/resistance only works on a retracement when there's an unfulfilled objective above (the old higher-high the banks are still driving toward). Every successful trade carries the same hallmark: recapitalized orderblocks gravitating toward HTF liquidity pools. If you don't see that — you're probably offside.
Month 3 · Lesson 4

Anticipatory Skill Development

A monthly OHLC study of the last three months — find the range, find the orderblock, anticipate.

The Monthly OHLC Study

Monthly charts only move with a great deal of money behind the swings — retail cannot move them. So the study: delineate the open, high, low and close of every monthly candle over the last 3 months, on every pair of interest, and transpose those levels into your lower timeframes. A few overlapping opens/closes is fine — that's confluence.

  1. Find the most recent monthly down candle.
  2. Find the prior up candle whose low is above that down candle's high — those two candles define your trading range.
  3. Once price trades above the down candle's high, that down candle is activated as the bullish orderblock — buy at its open or less, targeting the last up candle of the range.
  4. Reverse it: an up candle whose low gets violated activates as the bearish orderblock — the range extends down to the most recent down candle.
From the notes' examplesUSDJPY: range 10326 → 10628 (~300 pips); the buy at 10326 filled on the US election itself — and even the election knee-jerk never challenged the mean threshold of the monthly OB. USDCAD: the 13080 monthly open held multiple dips before expansion. Kiwi: the violated up candle framed the short down to the 7005 candle bodies.
Rules
  • When two down candles form the block, the one with the larger body begins the orderblock.
  • Refine the monthly level down through the weekly → daily → hourly to get closer to market and reduce risk.
  • It's a top-down approach that leads you into trade setups you otherwise wouldn't know were there — you go in with a specific mindset, not waiting for a neon sign.
Month 3 · Lesson 5

Institutional Market Structure

Failure swings, anticipating the turtle soup before it happens, and SMT divergence between correlated markets.

What Is Institutional Market Structure?

The analysis of correlated assets against inversely correlated assets, to determine what the smart money is accumulating or distributing. Currencies are the easiest — compare every price swing in the US Dollar Index with the foreign currency you trade. SMT = smart money tool / smart money technique.

Symmetrical Markets — Confirmation

USDX lower low + FX higher high
Price action confirmed — the underlying trend likely continues
USDX higher high + FX lower low
Also confirmed — same conclusion
WarningIn symmetrical conditions, stalking reversal patterns is NOT high probability — avoid it altogether. Any run above a short-term high is just a buy-stop raid before resumption; any dip below a swing low is just gathering sell stops for continuation.

Non-Symmetrical Markets — SMT Divergence

USDX makes a lower low, FX fails to make a higher high
USDX SMT — price NOT confirmed; reversal stalking IS high probability
USDX fails to make a lower low while FX makes a higher high
Underlying dollar strength — the FX high is a stop raid / distribution
USDX fails to make a higher high while FX makes a lower low
Underlying dollar weakness — the FX low is going below a previous low to accumulate the sell stops; then they rally the market higher, the dollar index sells off, and that supports foreign currency long positions
  • This is how ICT anticipates a turtle soup before it actually happens — the failure swing tells you the coming break is a raid, not a trend.
  • Cable case study (June & Aug–Sep 2016): cable pierced old highs — looked like a bullish breakout to retail — while the dollar refused to make its lower low. The dollar was being accumulated; cable was being distributed above the old highs, selling accumulated longs to the buy stops. "Retail candy land" — retail chases the false breakout while smart money watches the failure swing. That divergence is why ICT was a dollar bull for all of late 2016.
How to use itAlways double-check apparent strength/breakouts in a foreign currency against the dollar index. It's a daily-chart concept — it gives the long-term / intermediate bias. Once set (e.g. bearish cable), execute it however you trade: sell every 60-minute or 4-hour bearish orderblock, or day-trade shorts above the midnight NY opening price. The notes also show installing an MT4 overlay chart-line indicator to lay the USDX directly over the pair for clean visual comparison.
Month 3 · Lesson 6

Macro Economic To Micro Technical

Interest rates control everything — read them visually via the bond market and cascade down to the currency pairs.

The Closest-Guarded Secret

  • The goal: a 3–6 month outlook on where currencies are heading. Not from bank reports — "why would a bank tell you what their intentions are? That's like a football team telling you their plays for the Super Bowl."
  • Not from sifting fundamentals either — a visual interpretation of the data via price action in the bond market. The 30-year Treasury bond (the benchmark behind US mortgage rates) and the 10-year note, both December contracts.
  • Bond futures rally = rates lowering. Bond futures drop = rates increasing. And rising rates see an aggressive pouring-in of funds to buy the dollar — rates ↑ → dollar ↑, chasing yield.

Two Layers of Interest-Rate SMT

Bonds vs. USDX
The dollar failing to make a lower low while the bond market makes a higher high = the quarterly shift forming — dollar accumulation (the June–Aug 2016 turn)
10yr vs. 30yr
SMT between the note and the bond → dollar direction → direction for every USD pair (the Sept 2016 rallies, mapped across dollar-swiss, dollar-cad, euro, pound, yen, kiwi, aussie in the notes)
The election-night proofOvernight on the US election the dollar and Dow futures tanked — but the 10yr/30yr made no confirming higher highs. It was all fluff, all manipulation; interest rates were still calling the shots, and the dollar rallied 10 days straight after. Foreign currencies popping old highs at the same time (aussie, kiwi) were the false moves — "there's no way the dollar is going to allow aussie dollar to rally."
Key ideas
  • Every 3–4 months there's a quarterly shift — a reversal, or extended consolidation then resumption. Hunt for it.
  • The interest rate markets control everything — without interest rates, nothing in the financial industry moves. Know the bond market and the 10-year note and you know everything you need (the German bund confirms too).
  • This is macro-economic to micro-technical: the rates give the direction, then you execute with the technicals from the earlier lessons.
Month 3 · Lesson 7

Market Maker Trap — Trendline Phantoms

Trendlines are opinions with no edge — but the stops that gather around them are real targets.

Why the Trendline Is a Phantom

  • Trendlines are opinions, not edges. Everybody draws them, everybody sees the same touches — which is exactly why they fail. "Price has no awareness of your trendline. Price doesn't respect what you have on your charts — price only respects where the actual liquidity is in the marketplace." The banks "don't care what you're scribbling all over your charts"; what they are aware of is the sentiment that builds around those levels. Confidence that a line will hold is "really associated closely to flipping a coin."
  • A trendline needs two points to draw and a third to confirm. Retail is taught to buy the third touch of a rising line (or sell the third touch of a falling line). The stops for those trades cluster in one obvious place.
  • The real target is the liquidity pool, not the line: buy stops rest above point 2 of a bearish/declining trendline; sell stops rest below point 2 of a bullish/rising one.

The Phantom Play

  • When bearish at a HTF premium array, ICT wants price to trade up into the area between touch 2 and the projected touch 3 — aiming for the high between point 2 and point 3 where the buy stops live.
  • Look for an orderblock or a turtle soup above that high, after the 2nd touch and before the market ever reaches a "clean" 3rd touch. That failure-swing above the pool is the entry.
  • A classic chart pattern — a triangle — also prints on this chart, and its breakout was false: "they would have been wrong even trading with that." ICT flags it as a pattern not yet covered, to be taken up later in the mentorship.
The same play, the other way upA declining trendline is retail's resistance — "in periods when price is making lower lows and lower highs the use of trendline resistance will be adopted by retail traders… the chart may appear bearish but the underpinnings are in fact the opposite." So when the higher timeframes point up, the target is the low between point 2 and point 3, where the sell stops rest: "I'm looking for a bullish orderblock at that low in between the two points" — and price may dip toward that old low without quite reaching it. Or accept a break just below that low for a turtle soup long entry, a run on the sell stops, which is what the market does many times.
TakeawayDon't trade the trendline — trade the stops the trendline creates. The "phantom" is the confidence the pattern gives retail; the trap is the raid on their stops before the pattern ever completes.
Month 3 · Lesson 8

Market Maker Trap — Head & Shoulders Pattern

Picking tops and bottoms is the worst thing you can do — and the head & shoulders is the trap that invites it.

The Most Dangerous Pattern in Retail

  • Trying to pick tops and bottoms is the single worst thing a trader can do — and the head & shoulders is the pattern that convinces people to do it. It looks like a reversal signal, so retail sells the right shoulder and puts stops above the head.
  • Those stops above the head (and above the shoulders) are the liquidity the algorithm is engineering the pattern to reach. The prettier and more textbook the pattern looks, the more stops are stacked, and the better the target.

How ICT Fades It

  • The neckline break is a turtle soup. Retail is taught to sell (or add) when the neckline breaks; instead, treat the break of the neckline as a stop-raid on the sell stops below it — the ideal spot to look for the opposite side.
  • Anchor to the HTF premium/discount array first. Only fade the pattern in the direction the higher-timeframe bias already supports; the head & shoulders just tells you where the trapped orders are.
  • The inverse head & shoulders is the mirror trap, and it is faded short, from a premium, when the higher timeframe reads bearish. The break above the neckline is not a bullish breakout — it is a run on buy stops, so sell there rather than expect price to go higher. The sell stops below the "head" are the objective to cover into.
  • Study the daily and 1-hour examples below to see the buy/sell stops relative to the head, shoulders, and neckline.
TakeawayThe pattern isn't a forecast — it's a map of where the crowd's stops are. Don't sell the head & shoulders; use it to find the liquidity the market maker is reaching for, then trade with the higher-timeframe bias.
Month 4 · Lesson 1

Interest Rate Effects On Currency Trades

Interest rates are the #1 driver of currency — blend the bonds, the notes and the dollar to see smart money.

The Interest Rate Triad

  • Interest rates are the single most influential driving force behind market moves — "that's what makes the whole world go round." Nothing drives currencies harder.
  • The triad is three futures markets overlaid together: the 30-year bond (long-term benchmark), the 10-year note (intermediate), and the 5-year note (short-term). Charts are free on barchart.com.
  • A raw open/high/low/close chart tells you nothing — the edge is comparative/overlay analysis of the three against each other. That's why it "evades the majority."

Reading Smart Money via Failure Swings

Base asset
Dow (stocks), Dollar Index (currencies), or CRB Index (commodities) — your benchmark to compare against
Distribution
Benchmark makes higher highs, but correlated assets make lower highs — not new buying, heavy selling. A warning sign of a distribution cycle.
Accumulation
Benchmark makes lower lows, but some assets make higher lows — heavy demand won't let price discount, so it's forced to a premium.
  • The three rates should confirm each higher high / lower low at the moment the Dollar Index is at a significant price point. You only need one to break the pattern — a failure swing — to reveal smart money participation (large volume shifting supply/demand).
  • Have a predetermined bias first. The triad divergence doesn't tell you direction on its own — it validates an idea you already have on the dollar (e.g. the 99.50 rejection → dollar bullish → sell fiber/euro/cable).
The action plan (green light)When price trades to a focus point — an orderblock, liquidity pool, liquidity void or fair value gap — check the interest rate triad + Dollar Index. A divergence among the 30/10/5-year plus that orderblock = the green light; it confirms smart money is behind the trade. No obvious divergence → pass on the trade. Reverse the whole logic for dollar shorts (rates make a lower low, then one fails to → validates selling the dollar).
Month 4 · Lesson 2

Reinforcing Liquidity Concepts & Price Delivery

Entries on internal range liquidity, exits on external — price has an agenda.
  • Mark each new range high and low.
  • Entries on internal range liquidity (e.g. an orderblock), exits on external (old highs/lows).
  • The monthly/weekly bias frames the low-resistance liquidity runs on the daily — "price has an agenda."
  • Use the energetic low, not the consolidation low.
  • Buy internal (orderblock) targeting the old external high in sync with the HTF.
  • If there are no ranges, target swing-low turtle soups.
  • External liquidity taken → an internal setup (orderblock) confirms.
Bearish on the HTF? Flip all of itThe bullets above are written long. If the monthly or weekly is bearish you look for the oppositeretracements higher, and low-resistance liquidity runs to break below a swing low. The pip thresholds are unchanged: 40 pips or more is the high-odds day trade or short-term trade, and an hourly chart carries a bit more potential range — 75 to 100 pips.
Trade filters
  • A 1h orderblock with only a 20-pip target = no trade — you want 40+ pips.
  • One setup a week is enough.
  • Trading against the HTF narrative = a high resistance run — the ones you sit in too long or that turn and bite you.
  • Low resistance runs give an immediate response and low drawdown.

Match the Timeframe to Your Pip Goal

Range < 20 pips
Pass — not worth the risk
40+ pips
Viable day trade / short-term setup (1h)
75–100 pips
Hourly / 4-hour swings — "100 pips a week? Trade a 4h or 1h chart, nothing less."
250 pips over ~2 weeks
Live on the 4h / daily — you'll never get it hunting 5-min swings
  • Work backwards from your goal: e.g. 10%/month needs X pips on your equity base → hunt only ranges that offer it. You don't need the range to break — framing the right swing can hand you 75 of a 100-pip range without ever clearing the old high.
  • Two disciplines cover everything: (1) turtle soups — buying sell-stops / selling buy-stops, or (2) return to fair value — buying internal range liquidity. Pick whichever the chart shows most clearly.
  • Gap risk: a liquidity void / big one-candle range beneath your long is where aggressive repricing stops people out — ICT hunts those as opportunities rather than fearing them.
Month 4 · Lesson 3

Orderblocks

The first PD array in depth — a down candle becomes a bullish orderblock after displacement through a high.

Definition & Validation

  • A bullish orderblock is the lowest down-close candle with the most open-to-close range, near a support level (an old low/high on the monthly, weekly or daily).
  • It's only a suspected block until validated — a later candle must trade through its high. That displacement is the fingerprint of institutional sponsorship (big flows that can actually move price).

Entry, Risk & Targets

  • Enter on the return to the open of the down candle (body high) — or as early as the very candle that broke the high, without waiting. Use wicks only where they overlap FVGs; otherwise focus on bodies.
  • Set an alert and submit to time — plan risk, size and target while price travels down. Add ~5 pips to a limit order so the dealing spread fills you.
  • The best orderblocks never trade below the 50% mean threshold (measured open-to-close, not the wicks) — a small stab through is tolerable.
  • Stop below the block's low / the close of the body; raise to 50% once price runs away.
  • You buy internal range liquidity (the block) and exit into external range liquidity — the buy stops above an old daily/weekly high — pairing your long exit with willing buyers.

Refinements

  • 2+ consecutive down candles = one full orderblock — blend them.
  • ICT wants a rally of 2–3× the orderblock's body height before trusting the retracement back for a second entry.
  • After a stop run, price may not reach the refined block — use the bigger orderblock's mean threshold instead.
  • Refine top-down monthly → weekly → daily → (even 5-min), always in the direction of the monthly/weekly/daily bias. Each fresh, higher down candle becomes the new block.
Bearish OBsBearish orderblocks are profit-taking targets only when the time of day matters (e.g. London close) — otherwise expect them to be traded through. Big players take profit above old highs.
Month 4 · Lesson 4

Mitigation Blocks

The M-pattern swing failure — trapped buyers underwater, exiting with "buyer's remorse."

The Setup (bearish; reverse for bullish)

  • Price rallies into an anticipated resistance / bearish reference point (old high, bearish OB, breaker…), then prints an M pattern — a failure swing that breaks the prior short-term low. That break is the market structure shift — confirmation smart money wants lower prices. No higher high needed.
  • Once structure shifts, your focus moves to that short-term low and specifically the last down candle before the little rally — that's where the trapped buying happened.

The A-B-C Frame

A → B
The rally that trapped longs (buyers get in)
B → C
The break lower that puts them underwater
Return to A
Price retraces to the last down candle — trapped longs mitigate (bail at breakeven), and you sell into their exit
  • Entry: sell as price trades back up into that last down candle. Uses the full body of the candle — a small overshoot into the body is fine, but the body should not be violated; that's the Hallmark of a valid mitigation block. Expect ~20 pips of drawdown at most.
  • Stop just above the down candle's high. Target: back below the low, on toward the next untapped support (e.g. the mean threshold of a liquidity void).
  • The mechanic is "buyer's remorse" — support-broken-turns-resistance. Premium highs are bought by the less informed and sold by smart money. Every fresh rally that needs to be mitigated is another sell.
Month 4 · Lesson 5

ICT Breaker Block

Short orders inside the last up candle before the raid on sell stops — explosive by design.

Bullish Breaker (a buy)

  • An old low is violated — sell stops below it are taken (a false break / turtle soup). Sellers are now trapped short.
  • Price then runs back up through the swing high between the two lows — the repricing that confirms a stop-run, a bullish market structure shift.
  • The last up candle inside that swing high (the highest up candle prior to the drop) is the bullish breaker — its entire range.
  • Buy the return to it: trapped shorts mitigate (cover) and add new longs at the same level → the explosive rally.

Bearish Breaker (a sell)

  • An old high is violated — buy stops taken, buyers trapped long. Price then breaks the swing low between the two highs (structure shift down).
  • The down-close candle in that swing low is the bearish breaker — sell the return to it as trapped longs bail.
Keys
  • One low/high must be traded below/above first — no stop raid, no breaker.
  • Confirmation = the quick repricing after stops are taken; that proves traders are trapped.
  • A breaker uses the entire candle range, and the candle is the highest one prior to the drop"why am I using this one and not this one here? Because this one was the highest one prior to the drop down, and we're using the entire range." It needs a real story — it's not a horizontal line drawn on a whim; it marks liquidity being pulled out.
  • Explosive because it's covering + new entries at the same price.
Month 4 · Lesson 6

ICT Rejection Block

At every new high or low, anticipate rejection — the wick above the highest open/close is the orderblock.
  • Anticipating rejection at every new high/low is the first — and hardest to groom — anticipatory skill. Best setups are in major-to-intermediate-term trends.
  • A bearish rejection block: a swing high with long wick(s) where price pushes above the highest body to run buy-side liquidity, then declines. No higher high is required for the failure swing — read the bodies, not the wicks.
  • Framing it: the block runs from the highest wick high down to the highest open or close in the swing high (regardless of whether that candle is bullish or bearish). Treat that range as a bearish orderblock. The wicks just flag where to look.

Three Entry Choices

Aggressive
Sell right at the low of the block on the return, wide stop above the wick high
Middle
Let it trade into the block a little, then sell
On weakness
Wait for price to trade back above the highest open/close without a new wick high, then a sell-stop below that level — one of the few times ICT enters on a stop order
  • Bullish version is the mirror: lowest wick low + lowest open/close frames a bullish rejection block in an uptrend — buy the return.
Don't be fooledA classic chartist calls this consolidation a bull flag / continuation — but the push above the highest body is distribution. Price doesn't move on geometry; it moves on orders. And if an old high/low has long wicks, expect a sweep of the bodies, not the wicks.
Month 4 · Lesson 7

Reclaimed ICT Orderblock

The market maker buy model — the market goes lower to go higher.

The Market Maker Buy Model

  • The curve is simply price going lower to go higher. On the sell side of the curve (the drop into support), market makers scale in early — their size is too big to fill in one move, so they hedge down.
  • Each small bounce on the way down is a minor displacement = new accumulation. The last down candle before each little rally is a bullish orderblock. (Traders who buy those bounces get stopped out — they're piggybacking a hedging move, not the real low.)
  • Off the major support the buy side of the curve begins. Every one of those old sell-side down candles gets reclaimed / recapitalized as price rises — the blocks match up on both sides of the curve, "like X-ray vision."

The Market Maker Sell Model (reverse)

  • Anticipate a rally to go lower. On the buy side of the curve, every up candle with a small displacement down = market makers selling short early / hedging into the rally.
  • To the right of the high, every return to one of those old up candles (a bearish orderblock) is a reclaimed short — the sell-side blocks match the buy-side ones.
DefinitionA reclaimed block = a candle previously used to build a position, whose short-term bounce/decline confirmed minor displacement, now revisited to facilitate new entries in the same direction. Map every up candle on the decline side and you'll find shorts you'd otherwise never notice.
Month 4 · Lesson 8

ICT Propulsion Block

An orderblock acting on a prior orderblock — a higher, highly sensitive block with little drawdown.
  • Definition: a down candle that trades down into a prior down candle / bullish orderblock when the context is already bullish. That second, higher block is the propulsion candle — highly sensitive, "predisposed to go higher."
  • The mean threshold (50% of the body) should never break. Most often price only trades to the candle high (maybe a pip or two under) and then explodes — sudden, violent movement away.
  • The mean-threshold rule is the edge: it lets you run an ultra-tight stop, and a break gives immediate feedback you're wrong — go to the sidelines or look to reverse.
  • Bearish version: an up candle trading back up into a prior bearish orderblock — sell the mean threshold, or the return to the candle's low (below the body — extra sensitive).
  • The payoff: little drawdown, immediate responsiveness — exactly what short-term traders want.
Month 4 · Lesson 9

ICT Vacuum Block

Gaps at big events and session openings — breakaway or exhaustion, and time-of-day decides the fill.
  • A vacuum block is a gap from a volatility event — non-farm payroll, FOMC, an unforeseen geopolitical shock, or a futures session/Sunday open — where a central-bank-level repricing means no trade could occur between the prior close and the new open (a vacuum of liquidity). NFP can gap 30–60 pips.
  • Treat the empty gap as its own candle: define its high, low, mean threshold, open and close, then trade it like any orderblock. Risk is defined between two reference points → more leverage for the same % exposure.
  • A gap up from a discount after a decline = a breakaway gap (strength). A gap after an extended rally = an exhaustion gap / capitulation.
  • Fill behavior is time-of-day sensitive: an early-NY (8:30) gap likely fills the same day; a 10–11am gap likely stays open → becomes an FVG for later.
  • Two outcomes on the way down: a bullish orderblock inside the gap may halt the fill and rally (leaving a small FVG), or price fully closes the gap = perfect, balanced delivery → then a buy targeting the highs.
  • Reverse the whole model for a gap down: wait for up candles to fill it, then sell.
Warning signOnce the gap is closed and price has delivered both down (to fill) and up (to rally), there's no reason for price to trade back below the first up candle's close. If it does, the trade is suspect — take profit / take it off.
Month 4 · Lesson 10

Liquidity Pools

Sell to the buyers, buy from the sellers — roleplay where the stops are resting.
  • We want to sell to the buyers and buy from the sellers — sell at a premium, buy at a discount. Retail buys at premium and sells at discount.
  • If the market is bearish, look to sell above old highs — there are dumb buyers above the highs, or shorts with their buy stops resting there. We sell into that pool of liquidity.
  • Roleplay: "if I was short right now, where would my buy stop be? If I was long, where would my sell stop be?" — that shows you where other traders' stops are.
  • The trick is knowing the underlying HTF bias. If it wants to go higher — wait for an old low to be taken out, then be a buyer.
Sweep mechanics
  • Expect a 10–20 pip sweep. If you buy right under the low, use a 30–50 pip stop.
  • Don't FOMO by buying at the low or above it — buy under it.
  • If it moves beyond 25 pips, it's probably not a sweep — it's likely a continuation of the decline.
NotesAccumulation on the sellside for longs; distributing the longs into the buyside. If the market trended all week, expect a choppy Friday — they want to take profit.
Month 4 · Lesson 11

Liquidity Voids

Wide, one-sided ranges where only one side of liquidity was offered — and price returns to balance them out.
  • A liquidity void is a range in price delivery where one side of the market's liquidity is shown — wide or long one-sided ranges or candles, quick, with very little wick. A run down is a void of buy-side liquidity: it is the absence of buyers that let price travel.
  • Price typically wants to revisit this porous range — a void of contrarian liquidity is itself the draw on price. On the worked example the ultimate draw was to get back up and close the void in.
  • Price in a small range/consolidation = price in balance / at equilibrium; when it moves away it creates an imbalance = displacement.
  • There's no specific time for a void to fill — it's relative to the surrounding price action.
  • A void looks like big candles delivered to one side, occasionally with small gaps between them.
  • The void gets covered back over in the future — once both sides have been offered, price is balanced out.
  • Sometimes it fills instantly; sometimes it first drops lower, faking people out, then fills completely.
Institutional pricingPricing on an institutional level happens in graduated terms — it can't be done on the first pass. Price runs from the level, gradually returns, sells off, comes back once more — they're stacking orders. When price gaps away aggressively, it's high probability it continues — you can sell inside the gap. Watch how the bodies close a void in.
Month 4 · Lesson 12

ICT Fair Value Gaps (FVG)

The gap exists on the timeframe you're viewing — and the concepts overlap by design.

Framing an FVG (three candles)

  • A fair value gap is a range where only one side of liquidity was offered. For a bearish FVG, take the big down candle and look at its neighbours:
  • The candle to the left already offered buy-side from its low up to its close; the candle to the right offered buy-side from its open up to its high.
  • The pocket left open — between the low of the left candle and the high of the right candle — is the FVG (in the example ~25 pips, 105.00 → 104.75). Only sell-side was delivered there, so price is drawn back to rebalance it ("perfect delivery" = both sides offered).
  • The gap occurs on the timeframe you're looking at — broken down on smaller timeframes it would probably be a liquidity void (multiple candles), not one gap.
  • Why expect the gap to fill? Because sellside liquidity was already taken beneath the low with a turtle soup, there are equal highs (EQH), and above them the FVG — a high-probability trade. (The example: ~100+ pips in about two days.)
  • In rangey conditions (like December) this is the style to use: looking for stops and looking for FVGs.
  • FVGs, liquidity voids, orderblocks and liquidity pools overlap a lot — a single run can take buy stops (pool), hit an FVG, and on a lower timeframe show up as a liquidity void, all at once.
  • Once price breaks below the efficient range, only sellside is delivered below it. Reverse everything for a bullish FVG below the market.
Month 4 · Lesson 13

Divergence Phantoms

Banks don't look at indicators — they look at where the stops are. Do the opposite of retail.

Two Types of Divergence

Type 1 — Classic
Higher high in price, but no higher high in momentum.
Type 2 — Hidden
Trend-following: a higher low while the stochastic cycles down to a lower low — a good entry in bullish markets.
Click a card to flip it
  • ICT likes to see the hidden divergence when looking for higher prices — while retail is staring at the classic bearish divergence at the top. Indicators are mathematically derived and measure only the past; price has zero awareness of them.
  • Banks (UBS, Credit Suisse, Citi) aren't looking at stochastics — they attack liquidity where buy/sell stops rest. Funds are long-term trend-followers, and those very systems get targeted in consolidations and at tops.
  • Bearish divergence for retail while we expect higher prices → we buy. Do the opposite of retail.

The Mechanic

  1. Retail sees a type-1 bearish divergence and sells the "top" — with no qualified target, they hold forever expecting lower and lower.
  2. Price gives them ~30 pips, then runs the sell stops below the equal lows, dips into a bullish orderblock (mean threshold), and the stochastic cycles to a new low — not oversold, just enough to grab the stops.
  3. That new stochastic low against a higher low in price is the real (hidden) divergence — price snaps up and runs the buy stops above the old high, leaving the divergence sellers "holding the bag."
Retail's 4 (+1) conditionsRetail thinks trading is: overbought or oversold × diverging bearish or bullish = 4 signals. The overlooked fifth condition is "is it even a time to trade?" — often the market is consolidating and you do nothing. Only pull up an indicator to read what the retail crowd is thinking, then find the institutional reason for the opposite.
Month 4 · Lesson 14

Double Bottom / Double Top

Never trust them — always expect them to get swept, with a measured move.
  • The algo remembers double tops/bottoms as reference points — even after time passes — and reaches through them for the buy stops (above tops) and sell stops (below bottoms).
  • We NEVER trust double tops and double bottoms — we always expect them to get swept.
  • Extreme ends of the range are where high-probability trading lives; the middle is low probability. Double tops/bottoms frame those extremes.

The Measured Move (the real target)

  • Retail sees the double top as resistance and targets the support low below. The algorithm does the opposite: measure the high-to-low of the consolidation between the two peaks, then project that distance beyond the double top — that projection is the objective (in the example, price hit it to within 1 pip).
  • Same in reverse for a double bottom: project the range below the lows to find where sell stops get swept, then price reverses back to the double-bottom reference.
  • That's why you get spike reversals at both extremes — the algo runs to the measured level, then reverses.
Timeframe scalingOn the 15m expect ~10–20 pip stop runs. On the hourly that rule breaks down — use the measured range instead (e.g. a 48-pip projection). This works on all timeframes — highlight clean tops/bottoms even when there's no trade today; they'll pay off later once run through.
ICT Core · Section Review

ICT Core (Months 1–4) — Section Summary

Every concept from the 38 lessons, condensed onto one page for revision. Nothing here is new material — it is the same notes and transcripts, re-ordered so you can re-read the whole section in one sitting.
How to use this pageRead it top to bottom the day before you sit the Final Exam. Where a line doesn't click, go back to the lesson it came from — the month and lesson names are kept in the sub-headers so you can find them in the sidebar. Then take the exam.

The one idea underneath everything

Currency price is ~90% delivered by electronic algorithms — the interbank price delivery algorithm. There is no auction market anymore; it is a price engine, and it is highly manipulated. A small circle of banks is the liquidity provider; everyone else is liquidity, in the form of buy stops above old highs and sell stops below old lows. The markets are always efficient — efficient for the smart money, not for the speculators.

The question behind every decision"I am the bank — where is the most efficient price level for me to unload my longs or shorts?" Everything in this section is a different way of answering that question. Markets move from buy stops to sell stops and sell stops to buy stops, and from fair value → discount → premium → fair value.

What each month was for

Month 1
Reading the conditions — the four states price is always in, the daily and weekly templates, equilibrium vs. premium and discount, liquidity runs, and protraction.
Month 2
Risk & trade selection — the maths that makes small risk profitable, how to frame a low-risk setup, how to mitigate a loss, the seven-point filter, and the first two market maker traps.
Month 3
Institutional analysis — which timeframe does what, institutional order flow and sponsorship, the anticipation drill, SMT divergence, interest rates, and two more traps.
Month 4
The PD arrays — the ten institutional reference points in depth, plus the interest rate triad and the last two traps.

Month 1 — Reading The Conditions

The four conditions, and the tool each one pairs with (L1)

Price is always in one of four conditions, and each couples directly with one reference point in institutional order flow:

Expansion
Price leaves equilibrium quickly — the market makers reveal their intended repricing model. Pair with the orderblock: don't chase, wait for the return to the block they left behind.
Retracement
Price moves back inside the range it just created, repricing to levels not efficiently traded. Pair with fair value gaps & liquidity voids.
Reversal
Price turns after a level of stops is run. Pair with liquidity pools — just above old highs, just below old lows (turtle soups and false breaks).
Consolidation
A clear range with no willingness to go anywhere — orders building on both sides. Pair with equilibrium, defined by the bodies, not the wicks.
The rules of conditions (L2)
  • A consolidation always goes to an expansion — it can't retrace (it hasn't moved) and it can't reverse (it has to come out first).
  • From expansion it goes to a retracement or a reversal — retracing means returning to the orderblock it just left, recapitalising it, then another leg the same way.
  • A consolidation can never go directly into a reversal or a retracement.
  • Consolidation → expansion never goes straight into another consolidation.
  • After a reversal there is another expansion, then back to consolidation.

All moves start from a consolidation. The market maker holds price in a range until there is enough money on both ends — whichever side has the most money to absorb is the direction it moves. Because you can't know which in advance, you always wait for the first expansion. And one condition is enough: find the one you can see clearly, couple it with its tool, and wait for those conditions only.

The daily template (L2)

Asian range
Consolidation — price equilibrium; the day starts here and orders build
After midnight NY
Manipulation — the Judas swing, usually around a news driver; on a buy day it makes the false low
London open
Reversal — runs the stops, makes the higher low of the day, then expands into 5:00 AM NY
5:00–8:00 AM NY
Consolidation
8:00–8:30 AM NY
Retracement — the news injection window
New York session
Reversal or a second expansion, into 10:00–11:00 AM NY
10–11 AM / LDN close
Reversal
After
Consolidation — ending the true day

The weekly template (L2)

Sunday open
Consolidation
Monday
Expansion
Monday / Tuesday
Reversal
Wednesday
Another expansion
Midweek
Consolidation
Friday
Reverse or retrace

Market protraction — the three times per 24h (L8)

A protraction is a time-sensitive impulse price swing designed for manipulation only. It runs counter to the major direction you'll see after that time of day — if it moves higher at the protraction time, think the opposite.

0 GMT (8 PM NY)
One small move away at the day's delineation
After midnight NY
The London protraction — the Judas swing
After 7 AM NY
The New York protraction — it has to happen after 7 o'clock

Equilibrium, discount and premium (L4, L5, L6)

The fib has no magic of its own. The 62–79% levels work only because they measure how far the current range has travelled — the price action causes the tool to work, never the other way round. So first you need displacement: an impulsive swing that says someone with size and conviction entered. A swing high is 3 candles (a high with a lower candle either side); then wait for the 4th candle to be lower before you start waiting for equilibrium. Only fib pure, obvious swings, and re-anchor to the new parent swing once an old high is taken.

The buy side and the sell side are not mirrors
  • Equilibrium = fair market value, the 50% of the impulse swing. On the banking level price may be bought at EQ or less — it cannot be bought above it.
  • Anything below EQ is a discount. Markets do not sustain discount prices for long when the tone is bullish — expect an immediate, dynamic move away. That reaction is your built-in relative strength study.
  • OTE — the optimal trade entry: 62%, 70.5%, 79%. Below equilibrium into OTE is the highest probable degree of bullishness.
  • Selling is not the mirror: 50% alone is not where you sell. Sell in the 62–79% zone, at a premium. If price only reaches EQ and sells off, that is a missed opportunity — let it go.
  • If price blows through OTE while you're still bullish, don't panic — find the low it just blew out and expect the turtle soup buy there, at a deeper discount.

Turtle soup is the stop run: price sweeps just past an old low (or high), the tripped stops inject the counterparties smart money needs, and it rejects immediately. It only needs to breach by a little. That also answers "will it keep going?" — if the stops are already taken, it is probably done reaching. Exits go above an old high — any old high; intraday, markets reach for stops in grades of 10 and 20 pips beyond a level.

At equilibrium the market can go either way. The easiest read on direction: which side of market structure broke most recently? If a swing high broke and price came back to EQ, the highest probability is long. High-probability fair valuation is an overlap: the lower third of the parent range, plus the equilibrium of the smaller range, plus an institutional reference (e.g. a bullish orderblock) hitting at the same price.

Liquidity runs — the filter that removes most bad trades (L7)

High resistance
Peaks and troughs in the way — old lows as resistance, old highs as defended stop clusters. Generally only NFP, FOMC or a black swan cuts through it. Trade this least of all.
Low resistance
A sharp one-way move with very little retracement — price cuts through like a hot knife through butter. Buy stops sit above every short-term high made on the way down.
RuleThe more price action there is around a level, the more that level is defended on an institutional price model. Trade away from defended levels — that is what puts you in sync with institutional order flow and gives you profitable exits with very little drawdown. Once price returns to the level of the broken low, the probabilities fall off precipitously — beyond that it is a high resistance run.

The habit that starts it all (L3)

Build a daily price action log: daily chart with 12 months of data (no less than 9), 4-hour with 3 months, 60-minute with at least 3 weeks (the day trader's bellwether), 15-minute with 3–4 days. On them, note quick moves away from a level, highs and lows that haven't been retested, clean/equal highs and lows (where the stops build), which day the weekly high/low forms and in which killzone, and the high and low of every trading day. Work top-down, keep the annotated charts separate from the executable chart, use one pair, and resist the urge to forecast. Do it every single trading day.

Month 2 — Risk & Trade Selection

Reward-to-risk beats accuracy (L1, L4)

75% accuracy
Very little RR needed per $1 risked
50/50
$1 for $1
40%
~$1.50 per $1
25–33%
Minimum $2–3 per $1 — at 3:1 you can be wrong 75% of the time and still be net profitable

Greed puts you into the trade; once you're in it turns into fear. Respect the risk side before you execute — nobody goes broke taking profits, they go broke taking too much risk. Drawdown is the most important thing, psychologically and monetarily.

30% acc · 3:1 · 1%
+2% month — marginal, but astronomical for a managed fund
30% acc · 5:1 · 1%
+8% month — while losing 70% of your trades
30% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+15% month
40% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+28% month — from a 10% accuracy increase
50% acc · 5:1 · 2%
+40% month
50% acc · 5:1 · 1%
+20% month — the optimal trading goal
The lines to rememberOne percent makes millionaires. 2% is the industry standard and you're doing half of it. You can afford to be wrong half the time at 5:1 with 1% risk, and accuracy increases by default with experience — you never need to demand better than 50/50. There is no fear justified in taking losses; they are costs of doing business.

The 6% per month model doubles your money every year, whatever the account size: 20 pips a week, 1.5% risk, 1:1. $1,000 compounding at 6% a month passes $2,000 in a year and $1,000,000 in ten. A 50% month is possible but is not a standard — do not expect it. ICT's stated goal is 50–75 pips a week.

Framing a low-risk setup (L2, L3)

  • Select on the higher timeframe, execute on the lower. The HTF gives the bias, the order flow and the framing — because banks analyse on the daily, weekly and monthly. HTF setups form slowly and give you time to plan, so a job or a business doesn't stop you.
  • Then transpose those HTF levels down to cut the pip exposure of the stop. The Aussie 7512 case study: 1-hour entry with a 20-pip stop, 15-minute refinement at 17 pips, 5-minute refinement at under 10 pips — so by the time the hourly entry is being filled, the refined trade is already at 3R.
  • Take half off at 3:1 and let the rest run at the higher-grade liquidity pools (9R at the 15-minute pool, 15R at the hourly in the case study). You don't need the absolute high or low — the lion's share is enough.
The real secretIt is not big risk that makes the money — it is small risk, on levels that should see institutional sponsorship. Breaking an old low is not by itself a reason to expect a reversal; you need the HTF premise for why there should be buying below it. Ultra-tight stops require knowing exactly why price should respond at that level.

Mitigating a loss (L5)

The half-risk rule
  • If the idea is intact and only your stop placement was wrong, go back in at half the position size: lost 2% → next trade 1%; lost 1% → 0.5%.
  • At R2 with half the risk the initial loss is fully mitigated — and you didn't need the old highs to be taken.
  • As a developing trader, take it off there. Late in the week especially: do not go into the weekend with a net loss if the market hands it back.
  • Later stage: instead of closing, lock the stop at the mitigation point so price can never take you back below your prior equity high. At R3 you have a new net gain on the same idea.
Why reduce and never increaseEquity preservation is the number one rule. You cannot know that the first loss isn't the start of a ten-trade losing string. Keeping — or raising — the risk is throwing good money after bad, and the rushed urge to "get it back on the next trade" is exactly the emotion that loses.

Selecting high reward setups — seven things in agreement (L6)

Big picture — 2 of 4
Macro analysis (inflationary vs deflationary), interest rate analysis, intermarket analysis (CRB vs USDX, usually inverse), seasonal influences
Intermediate — 2 of 3
Top-down analysis (monthly/weekly/daily key levels), COT data (commercials at 12-month / 4-year extremes), market sentiment (the least significant of the three)
Short-term — 1 of each
Correlation analysis (USDX / correlated-pair SMT), time & price theory (quarterly, monthly, weekly, daily, time of day), IPDA (where the liquidity is and why price will seek it)

2 + 2 + 3 = seven things in agreement in the same direction is what makes a setup high reward. This is the framework, not the entry — the entry signal is the least of your concerns. Trading must be process-oriented and binary: do X or do Y, like a flow chart, because without that structure a vacuum forms where impulsive trading creeps in. You want your trading to be boring. Your plan is uniquely yours.

Rhythm: the big picture and intermediate views are set on the weekend; the intermediate can shift mid-week; the short-term view changes day by day — and that is where most of your losses come from. Every 3–4 months there is a quarterly shift. Intraday charts have no influence over price — they only reflect what the monthly, weekly and daily arrive at.

Traps 1 & 2 — the false flag and the false breakout (L7, L8)

  • False flag: flags are consistent in strong immature trends — but in mature trends and at HTF distribution levels (premium) price prints false flags. The "breakout" only clears the bodies of the old candles, which is the turtle soup. Sell the first return to the bearish orderblock (the last up candle's open), stop above the flag's wick high, first objective the liquidity void the false flag created. Mirror it at a discount for the false bear flag — but wait for a swing high to be created and violated before buying.
  • False breakout: breakout traders bracket every consolidation, so the brackets are the trap. In a bullish market false breakouts happen below the range (the sell stops pair smart money's longs); in a bearish market, above it. Then price expands to the buy stops above, which pair the long exits. Each new consolidation stacks the orders a little higher. All the volume is in the bodies, so the liquidity rests above the bodies, not the wicks.
The directional bias questionThe market will always seek liquidity — it is the number one driver in price action. Ask: where is the most recent area of untapped liquidity, with the least resistance getting to it? That is your directional bias. Don't try to outsmart the market maker — get in line with the motive.

Month 3 — Institutional Analysis

What each timeframe is for (L1)

Monthly
Position trading. Only enormous money moves it. A great deal of ICT's precision comes from direction derived here.
Weekly
Swing trading — one or two trades per three months. Requires deep patience.
Daily
Short-term trading — the best chart there is. A long-term perspective plus the near-term banking levels. It gives the directional bias; the hard part is trusting it.
4-hour or less
Day trading — inherently tied to time-of-day concepts.

Start on the daily even if you know you'll be a day trader. ICT day-trades for money velocity, not because it is better — higher timeframes compound exceedingly well too.

There are only three setups
  • Trade inside the range — the return to an exposed range or liquidity void; aim for the known range, not 5,000 pips.
  • Orderblocks & breakers — sell the return to a bearish orderblock or a breaker (buy the mirror).
  • Stop runs (turtle soup) — fade the false break of an old high or low, in line with the bias.
You only need one good pattern — the one you can see clearly. All three exist on every timeframe, and knowing all three characteristics means nothing evades you.

Institutional order flow (L2)

  • The bodies are where the institutional volume is — as close to interbank prices as you'll get. The wick is retail pricing (brokers opening the spread). Price only needs to reach below the bodies, not through the wicks.
  • Wherever price was delivered on the sell side, it must at some point be offered on the buy side to rebalance — the range gets closed in.
  • Everything is a hedge: between the two extremes of a range there is bookmaking. A bank running a net short book still has to buy back the longs it used at the other extreme — that unwinding is the basis of the market maker sell profile.
  • The tell for a shift: when the last up candle is violated, expect downside expansion (and the reverse).
  • The daily chart will always seek the fund-level liquidity found on the monthly and weekly. Keep those levels on your daily and you'll see every significant swing coming.
DefinitionInstitutional order flow is the seeking of large institutional liquidity — found on the monthly and weekly, traded into on the daily. Price goes there to take those participants out, or to draw them in as counterparties: a buyer counterparty to sell stops, a seller counterparty to buy stops.

Institutional sponsorship (L3)

Sponsorship is the willingness to protect an underlying price swing. Price is fractal, so the same pattern you hunt on the HTF replicates on the LTF as the level is hit. Displacement is the elephant in the pool — go back to where the move began and that root level is the sponsorship level.

  1. HTF price displacement — a reversal, an expansion, or a return to fair value.
  2. Intermediate-term imbalance — a move to discount, or a sell-side liquidity run.
  3. Short-term buy liquidity above — what you pair your exits to.
  4. Plus time-of-day influence — London open for the low of the day, or a New York session low.
The litmus testYou need an immediate, dynamic response at the level. If it is lethargic and unwilling to move — there are no institutional orders there: cut the position in half or bail. Never marry the idea; you can always re-enter.

The 4 stages of a price swing are origin → equilibrium → ~75% → terminus (above the old high, into the buy stops). Once structure breaks bullish, sponsorship should protect price from ever returning to the origin — don't wait for the full retracement, it isn't coming. Mark the midnight New York opening price: if you suspect bullishness, anything below it should be accumulated, at bullish orderblocks from the previous London or New York sessions. That is power of three in action. Classic support/resistance only works on a retracement when there is an unfulfilled objective above.

The anticipation drill — monthly OHLC (L4)

  1. Delineate the open, high, low and close of every monthly candle over the last 3 months, on every pair of interest, and transpose them into your lower timeframes.
  2. Find the most recent monthly down candle.
  3. Find the prior up candle whose low is above that down candle's high — those two define your trading range.
  4. Once price trades above the down candle's high, that candle activates as the bullish orderblock — buy at its open or less, targeting the last up candle of the range. Reverse it for shorts.

When two down candles form the block, the one with the larger body begins the orderblock. Refine monthly → weekly → daily → hourly to get closer to market. It is a top-down approach that leads you into setups you'd otherwise never know were there.

Institutional market structure — SMT (L5)

Comparing correlated against inversely correlated assets to see what smart money is accumulating or distributing. For currencies: compare every price swing in the US Dollar Index against the pair you trade.

Symmetrical
USDX lower low + FX higher high (or the reverse) = confirmed; the trend likely continues. Stalking reversals here is not high probability — avoid it.
Non-symmetrical
USDX makes a lower low but FX fails to make a higher high = SMT divergence; reversal stalking IS high probability.
Non-symmetrical, the other way
USDX fails to make a lower low while FX makes a higher high = underlying dollar strength; the FX high is a stop raid. And USDX fails to make a higher high while FX makes a lower low = underlying dollar weakness, which supports FX longs.

This is how you anticipate a turtle soup before it happens — the failure swing tells you the coming break is a raid, not a trend. Always double-check an apparent breakout in a foreign currency against the dollar index. It is a daily-chart concept that sets the intermediate bias; execute it however you normally trade.

Macro economic to micro technical (L6)

  • The goal is a 3–6 month outlook, and it comes from a visual interpretation of the bond market — the 30-year Treasury bond and the 10-year note — not from bank reports or sifting fundamentals.
  • Bond futures rally = rates lowering. Bond futures drop = rates increasing. And rates up → dollar up, as funds chase yield.
  • Run SMT in two layers: bonds vs. USDX, and the 10-year vs. the 30-year. The dollar failing to make a lower low while bonds make a higher high marks the quarterly shift forming.
  • The interest rate markets control everything — without interest rates nothing in the financial industry moves. Rates give the direction; the technicals give the execution.

Traps 3 & 4 — trendline phantoms and head & shoulders (L7, L8)

  • Trendlines are opinions, not edges — everyone draws them, everyone sees the same touches, and price has no awareness of the line — it only respects where the liquidity actually is. A line needs two points to draw and a third to confirm, and retail buys the third touch. The real target is the liquidity pool: buy stops above point 2 of a declining line, sell stops below point 2 of a rising one. Look for an orderblock or turtle soup above that high, after touch 2 and before a clean touch 3.
  • Head & shoulders: picking tops and bottoms is one of the worst games to play, especially for the new trader — even seasoned pros don't do it — and this is the pattern that convinces people to do it. The stops above the head and shoulders are the liquidity being engineered for — the prettier the pattern, the more stops are stacked. The neckline break is a turtle soup, not a sell signal. Only fade it in the direction the HTF bias already supports.
The pattern ruleA retail pattern is never a forecast — it is a map of where the crowd's stops are. Don't trade the pattern; trade the stops the pattern creates.

Month 4 — The PD Arrays

The ten arrays at a glance (L3–L12)

Orderblock
The lowest down-close candle with the most open-to-close range near support. Only suspected until a later candle trades through its high. Enter at the open of the down candle; the best ones never trade below the 50% mean threshold.
Mitigation block
An M pattern into resistance that breaks the prior short-term low — the market structure shift. Sell the return to the last down candle before the little rally, where trapped longs bail at breakeven ("buyer's remorse"). The body should not be violated.
Breaker
An old low is violated (stops taken), then price runs back through the swing high between the two lows. The last up candle inside that swing high is the bullish breaker — explosive because it is covering plus new entries at the same price. No stop raid, no breaker.
Rejection block
A swing high with long wicks that pushes above the highest body to run liquidity, then declines. Frame it from the highest wick high down to the highest open or close and treat it as a bearish orderblock. No higher high is required.
Reclaimed block
The market maker buy model — price goes lower to go higher. On the sell side of the curve market makers scale in and hedge down; the last down candle before each little rally is a block that gets reclaimed as price rises back through it.
Propulsion block
A down candle that trades into a prior bullish orderblock while the context is already bullish. Highly sensitive: the mean threshold should never break, so you can run an ultra-tight stop and get immediate feedback if you're wrong.
Vacuum block
A gap from a volatility event — NFP, FOMC, a shock, a session open — where no trade could occur. Treat the empty gap as its own candle (high, low, mean threshold, open, close). Fill behaviour is time-of-day sensitive: an 8:30 gap likely fills the same day; a 10–11am gap likely stays open as an FVG.
Liquidity pool
Where the stops rest. Roleplay it: "if I were short here, where would my buy stop be?" Expect a 10–20 pip sweep; buy under the low, not at it; beyond 25 pips it is probably not a sweep but a continuation.
Liquidity void
A range where only one side of liquidity was shown — big, quick, one-sided candles with very little wick; a run down is a void of buy-side liquidity. There is no specific time for a void to fill; it gets covered back over once both sides have been offered. Sometimes it first drops lower to fake people out, then fills completely.
Fair value gap
Three candles: the pocket between the low of the left candle and the high of the right candle around a big move. Only one side of liquidity was offered there, so price is drawn back to rebalance it. The gap exists on the timeframe you're viewing.
They overlap by designFVGs, liquidity voids, orderblocks and liquidity pools overlap a lot. A single run can take buy stops (pool), hit an FVG, and on a lower timeframe show up as a liquidity void — all at once. That is not a contradiction; it is confluence.

Internal vs. external liquidity — the framework for entries and exits (L2, L3)

  • Entries on internal range liquidity (an orderblock), exits on external range liquidity (old highs and lows). You buy the block and sell into the buy stops above an old daily or weekly high — pairing your exit with willing buyers.
  • Mark each new range high and low. Use the energetic low, not the consolidation low. If there are no ranges, target swing-low turtle soups.
  • Match the timeframe to the pip goal: under 20 pips, pass; 40+ pips is a viable 1-hour day trade; 75–100 pips needs the 1-hour or 4-hour; 250 pips over two weeks lives on the 4-hour or daily. A 1h orderblock with only a 20-pip target is no trade. One setup a week is enough.
  • Two disciplines cover everything: turtle soups (buying sell-stops, selling buy-stops), or a return to fair value (buying internal range liquidity). Pick whichever the chart shows most clearly.
  • Trading against the HTF narrative is a high resistance run — the trades you sit in too long. Low resistance runs give an immediate response and low drawdown.

The interest rate triad — the green light (L1)

Three futures markets overlaid: the 30-year bond, the 10-year note and the 5-year note. A raw chart tells you nothing — the edge is comparative overlay analysis of the three. They should confirm each higher high and lower low at the moment the Dollar Index is at a significant price point, and you only need one to break the pattern — a failure swing — to reveal smart money participation.

The action planHave a predetermined bias first — the triad validates an idea, it doesn't generate one. When price trades to a focus point (orderblock, liquidity pool, liquidity void or FVG), check the triad plus the Dollar Index. A divergence among the 30/10/5-year plus that array is the green light. No obvious divergence → pass on the trade.

Traps 5 & 6 — divergence phantoms and double tops/bottoms (L13, L14)

  • Divergence phantoms: indicators are mathematically derived and measure only the past; price has zero awareness of them. Banks aren't watching stochastics — they attack where the stops rest. Retail sells a type-1 (classic) bearish divergence at the top; price gives them ~30 pips, runs the sell stops below the equal lows into a bullish orderblock, and the oscillator makes a new low against a higher low in price — the hidden divergence ICT actually wants. Only pull up an indicator to read what retail is thinking, then find the institutional reason for the opposite. Retail's overlooked fifth condition is "is it even a time to trade?"
  • Double tops / bottoms: the algorithm remembers them as reference points and reaches through them for the stops. Never trust them — always expect them to be swept. The real target is the measured move: take the high-to-low of the consolidation between the two peaks and project it beyond the double top. On the 15-minute expect a 10–20 pip stop run; on the hourly that rule breaks down — use the measured range instead. Extreme ends of the range are where high-probability trading lives; the middle is low probability.

The numbers worth memorising

62 / 70.5 / 79%
The OTE zone — buys below equilibrium, sells above it
50%
Equilibrium, and the mean threshold of any orderblock (measured open-to-close)
3 candles
A swing high or low; wait for the 4th to confirm before you fib it
3 protractions
Per 24 hours: 0 GMT, after midnight NY, after 7 AM NY
10–20 pips
The size of a normal stop sweep beyond a level; beyond 25 it is probably not a sweep
~5 pips
Added to a limit order so the dealing spread fills you
1% risk
"One percent makes millionaires" — half the 2% industry standard
3:1
Be wrong 75% of the time and still be net profitable
50% acc · 5:1 · 1%
+20% a month — the optimal trading goal
6% a month
Doubles the account every year — 20 pips a week, 1.5% risk, 1:1
Half risk
The size to re-enter with after a loss on the same idea; mitigated at R2
7 things
2 big-picture + 2 intermediate + 3 short-term in agreement = a high reward setup
2–3×
The rally (in orderblock body heights) ICT wants before trusting a second entry
3–4 months
The quarterly shift — a reversal or extended consolidation
40+ pips
The minimum range worth taking a 1-hour setup for

The checklist before any trade

  1. Which condition is price in? Expansion, retracement, reversal or consolidation — and does the next state in the rules of conditions support your idea?
  2. What is the HTF bias? Monthly and weekly levels transposed onto the daily; which side of structure broke most recently.
  3. Premium or discount? Buys at equilibrium or below; sells at 62% or above. Never buy a premium, never sell a discount.
  4. Where is the untapped liquidity, and is the run to it low resistance? If the path is defended, pass.
  5. Which PD array are you entering on? An internal-range reference with a defined mean threshold — not a line drawn on a whim.
  6. Where is the external liquidity you'll exit into? Know the target before entry; if the range is too small for your timeframe, there is no trade.
  7. Does anything confirm? SMT against the dollar index, the interest rate triad, time of day, the midnight NY open.
  8. Is the risk right? 1–2%, stop beyond the block, sized off the pip distance, with a 3R+ objective and partials planned.
  9. Does it respond immediately? If the reaction is lethargic, there are no institutional orders there — reduce or leave.

What the course keeps warning you about

The repeated warnings
  • Don't chase. Wait for the return to the array; you won't catch every move, and you're not supposed to.
  • Don't pick tops and bottoms without a HTF premise — that is what the head & shoulders and the divergence trade are engineered to make you do.
  • Don't trade patterns for the sake of patterns. Flags, trendlines, double tops and H&S are maps of stops, not forecasts.
  • Don't marry your analysis. If real-time price stops making sense for the conditions you expected, switch gears or go to the sidelines.
  • Don't stalk reversals in symmetrical (confirmed) markets — every run past a level there is just a raid before continuation.
  • Don't increase risk after a loss. Halve it. Equity preservation is the number one rule.
  • Don't expect perfection. EQ gets hit and fails; OTE gets blown through and stops you out — sometimes twice in a row. It is going to happen.
  • Don't forecast while you're still learning — build the daily log first and let the anticipatory skill develop from the data.
Ready?If most of the above reads as familiar rather than new, take the Final Exam — 45 questions across all four months. Anything you get wrong points you straight back at the lesson to re-read.
ICT Core (Months 1–4) · Section Review

Final Exam

45 questions drawn from every lesson in this section. Nothing is graded until you submit — and you can retake it as many times as you like.
Part 1 · Lesson 1

Getting Your Mindset Right

Before a single chart — what this mentorship is, what it deliberately leaves out, and what it asks of you.

This first episode is a prep to get your mindset correct before the lessons begin. Nothing is taught about price yet; everything here is about how to approach what follows.

Three stages

Everyone is treated as a green horn — someone yearning to learn how to do this. The mentorship is designed to move you through three stages:

Yearner
You want to learn this — you haven't traded yet, or you've tried and failed
Learner
You become a structured learner, working through a process
Earner
At your own discretion and timing — this one is not on a schedule

It is not a year-long mentorship. The plan is roughly three or four months, and that count includes March 2022, when nothing is uploaded at all.

A deliberately stripped-down model

ICT built this as a simple model — one he describes framing so that his daughter could look at it and see that there aren't a lot of moving parts: simple to decide what she wants to do, and just as importantly when not to do something. No bells and whistles, no advanced theories.

Why not the full arsenal?The highest form of analysis he teaches in his private mentorship does create exceptional traders — but the majority of students get bogged down in all of the content and it creates analysis paralysis. Like a kid in a candy store: what do you eat first, and what do you reach for while you're still chewing? He can put these things in your hands, but they have sharp edges — use live ammunition before you're properly trained and you can hurt yourself.

What is and isn't promised

The promises
  • You will learn things that repeat — a lot.
  • You will not be perfect. No teacher can provide 100% accuracy, and he doesn't trade perfectly either.
  • The goal is to improve your understanding of price action — how price is delivered, and how to read bias on an intraday and daily basis.
  • Setups repeat with common characteristics, but they are never carbon copies. You're learning to recognise a familiar setup, not to match a template.
  • No trade signals. He'll draw your attention beforehand to where price will likely draw to next — that is for study, not an enticement to take a live trade.

Independence is the point

Key ideaDo not grow a dependency on him pointing to everything before it happens. That mindset stunts your growth and creates a barrier — a codependent state of mind. He fosters an independent mindset, where you come to the decisions on your own, so the results are yours: if you succeed you own it, and if you fail you own that too.

He is openly realistic that some students will fail. From his 2016 paid mentorship there are students still trying to find their way, and others with mind-blowing results — the same material, different individual experiences. Responsibility is paramount, and it cannot be handed to anyone else. He frames it as a transferable skill — but one the student has to hone.

The markets and the platforms

The model is driven with index futures — but the concepts work in forex too, and he'll show how to scale them into any timeframe. ICT began in 1992 trading commodities and futures, moved to the 30-year treasury bond and the S&P, and found that intraday trading suited him where position trading did not.

Teaching is done through TradingView. For showing results outside a demo account he used a regulated broker rather than MT4 — because it has been shown how frauds and fakes can use that platform to edit trades after the market has already moved and pretend they were profitable. He is not recommending a broker; he is removing the ability to fake the result.

The arithmetic of the objective

One handle
e.g. 4567 → 4568 — that's four ticks
E-mini S&P
$50 per handle, so one tick is $12.50
Micros
$5 per handle — far less initial margin, and you can build up over time

You don't need the margin for a full E-mini contract. Outside the US you could trade a CFD on the US 500, but for US traders that is illegal because it doesn't go through a regulated exchange — which is why micros exist.

The goalA hypothetical income-based strategy — not beating the World Cup, not out-posting Instagram traders. If you can take 25 handles a week out of a market like the E-mini S&P, you can do very well. You don't need to hit home runs. The inspiration he offers: what if speculation covered half — or all — of a $1,500 rent or mortgage, or the car payment and insurance?

Bias before precision

Remember this oneYou don't need to be highly precise about your entries — he teaches forgiving entries. You do need to be precise about the directional bias and where price is reaching for. That, plus understanding the liquidity matrix — buy side and sell side, is the basis of how the markets work. It requires very little chart graffiti: a line marking a level he wants to see breached, and a level he wants to see price reach into.

What is asked of you

Your side of the deal
  • Have an independent mindset — see things yourself and come to decisions on your own.
  • Do not be codependent on him.
  • Don't cut corners in his teachings.
  • Do your homework. Study, and do the things he suggests — study hard and fully understand the concepts.
  • Backtest, backtest, backtest.

If drills and homework are suggested, participate as best you can. Not everyone can watch live data — there are businesses, school, jobs and family — and reviewing after the fact isn't the same as seeing it live, but it is the best you can do.

Part 1 · Lesson 2

FVGs, Liquidity & The Judas Swing

The first real teaching — the elements of a trade setup, from the weekly bias all the way down to the two-minute entry.

This is elements to a trade setup — the framework the whole model rests on. It is presented predominantly as a futures index mentorship, taught through TradingView paper trading or hindsight data, with the NASDAQ e-mini (NQ) as the main focus. NQ is a little faster and a little more aggressive than the S&P, but the same reading applies to ES and YM.

The episode opens with a set of live thinkorswim executions from that day — shown for contrast, not as a promise. Out of a screen full of reversals and small trades, the question posed is: which one of these would you actually want to learn how to find? The answer is the big one — and that single price leg is what the rest of the lesson dissects.

The size of the objective

A handle
Four ticks — the minimum fluctuation ×4. E.g. ES 4450 → 4451
E-mini S&P
$50 per handle ($12.50 a tick)
E-mini NASDAQ
$20 per handle — faster, more handles, more aggression
Full-contract margin
$17,000 for one NQ, ≈ $12,500 for one ES, unless you use a discount broker
Micros
A fraction of that margin — a smaller tick multiplier, and far less leverage to hurt yourself with
Not a scalping courseThe aim is not to hunt three to five handles and call it legendary. High-frequency trading like that can be profitable — it's what algorithms do — but this model looks for a whole intraday price leg. The example trade dissected in this episode was over 100 handles.

Start on the weekly — form a bias

Before the new trading week begins, preferably on the weekend, get a read on what the next weekly candle is likely to do: higher or lower. You are not trying to predict its close — only which end it is likely to expand toward. That is your weekly bias.

The question to askWhat is price most likely to draw towards? Is there an imbalance higher, or a liquidity pool lower? That single question sets your initial bias for the week.

Think of price as a paperclip and specific price levels as a magnetic impulse pulling it toward them. The speed and magnitude with which it gets there is not something that can be handed to you — that part comes from screen time and study.

In the week used as the example, lower prices were expected for a short list of reasons: seasonal tendency at that time of year, the discussion around the Fed raising interest rates, earnings season volatility, and the heavy underlying tone visible on the daily chart.

One setup is enoughThe weekly candle may do its expansion in the first half of the week — or in a single day. If you get a setup in that, you're done. No student should try to trade every session every day: it builds an expectation of daily profitability, and the first loss after a good run pushes you into irrational decisions and the loser cycle.

Then the daily — where the liquidity is

The majority of your analysis lives on the daily chart: its swing highs and swing lows hold the liquidity, and the draw on liquidity that makes the market go higher or lower is predominantly found there. With a bearish weekly bias, the expectation is that every short-term low gets taken, because sell stops rest below them.

Price draws to one of two things
  • Stops — liquidity. Buy stops above old highs; sell stops below old lows.
  • An imbalance. A single candle passing higher (or lower) with no overlap on the opposite side — nothing there to offset it and deliver price efficiently.

The stop hunt before the move — the Judas swing

Dropping to the hourly and transposing the daily levels onto it: the week had been bearish all the way down, then went into consolidation, leaving a short-term high (buy stops above) and a short-term low (sell stops below). What happened next is the heart of the lesson.

  1. Price drops first and takes the sell stops. This is the sucker play — it induces shorts: anyone selling on weakness gets tripped into the market.
  2. Price is then driven up through the short-term high. That punishes the traders just tripped in, and sends every buy stop above that high into the market as a market order.
  3. That flood of willing buyers at a high price is the perfect counterparty for smart money that wants to sell short at a high price. Then the market goes down, which is where it wanted to go all along.
Record this in your notesAny time a significant price move lower is expected, always anticipate some measure of stop hunt on buy stops — a short-term high being taken out — first. It is reversed when you expect higher prices: a short-term low and its sell stops get taken before a pronounced rally. Don't take it on faith; go through your charts and you'll see it happening almost daily.

On the 15-minute chart the setup is even clearer: the highs before the drop were relative equal highs. Retail reads that as resistance and, as every book instructs, parks buy stops just above it — so the liquidity is engineered there, and it sits in sync with everyone already short from the day before who trailed their stop above that high.

The entry — imbalance after a break in market structure

Once the run on the buy stops has happened on the higher timeframe, drop down to look for the trigger. The 1-, 2- and 3-minute charts tend to be the best for finding imbalances on the indices — the high-frequency algorithms operate at nothing really higher than three minutes, mostly at 15-, 30-, 45- and 60-second intervals. Even the 5-minute chart still has a lot of room for imbalances to occur underneath it.

1
A run on liquidity — buy stops taken, if you're bearish
2
A break in market structure — a short-term swing low broken
3
The imbalance that displacement leaves behind: the candle before its high, the candle after its low, no overlap. That is the fair value gap
4
Price trades back up into the gap — that's the short
Entry, stop, targetEnter in the FVG. Put the stop above the candle above the gap — or above the swing high that was run, whichever your risk parameters allow. Exit where the liquidity is. If you'd rather be triggered in, a sell stop inside that candle works, using the candle's high as the stop.
Don't chaseYou can still get in as price moves down close to the gap. But once a low has been taken out you are chasing — a market order there invites slippage, which hands you a much larger area of risk. You have to learn to sell short while the candle is going up. It feels wrong, and retail can't grasp it because they've been told to wait for confirmation — which is precisely what makes them late.
The fair value gapThe FVG is not in any book — it was introduced back in 2016. And a rectangle on the chart is not supply and demand, and this is not auction theory: it is an algorithm delivering price. Once the price is inefficient on one side, the algorithm has to deliver the opposite side to book it efficiently.

Premium & discount — where you are inside the range

Take the range you're working in — the low of the day to the high of the day thus far — and split it. All you need is a Fibonacci with the 50% level showing.

Above 50%
Premium — an expensive market. Where you want to be selling
Below 50%
Discount — a cheap market. Where a sell is looking to go

Markets can stay in a premium for a while without going to a discount, so this is context, not a trigger. But when the fair value gap formed in the example, it formed in a premium — so the algorithm's opposing side of the market, the discount, is where price was headed. And below the 50% level sat both the sell stops and, right beside them, an imbalance left by an earlier single up candle — a buy-side imbalance that needed equal delivery. Price went down, took the stops, and closed that gap in completely.

Low hanging fruitTake the closest target — an old low, or an imbalance. Don't get fancy and aim for the lowest low on the chart, because the market can deny you that. Let it run further without you; that's fine.

When to watch

8:30 to 11:00 New York local time is the sweet spot — there is usually a setup in there. If you have a business, school or a job, that is the window to protect. If you can't watch live, TradingView's replay lets you study how price gravitated toward levels, though the candles are stilted and you can't practise entries with it.

Keep the chart cleanNo graffiti. Trend lines here are only short line segments used to point at a level for students — the live chart is naked. While you're developing, do draw the levels in: it ingrains where liquidity is and stops you losing your bearings among the candles.

Homework

The assignment
  • Go through the e-mini futures charts on the timeframes used here.
  • Find breaks in market structure that follow a pool of liquidity being taken in the opposing direction to your weekly expected range.
  • Find the imbalance — the fair value gap — that the break leaves.
  • Determine where the opposing high or low resides as the target.
  • Log and backtest how many handles each one offered.

An intraday chart is anything below the daily — 4-hour, 1-hour, 5-, 3-, 2-, 1-minute. The impulse to trade this the first time you see it will be a problem for you: there is no escaping a number of weeks and months of backtesting first.

Part 1 · Lesson 3

Internal Range Liquidity & The Market Structure Shift

The one signature that validates a shift — and the order block, defined properly, that you buy or sell from inside it.

This lesson takes the homework chart — the 15-minute NQ from the previous episode — and shows the evidence that makes a market structure shift real. Everything else can be stripped away: no commitment of traders, no breakers, no supply and demand, no Elliott wave. This is the algorithmic perspective, and there is nothing you need to add to it.

Shift, not break

A note on the wordsThe terms get used interchangeably, but here market structure shift is deliberate. An intraday shift just means there is likely a draw intraday in that direction — it does not imply prolonged, multi-day movement. A bearish structure broken to the downside intraday may only give an intraday price leg, and that same high can be taken out later the same day. Market structure break carries more weight in context.

Where to anticipate a shift

On the 15-minute chart there was an old low with sell stops beneath it, and relative equal highs with buy stops above. Price traded down through the sell side, then rallied all the way back up and cleared the equal highs. Those two price points are where you anticipate a market structure shift. You do not force it and you do not try to get ahead of it.

Small insight for the journalYou could use a single old high, and there's nothing inherently wrong with that. But when there are relative equal highs and they sit higher than an older high, use the equal highs.

The evidence — the one condition

A short-term swing high is just a candle, a higher candle after it, and then a candle with a lower high. Simple — but it means a lot in the proper context. When that swing high is taken out, it is significant only under one condition:

The ruleBreaking a short-term high is significant only if the run down before it traded into sell stops — below an old low, a double bottom, a single low, something retail views as support. Bearish is the mirror: breaking a short-term low matters only because buy stops were taken above old highs first. No liquidity taken, no shift.

Two details that matter at the moment of the break:

  • Price only has to trade above the high — it does not need to close above it.
  • Once that candle closes, watch the next candle: does it leave a fair value gap? A candle's high, one single pass up, and the next candle's low that doesn't completely overlap it. If it does, that gap is the earliest place you can look to trade.

The market trades back down into the gap — and takes off.

The order block, defined properly

What an order block actually isAn order block is a change in the state of delivery. It is not "every down-closed candle is a bullish order block, every up-closed candle is a bearish one" — that is not the case.

Read it as a series, not a candle. A run of down-closed candles driving into sell-side liquidity is one continuous order block. The level is the opening price of the candle that started that series, extended out in time. While that series is running, the market is offering sell side. When price trades back above that opening, the state of delivery changes: now it is offering buy side, so what will it do next? Seek buy stops. Reversed exactly for a bearish order block — once the opening of an up-closed series is violated, the market offers sell side, runs below old lows and into imbalances until it reaches a discount.

Why that level is sensitiveThe algorithm remembers that opening price. That is the whole reason it works, and it is why the reference point is the open of the series rather than a candle body or a zone.
The entryCombine the two: the opening price of the order block, inside the fair value gap, is your buy — plus a few pips for spread — placed as a limit order. A high-probability bearish order block is the one that has the gap, has taken liquidity, and sits at a market structure shift.

Targets

Once you're short after a bearish shift, what you're reaching for is the sell stops below each short-term low and the fair value gap below. Multi-contract positions can scale out at those lows.

Choosing where to scaleDon't take a partial just below a low that is barely any distance from your entry — if you're going short up here, reach for the next one down that is actually worth taking. The primary objective sits below the 50% level of that high-to-low range: price is leaving a premium and going to a discount, and the gap is waiting there.

Inside the target gap, the first objective is its high end — the low of the candle that formed it. That is the low hanging fruit, the easiest thing to reach. Holding on to see whether it fills the gap completely, all the way to the far candle's high, is something you grow into over time; while learning, take it when the market gives it to you.

Two fair value gaps

For your notesWhen there are two fair value gaps stacked, take the higher one — but let price trade down into the lower one first, sacrificing the technically better entry. If it stabs the lower gap, forms a tail, and comes back up into the higher gap, enter there and expect the lower one won't be traded to again. If price runs up into the opposite imbalance first, before reaching your area, nix the trade and go to the sidelines.

What is actually moving price

High-frequency algorithms hammer orders in — buy, buy, buy. Put this in your notes: that is not what causes the market to go higher. It is volume coming in. What makes price rise is the algorithm constantly offering price at a higher price. That is also why your fill isn't guaranteed at the level you clicked: try to buy at 14,662 with a market order and you may be confirmed at 14,664 — negative slippage; filled at 14,661 instead and that's positive slippage.

Engineered liquidityA series of highs stalling just under a level builds up the belief that it is resistance — that is engineering liquidity. When price finally runs above it, those buy stops become buyers coming in at a high price, which is exactly where smart money that bought down at the lows sells to.

Times of day to mark

Always set your times to New York local time. Mark the high and low of each session — the market will probably sweep above or below them and create precisely the situations taught here.

London
2:00 – 5:00 am
New York
7:00 – 10:00 am
Asia
7:00 – 9:00 pm
Plus
Any intraday high or low forming right before equities open at 9:30
Hours of operationGenerally 8:30 to 11:00 am, extendable to New York lunch at noon. Do not take trades after noon — that hour is problematic. If you want the afternoon, wait for 1:00, preferably 1:30, through 4:00, where a setup typically forms between 2:00 and 3:00 — but the afternoon session is outside the scope of this mentorship. For a developing student, the morning window is enough.

Internal range liquidity

DefinitionInternal range liquidity is a short-term high or low sitting inside a price leg you are retracing back into, with stops above or below it — or an imbalance in that same range of price action. That's all it means.

Risk and how to sit in the trade

Comfortable
3 – 3.5% risk — "a good trade for me"
Maximum
4.5% per trade when trading competitively

This is stated as a personal parameter, not a suggestion for your size. Once the trade is on you have handed complete control to the marketplace — let it do what it's going to do rather than overthinking every fluctuation. Watching the profit-and-loss number tick up and down is the worst thing to do; watch the chart instead, and ask whether it keeps giving you feedback that it is accumulating rather than going lower. Expect in advance that price may dip once more into the lower gap, so that when it happens you're already desensitised to it.

Keep the chart naked

Nothing is on the chart during live trading — zero. Annotations exist only so students can see the internal dialogue. Levels drawn on a chart lock you into one expectation of what can happen; a clean chart keeps you fluid with what the market is actually doing.

Homework

The assignment
  • Go through the e-mini futures intraday charts looking for stop hunts that lead to intraday market structure shifts.
  • Annotate the 15-minute chart with your buy-side and sell-side liquidity pools, then drop into the 3-, 2- and 1-minute charts for the shift signature.
  • Focus on 8:30 am to noon New York time, and work backwards from today as far as the data allows.
  • Log every example with your own annotations in a study journal.
  • The challenge is explicit: go into your charts and look for this not being true. Don't take anyone's word for it — you'll convince yourself.

Backtesting is not just dressing up the chart and calling it done. Study it: how far did it move, how long did it take, how much drawdown would it have put on you? When you hit a stretch where nothing feels like it's working, the journal is what carries you through it.

The deer trackYou wouldn't know what a deer track looked like until someone showed you one. That's all this lesson is: showing you what the track looks like. The rest — the workload of backtesting, logging and acquiring examples — is the secret, and it's the part most people say they do and don't.
Part 1 · Lesson 4

Worked Examples & What to Journal

Two days of real delivery walked through with the rules from the previous lesson — including the setups that were correctly passed on.

A shorter, more direct lesson: no new theory, just Wednesday's and Thursday's trading measured against the model taught on Tuesday night. The instruction repeated throughout is the same one — don't use these charts alone. Go into your own platform, your own feed, and find your own examples.

Example 1 — e-mini S&P, Wednesday 26 January 2022

Start from the obvious low, run up to the high, and drop a fib on that range to get the equilibrium price point — the 50% level. The rally up pushes the market into a premium: it is really expensive up there. Now watch what happens on the way back down.

  • It breaks down below the old high — but does it create a fair value gap? No. So there is nothing to do.
  • It rallies one more time, then breaks down again — and this time there is a break in market structure.
  • Price runs back up into the fair value gap, then sells off, reaching into the old low — which sits below the equilibrium of the whole range.
What you are targetingWith the fib on the range, you are looking for a low or an imbalance below the 50% level. Both existed here: a swing low, and an imbalance beneath it. Price hit the imbalance, came off it, and then drew down into the more pronounced low below.

Zooming in — the 2-minute detail

What 8:30 meansThere is a previous short-term high, and 8:30 in the morning starts the hunt — that is what 8:30 is. You are looking for an old high to be violated, and it is.

From there the sequence is exactly the one taught in the last lesson. After the run above the old high, price breaks structure below a swing low; that candle sets the stage. The question is then whether price draws back up into the fair value gap left by the bearish market structure shift. It does — that is where you can go short, targeting the old low, or the annotated low from the wider view.

Hypothetically: short around 4419, cover around 4382 — deliberately imperfect numbers. That is the opportunity the range offered; you do not have to have all of it for it to be very nice delivery.

What to write down

Journal every example
  • How long it took from the market structure shift occurring to price getting back up into the fair value gap.
  • How long it took from your entry down to your target.
  • How much heat or drawdown you would have weathered holding that short.

Type those observations straight into the open space on the chart. Note also that using the entry candle's high, you technically could have been filled higher — but the framing here is deliberately the total range available in hindsight, because that is what trains the eye. These examples are never photocopies of each other; what recurs are the similarities, and recognising those is the point. It is the deer track again: you have to know what one looks like before you can stalk it.

Example 2 — e-mini Nasdaq, Thursday 27 January 2022

Where to startThe 5-minute chart is the timeframe you start with, and you work down from there.

The low-to-high range is immediately visible. Going back in time there is an old high, and there are also relative equal highs — a reasonable initial objective, looking for them to be taken out. They are. But then: does it break down and give a fair value gap? No — so it doesn't even meet the criteria.

Why you stand asideThe rules are specific on purpose. They effectively force the market to show its hand; only once it has can you act. You have to wait for the setup — you can't force it, you can't think it's there. It's there or it's not.

So price runs above the old high where buy-side liquidity rests, but it does not then break down below the short-term low — it goes higher instead. You keep waiting for a break lower to get the intraday shift. When a candle finally trades down through the swing low, that is the moment the opportunity exists: go back to that candle's high and that candle's low and look for the fair value gap — it is right there.

The market rallies back up and trades into it: that is the short. It breaks down, retrades into the gap once more, and then reaches below the equilibrium price point. Several targets sat there — the lows and the imbalance — and it hit all of them and travelled a little further still.

Homework

The assignmentGo back through more data — use the weekend — and acquire more examples of internal range liquidity and intraday market structure shifts, so they can go into your study journal. Next lesson moves on to refining targets and entries.
Part 1 · Lesson 5

Intraday Order Flow & The Daily Range

How the trading day is framed — morning, lunch, afternoon — plus displacement, the three drives pattern, and the two patterns that are the whole afternoon playbook.

This lesson is the intraday framework: setting up the daily range and the intraday layout, and starting to think in terms of daily profiles. Bias and specific entry techniques come later; here the job is the structure of the day itself.

Which markets this is for

ScopeEverything taught here is directly linked to index futures — S&P, NASDAQ and the Dow, and you can use the Russell 2000. Ideas about trading the Asian range are not applicable to these markets and are not taught to these students. Focus only on what's shown in this mentorship.

The boring part: contracts and rollover

Index futures trade with expiration dates, and the delivery month is in the symbol — ES for e-mini S&P, then a month code and the year.

H
March
M
June
U
September
Z
December

Those are the only four months the index futures trade — e-mini S&P, e-mini NASDAQ and e-mini Dow. Expiration is the third Friday of the delivery month, and you do not want to be trading after expiration. The current contract is the front month (or nearby); the one after it is the next month out.

When to rollAround the first or second day of the week prior to expiration, start monitoring open interest and trade whichever month has the larger open interest — you want the liquidity in the bigger pool offered by the most-traded contract month. If you're ever in doubt, barchart.com lists it free: select commodity → S&P 500 E-mini (ignore the cash line at the top).

The bellwether timeframe

The 15-minute chart is where key highs and lows are marked and where imbalances like fair value gaps are found. Order blocks are deliberately kept out of this mentorship — there are models that don't rely on them at all. The fair value gap is the main focus, because it repeats, it's an easy pattern, and it's there a lot.

Framing the day

Put a vertical line at 8:30, and clone it out: an equal stretch of time through the morning, then the one-hour New York lunch, then an equal amount of time after that. Those are your boundaries.

New York local time — no exceptionsSet your charting platform to New York local time. Wherever you are in the world you can calibrate from that. Use any other time zone and your levels won't line up with anyone else's — everything taught here is directly linked to New York time.
Morning
8:30 (news events come out then) to noon — preferably positioned before 11:00
Lunch
Noon – 1:00 pm — a no-trade period. Not even in demo.
Afternoon
From 1:30 at the earliest

The aim in the morning is to be in position before 11:00 and hopefully riding something into the lunch hour, then squaring up or taking some off if you intend to hold through to the close. The lunch hour can do weird things or simply go sideways — either way it is not a clean time of day for price action.

What to mark before 8:30

The question that keeps coming in is which highs and lows a stop run gets framed on. On the 15-minute, to the left of 8:30, find the most significant or obvious swing high and swing low:

The three-candle definitionA swing high is a candle with a lower high to the left of it and a lower high to the right of it. A swing low is a candle with a higher low to the left and a higher low to the right. It does not matter whether the candles close up or down — that has no bearing at all. The swing points are simply where liquidity is placed: buy stops above the high, sell stops below the low.

You are looking for the first one — there's no need to go back days and days. Once those levels are on the 15-minute, drop to your first lower timeframe for entry, the 5-minute; the annotations transpose with you.

Three drives

Alongside relative equal highs, watch for three short-term highs stepping progressively higher — the classic three drives pattern (met years ago as the "three little indians" in Linda Raschke and Larry Connors' Street Smarts, the book that first made stop hunts make sense).

Why the third drive needn't clear the old highWhen three drives run up into an old high, that third high does not have to take the old high out. Every time it makes a swing high and turns down, bears sell it and place buy stops above the previous high — and those keep getting taken. The liquidity is already being built in, and informed money is already establishing short positions.

Displacement

The elephant in the paddling poolFill a children's swimming pool, then drop an elephant into it — the water is obviously displaced. That's what you want in price. When price goes above an old high and then trades back down below it, the move down must be energetic and animated. A lethargic, anemic drift lower is not enough. Only once you get real displacement do you go looking for the fair value gap; if price trades back up into it, you look for the short.

That is the answer to the earlier question about a swing low that looked violated but wasn't used. The walk-through on the chart shows it repeatedly: a run above the swing high with only a weak move lower — pass. Another push up, a wick that snaps straight back with no gap in it — pass. Then price trades up and smashes down, the next candle closes, and there is the fair value gap. That's the short, reaching for the sell-side liquidity below the low you marked before 8:30.

These patterns do failThe rules exist for a reason, and they are not there to hide failure. Sometimes you read it wrong, sometimes a news event hits, sometimes the market simply rolls over the top of it and keeps going. That is a losing trade — which is exactly why you need a stop loss and sound money management. Leave the damage to the market's discretion and Murphy's Law will find you.

The afternoon session

The afternoon wasn't going to be taught at all, but it is included so the treatment of the daily range is complete.

1:30 onward1:30 is the earliest the afternoon is traded, and what's wanted is a swing high and swing low forming at 1:30 — the same three-candle points, used in exactly the same way as the pre-8:30 ones. The reason is that an algorithmic macro starts running at 1:30; that is beyond the scope of this mentorship, but something does create movement there.

From there it is the same stop-hunt logic. A too-clean level — straight-line edges in the market — is a level in jeopardy; those don't tend to stay. When the swing low is violated, that small stop hunt is all that is necessary to start a buy program.

SpoolingA buy program is the algorithm going into spooling — continuously offering higher and higher prices. It does not matter what the volume is. Sometimes good volume comes in, sometimes it doesn't and the move happens anyway — that discrepancy is the signature that tells you price is being manipulated. These things won't line up every day, but when the same fingerprints show up they tend to repeat.
The only two patterns you need
  • After 1:30, wait for a swing low to be violated — buy those sell stops and expect the level above to be taken out.
  • If no swing low gets traded below, look for a sudden displacement higher, then a fair value gap; when price trades back down into it, buy.
Reversed for the sell side. That's it — no fifteen gimmicky names, no breakers, no order blocks. The logic simply has to be there for one of them to form.

Late in the day there is a repeating phenomenon around 20 minutes to 4, 10 minutes to 4, and 4:00, driven by market-on-close orders: the algorithms start spitting out very aggressive pricing, forcing traders to cover or get out, and a move already going up tends to ramp into the close.

A NASDAQ example

At 1:30 there is a swing low sitting at almost the same price as an earlier one — relative equal lows, which retail reads as support and buys. Further to the left there is a fair value gap, and above the relative equal highs sits buy-side liquidity. If you think the market is going higher, the sell stops beneath those equal lows are what you want to be buying.

How it feels liveWatching on a 1-minute chart, that sudden drop through the low looks dynamic and aggressive — zoomed in it feels like the floor has dropped out. That is exactly what you are looking for to buy.

The counter-example is deliberate: taking a handful of ticks with a large number of contracts, worrying about every fluctuation and about the stop being hit. If someone has to stack contracts to make a tiny move pay, it suggests they don't understand how price works — otherwise they wouldn't be reaching for micro moves at all. You are not trying to do 25 or 30 trades. Look for the real move in the morning and the real move in the afternoon — and if you get the morning one, don't trade the afternoon; practise in demo instead of handing the money back.

Daily profiles — the homework

The assignmentAnnotate your charts this way — 8:30, the lunch hour, the afternoon — then describe what each session did: was the morning bullish, bearish, or consolidation, and what followed in the afternoon? Then look back at what the daily chart was showing in the days before.

Patterns you'll see recur: bullish morning then a reversal in the afternoon; bullish morning then continuation, giving a measured move — the afternoon duplicating the morning's range, so a 200-point morning plus another 200 in the afternoon makes a 400-point day; or a consolidating morning that then trends in the afternoon, higher or lower. It's the same shape taught in the Forex daily range — an initial high and low of the day, consolidation, then continuation in the same direction — just with everything re-based to New York time.

When to stand asideWhen a report or an unannounced world event causes volatility, price action goes noisy. Stand on the sidelines and wait for it to smooth out — that might take a day, or even a week. Let the market come back into sync. (These markets also tend to be hit-or-miss in July and August; the rest of the year they deliver nicely.)
Part 1 · Lesson 6

The Market Efficiency Paradigm & Institutional Order Flow

The fair value gap defined candle by candle, the displacement range it must form inside, and a live short walked from entry to both targets.

How to internalise price delivery

  • You do not trade patterns for patterns' sake.
  • You do not trade indicator readings or momentum.
  • You look to enter longs where retail sells, and shorts where retail buys.
On "talking like an institution"Everyone here is operating through retail avenues to reach the marketplace — that isn't the point. What's being taught is the internal dialogue: not thinking like the collective, because the majority of retail traders lose. They have a failed logic, no consistency and no longevity, so the aim is to engage with price in the opposite way.

Two camps, and what each one looks at

Picture the market as informed (smart) money — a small circle — and a much larger collective of speculative, uninformed money, constantly flowing in as new accounts arrive and flowing out as accounts blow up.

There are no secret indicatorsInformed money is not reaching for stochastics, RSI, or anything else on a platform's indicator list. What they look at is time and price — and time is the most crucial element. There are specific times inside the daily range that build the likelihood of volatility arriving and of short-term reversals occurring. Retail has no real affinity for time beyond "I'm at my computer now, so I can trade".

Smart money looks to cannibalise the uninformed group, because they're typically wrong in their directional bias and in their stop placement — if they use a stop at all. That is the familiar conundrum: a stop placed too shallow gets picked off prematurely, one placed too far away lets a spike take a big loss before price turns back their way.

The paradigm itselfWhat smart money is asking is not "which pattern is this" but: what is the underlying narrative right now — is the daily range going higher, and how? Perhaps lower first, to sucker traders into shorts, run the sell stops, acquire long positions there, and then rally into the afternoon or the close. Viewing the market through the liquidity that uninformed money provides is what makes it efficient for them — that is the market efficiency paradigm.

The bearish fair value gap, candle by candle

This is an institutional order flow pattern — a three-candle formation, and the logic never changes.

The criteria
  • Candle 1 is the high. Candle 1's low must be traded below on the immediately following candle.
  • Candle 3 must trade with an extended low that goes below candle 2 — and it must not trade with a high that reaches back to candle 1's low.
  • That leaves a gap where price only traded from candle 1's low down to candle 3's high.
Candle 1
Its low is the upper end of the gap
Candle 2
Where the gap resides
Candle 3
Its high is the lower end of the gap

Inside that space, price was only ever offered on the sell side.

The paint rollerRoll a loaded paint roller down a wall: the first stretch goes on thick, then it starts leaving little porous pockets. How do you fix it? You change direction and roll back up over the same place. That is exactly what price does — an algorithm delivering efficient market delivery. It will want to trade back into that inefficient area at some future time, and if you are bearish, that is your short.
Where the optimal ones formYou are not hunting little gaps everywhere on the chart. The optimal bearish formation comes after a run into buy-side liquidity — price trades above an old high (a single high, or multiple highs like a double top), then breaks down. Nothing prior to that matters except that it traded above an old high.
The entryThe easiest entry is a limit order just above candle 3's high — no guessing where to put it. The stop goes above candle 1, or above candle 2 if you can afford less range. While you're learning, take the wider one: you want a lot of range at the start.

Displacement — the range the gap must sit in

Conceptually, the bearish market structure shift is: market trading higher, a short-term retracement, a trade above an old or short-term high, and then a break down. Once that low is broken, the trade idea is born — you still don't know where you're getting in.

What "quick" meansThe rally above the high must quickly shift lower, and quick means displacement: energetic, showing real willingness to go lower, and preferably closing below that short-term low. A little wick through the low that comes straight back up is not convincing.

The high of that move is the displacement high; the level below the short-term low that got broken is the displacement low. That range is where you hunt the fair value gap — it is exactly where it forms, on every timeframe, not just intraday.

No gap, no tradeIf there is no fair value gap inside the displacement range, you don't have a trade. You wait, or you go to another market — this pattern forms every single trading day, long and short, but only if you look for it with this process.

The bullish mirror

Everything reverses exactly. The bullish three-candle gap: candle 1's high is the low of the gap, candle 3's low is the high of the gap, and candle 2 is where it resides. The logic to blend in is the bullish market structure shift — price trades below an old low (perhaps another leg lower) into sell stops, then runs higher, takes out a short-term high and closes above it with energetic displacement. The gap lives between that displacement low and displacement high. If there isn't one there, there is no trade.

Don't mutate itThis is the logic going forward and it does not change. You don't add someone else's ideas on top of it — do anything other than this and you won't be finding the fair value gap being described here.

Live example — NASDAQ, 3 February 2022

Start on the 15-minute bellwether chart, naked. Mark 8:30 — employment data came out that morning — and look to the left for the first swing high. Draw it out in time. When price runs above it, strip down through the timeframes: 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 minute, all of them open at once and cycled through quickly, looking for the formation.

The 9:30 openIf price runs above your level early and you think you've missed it — don't. The equity market opens at 9:30 and gets busy and volatile, and usually, though not always, the first run at 9:30 is opposite to the real move. That sloppy action built lows with sell stops beneath them, inducing traders into longs, while leaving the highs above intact.

Watching it unfold, the filter does the work. The initial poke above the marked high went up and came back down — but every candle overlapped, so there was no gap, and no swing low had been taken. Nothing there. Then a higher high formed above the 15-minute level; now you wait to see whether it breaks lower. It trades below the swing low, and between that highest high and that low, the three candles appear — there is the gap.

An entry one tick above candle 3's high removes all the doubt, with the stop above candle 2's high (or candle 1, which forms the swing high). Price came back and offered that entry three separate times, the third almost completely closing the range back in.

What it feels like liveThat third retracement looks, in the moment, like it's going to keep going higher — the candle was all green and bold at its high. You have to train yourself on the pattern as it forms. After you've seen dozens of them it stops being frightening and becomes something you anticipate.

Targets — internal, then external

Put a fib on the low to the high of the run. The 50% level is equilibrium; below it is a discount. Selling short in the premium, your first objective is the opposite fair value gap sitting below equilibrium, and after that the sell stops beneath the relative equal lows.

The two kinds of liquidityThe gap inside the range is internal range liquidity — internal relative to that low and that high. The stops resting below the lows are external range liquidity. Partials at the internal, the balance at the external.

The actual trade that day: short 2 minis at 14,792.5 off the fair value gap, first partial at 14,675, and a limit order filling the rest at 14,647. Roughly 60 handles inside about eleven one-minute candles — over a thousand dollars in less time than a cigarette break — inside a move of some 120 handles.

Don't roll the stop earlySharp pullbacks like the ones inside that move are intended to upset traders and knock out anyone trailing a stop too tightly, right before the real leg down. Use the first partial to quench the urge to move your stop. Only once a significant intermediate-term low has been taken out can you roll the stop down to it — not before, because without the experience to place a trailing stop you will simply be stopped out.
On the numbersThe day's return on that account is explicitly waved away — "that's nothing… don't think that's what you can do". The instruction is only to practise the logic, in a demo, until you get good at it.

What makes this a model

Every example shown so far happens at the same time of day, in the same way, and performs as taught. That is what makes it a model, a trading plan, an executable idea — rather than a pattern you trade because you think you see it.

Part 1 · Lesson 7

Daily Bias & Consolidation Hurdles

Reading bias off the daily range, what to do when consolidation makes that read impossible, and using the other indices to time an entry your own chart never showed.

Reading the daily chart for bias

The daily NASDAQ chart is where the read starts. Price ran a set of relative equal highs — taking buyside liquidity — then broke below a swing low. That gives you a range to work with: this high to that low. Note how energetic the run down was: four consecutive down-closed candles is a lot of movement.

Once sellside had been taken out below the old low, price was likely to retrace back up inside that range. It did — up into a premium (above equilibrium), then back down into a discount, bouncing off the old low.

The bias questionYou look at the daily chart to answer one thing: where is price likely to draw to next? Is it drawing higher to an old high, or lower to an old low? Until it reaches that draw and puts in a higher low, you stay with that bias.

With a bearish market structure shift lower, a rally into a fair value gap, and old lows still sitting below, the bias each day is bearish. The targets in that range are the midpoint of the low-to-high (where there was also a gap) and the old low beneath it.

What a bias does — and doesn't — promise

A bearish bias does not mean every single day closes down. Count the up-closed candles during that decline from the high to the low: two. When delivery by the algorithms is spooling — price expanding directionally one way — there will still be up-closed days where a short you took lost. No big deal; you go into the next day looking for shorts again.

Embrace imperfectionYou will not get in perfectly, out perfectly, or with the perfect number of contracts, and you may not even be on the asset that delivers best. Being right is not equivalent to being profitable. A small string of losing trades does not in any way diminish the effectiveness of a model built on sound logic.

What traders hung up on daily bias are really demanding is a magic bullet: sell the exact high, buy back the exact low, catch the whole move, never take a loss, and skip the days that go against them. Nobody trades perfectly. You have to accept the grey area — the place where things aren't clear, and only past experience of seeing things unfold carries you through.

Bias sets your leverage

Bias doesn't only tell you which direction to hunt — it sizes the trade. Trading with the bias justifies the larger position; trading counter-trend to it means the leverage gets dialled right back.

With the bias (bearish setup)Consider — not always — the maximum: 4.5%. Preferred comfort level: 3.5%.
Counter-trend (a long in a bearish bias)Still allowed, but taken with far less leverage.
You, learning thisLess than 1% — about a half or a quarter percent.
Explicitly not a recommendation"I'm not telling you to use 3.5%." If you don't yet know what you're doing there is no reason to put high levels of risk behind a move — it creates toxic thinking, bad habits, and a fear of executing based on the results you're getting. Start indifferent to results: demo account, very low leverage, if not deleveraging entirely.

The consolidation hurdle

After the retracement, price consolidated around equilibrium — and that condition makes a true reading on bias very difficult. This is stated plainly: there are times when even ICT does not have a clear read on what he's looking for. The honest answer is to demand more price action and more information — "Intel" — from what the market does after the 9:30 open.

No read is not no tradingWhen bias is unclear you don't sit out. You drop to the smaller intraday time frames and simply look for liquidity pools: trade the intraday volatility, run old highs, run out old lows, be far more nimble. Like a surgical strike — take your handles and run. Don't overstay your welcome.

Not knowing is worth saying out loud: "I don't know" is not ignorance and not an absence of skill — it's honesty.

Framing the intraday chart

On the 15-minute chart the 8:30 crosshair goes on — a vertical line marking the time you start looking back to the left from.

  • Look left of 8:30 for the first low. That's your reference; there's liquidity resting below it.
  • Where a candidate low sits inside another candle, don't use it on its own — use the extreme, because that's where the liquidity will be.
  • Keep looking left. Those relative equal highs are what retail reads as resistance — they see price stopping there. That level makes the first target to reach for, and the market later showed how "real" that resistance was by going straight through it.
  • A longer-term intraday target sits further left again, at the high beyond it that is essentially the same level.
Time before priceAlgorithms run on time and price — not price and time. So you refer to time first: what's the important time? 8:30. Then go left and find the first low. That's the price.

Trading what isn't on your chart

Price traded below that old low, rallied, went down once more below the old low but not below the prior low, then turned higher. The honest question about the entry: what was seen on the NASDAQ two-minute chart that allowed a long there?

NothingThere was no evidence whatsoever in the NASDAQ that morning — no fair value gap in that leg at all. The signal was in the S&P.

On the S&P: price traded below the old low, took sellside out, then broke a swing high — a bullish market structure shift. Look back through that price leg and there's the fair value gap: one candle up, the next candle's low leaving the gap, with displacement either side. Price traded back down into it at 10:36, and that candle is the long.

These averages tend to move in tandem. So the S&P fair value gap is used as the trigger, and its timing is taken across to the NASDAQ — entering long at 14,505.5, in close proximity to an order block, with no gap of its own required. The exit came above the old high at 14,622.75: 117 handles, $2,345 on one contract.

"My indicator"The Dow and the S&P are used like indicators — but they aren't plastered over the chart like graffiti. The candlesticks are visible, the logic is visible, nothing masquerades price. You need to be able to read the story of price, not the story of indicators.

Why exit at the first target rather than hold for the rest? Holding it would paint the picture that these moves can be taken down every time — and the reality is that developing this takes far more time than most expect.

Cracks in correlation

What gave the confidence that this was turning? Stack the three averages: Dow on top, NASDAQ in the middle, S&P below. During that decline the NASDAQ and the S&P both made a lower low — and the Dow refused to.

This is confirmation, not a signalYou are not looking for this pattern to tell you the direction. It confirms an idea you had already established before price does what it's doing in real time. You were already looking for a reason to go higher: does price trade below an old low? Yes. Is there a bullish market structure shift? Yes — in the S&P.
On its own it means nothingBy itself, a divergence between the averages means nothing. Students see it and think "it's diverging so it goes the other way" — that's the wrong lesson, and it's a lesson learned the expensive way: accounts were blown in the '90s doing exactly that, hunting divergences with no narrative behind why the pattern should even form.

And understand why the Dow held up, because getting this wrong hurts anyone you pass it on to. The Dow is not refusing to go lower because buyers are coming in. It is an unwillingness to deliver to that low.

MacroSomething inside an algorithm that prevents or enables delivery — delivery of price.
Crack in correlationThe averages move lower in tandem, then that correlation cracks — here, at the exact time the NASDAQ and S&P were trading below their old low.
Turtle soupICT's own interpretation: a fake break above an old high setting up a short (or below an old low setting up a long). Not the pattern from Street Smarts.

For a developing student without a natural affinity for reading price naked, these intermarket relationships are the best indicators you'll ever have. No moving averages, no stochastic, no Fibonacci — the only reason a fib gets pulled up here is to show where the midpoint is. Optimal trade entry hasn't even been mentioned yet.

Leaders: buying information

The morning started late and unfocused, into a sloppy 9:30 open, with the daily chart sitting mid-range so price could take liquidity on either side. So the technique used was one picked up from floor traders and George Angell: when you have no read, put a single contract in and see what happens.

  • You're not picking a spot. You're reading how price behaves against that order.
  • Is it moving away from the order easily, lethargically, or running straight against it?
  • The equity number isn't the point — the feedback loop is.
  • If the contract gets run over, your bias probably isn't in alignment.
The demo account's limitationYou can put a trade on in demo, but you don't really feel anything from it — when it's wrong it's just "I'd never have taken that anyway". There's no better feedback loop than having something at risk. That's what a demo cannot give you.

Two of those leaders went in that morning, plus a short that was covered. They cost around $750 and produced a drawdown. That drawdown is not a skill failure — treating it as one misses the point entirely. It's a premium paid for Intel, a small investment to get a better read on the next swing on the daily chart. The 117-handle trade cancelled all of them out and still pocketed about $1,100 on the day.

Not everyone should do thisMany students don't think it's a worthwhile investment — and those same traders aren't capturing 100-plus handle moves either. It's a trade-off. What are you actually trying to accomplish? This isn't a model for scalping ten handles on a lot of contracts.

And not all losing trades are the same thing: some are simply wrong ideas. Not all of a losing record is errors — which is why a statement alone can't tell you whether someone knows what they're doing or just got lucky.

Stops, and why you need one

On that two-minute entry the stop goes just below the low of the entry candle — maybe one tick. What if price goes down there and keeps going? That's what your stop is for.

The barrier is psychologicalSome students are looking for a way to trade and never take a loss — to enter without a stop ever needing to be placed, because they're right. What that really says is "I'm afraid to be wrong." That's a barrier you have to get over.

Why you're doing this

The closing frame is deliberately modest. Contrast the YouTube pitch — "$60,000 in one trade, here's the withdrawal" — with something sustainable: a consistent weekly return you could genuinely live on. You don't need $144,000 in two weeks. If it covers your car note, or half your rent or mortgage every month, think like that and let it evolve from there.

The only reason to be hereYou're in this industry to make money — to improve your financial condition. If you're here to impress your dad, your mum, your partner, or your old gym teachers, that's the wrong reason: you'd be operating off an emotional high, and the emotional low really hurts.
Part 2 · Lesson 1

Applying the Model to Forex

The same institutional order flow, taken off the index futures and dropped onto a forex cross — bias from the components, the killzone, the fair value gap.

A deliberately short episode, answering the steady stream of requests for forex. Nothing new is being taught: it is simply applying what you've been trained with on the futures indices to a currency pair, with the time of day set relative to New York or London.

The chart being used

Data feed
FOREX.com on TradingView — for forex pairs only
Pair
EUR/JPY, daily first, then 15m → 5m → 3m
Clock
TradingView toggled to New York local time
He does not like the yen pairsAsked repeatedly why, the answer here is that they tend to give a double return to a specific level — and he walks it through on the chart: a swing high, the market rallies through it, there is no fair value out there, price drops back down in, and then it runs again and takes that swing high out. There are other markets that scratch his forex itch; this one is used for completeness, not because he'd trade it.

Reading it on the daily

The higher timeframe read is the same sequence used on the indices:

  • Relative equal lows are marked out. The market trades down through them and creates a run higher.
  • Price rallies through a swing high, drops back in, then runs again and takes out that swing high — two points of market structure traded above, in order.
  • Go back through that price leg and look for a fair value gap. There are two. Price trades down into one and it sends the market higher.
  • Above sits buy side liquidity, and an old high further back is a candidate draw on liquidity.
HorseshoesWhether price actually trades through that old high is irrelevant — it is likely to draw to it. Like playing horseshoes: not every throw lands on the post, but you're still aiming at the post.

On the daily candle of 10 February 2022 the run higher could be trusted, because price had rallied, consolidated, and then started another run into the high. And even a failure swing that never gets above the old high is fine — if there is enough range from the open up to that high, that is enough to take a stab at it and see what yield you get.

Time of day

Killzones — New York local time
  • New York: hunt the setup between 7:00 am and 10:00 am. That is the time of day New York session trades form.
  • London: bracket 2:00 am to 5:00 am and look for a setup that lets you trade a fair value gap inside it.
  • You can take trades in Asia and at the London close, but he'd prefer you trade these two windows.
Get the clock rightHe can't say it enough: on TradingView it must be toggled to New York local time. Leave it on your own local time and it won't work — everything else will be wrong.

Framing the intraday setup

Dropping into the 10th of February on the 15-minute chart, midnight New York is marked, price rallies, and then the New York session arrives. That run is boxed off and the analysis goes top down, 5-minute to 3-minute to 1-minute, asking the same two questions of the price leg each time:

Question 1
Does it take out a swing low?
Question 2
Does it then take out a swing high?

Both yes gives you a valid condition to go looking for a trade. Then you go back through the leg and find the fair value gap. Here there were two — price could stab down to the lower one, so be mindful of it, but try to get your entry in on the upper one.

Targeting when there is no range to trade inside

The practical lesson of the night: when there is no obvious range to work within, how far can you expect price to go? Take a fib, anchor it from the swing low to the swing high, and use the −1 standard deviation projection. On this example that landed at 133.153 — the high printed at 133.15 and price reversed from it. (His fib settings are shown in the OTE primer video on the same channel.)

Bias on a cross — look at its components

The simple way to frame a crossPull up the futures of each currency in the pair on the daily. 6E — euro futures, front month continuous — was clearly going higher. The yen was going the other way. Euro strong, yen weak → EUR/JPY goes higher. That underpinning is what makes the bullish bias reasonable before you ever look at time of day.

That is the whole method for these crosses: frame the logic for higher or lower from the two instruments that make up the pair, then apply the time of day and wait for the pattern. Nothing else needs buying — no subscription, no service, no course.

Part 2 · Lesson 2

Power of Three & the New York PM Session

Accumulation, manipulation, distribution — how an order block is actually found, and what to do on a day the overnight run has already left without you.

Two days of NASDAQ e-mini futures, 14 and 15 February 2022, used to teach one idea from two sides: the shape a bullish day takes, and the afternoon setup that is left when the morning is unusable.

The daily frame

  • A swing high and a swing low are chosen: the low is the most recent one after taking out a short-term low, so the sell side liquidity resting below it has been dug into.
  • A fib from that high to that low gives the 50% — equilibrium. Anything below it is a discount.
  • Monday traded down into a deep discount but did not take out the lows over on the left.
  • Monday closed indecisive — the body basically absent, open and close essentially the same.
What that combination saysAn indecisive close with the market trading down into a discount means that even if there is a low further down you are targeting, this may require a retracement first. At Monday's close there was an imbalance between that low and high on the daily — and Tuesday's overnight run traded straight back up into it.

Power of Three

Accumulation
The opening price sits near the low of the day or session
Manipulation
Price trades lower, making some important low — the fake move
Distribution
It rallies, makes the high, and closes near the high of the day

That is the bullish version; invert it for bearish. It is not important to predict the closing price. What you are being trained to anticipate is the likelihood of the market making some kind of fake move — a Judas swing: the false move that typically starts London and the New York session.

If you miss the manipulation lowThat small move lower is the one you want to hunt a long in. Miss it and you should try to get long real close to where the opening price is — and the opening price he likes is 8:30. Draw it out in time and run the checklist: did we go below it, did we go inside the imbalance, did we take out a short-term low, did we hit an order block, was it an optimal trade entry?

How an order block is actually found

The definitionConsecutive down close candles right before a price surge that has an imbalance. That is how you find your order blocks. The high-probability version: your narrative or bias is bullish, you look for displacement — the market running quickly higher — you mark out the down close candles behind it, and you anticipate a return back into them.

On the 5-minute chart of the 14th there were four down close candles before the surge — a complete order block on that timeframe, anchored to the daily bullish order block. Price broke down out of the high, retraced back into that imbalance, and there it was: fair value gap with an order block and an optimal trade entry, all in one place. It rallied — sloppily, but continuously driving higher.

A note on his clock: the bell rings at 4:00 pm New York time and there is a little trading past that, but he looks at 4:30 as the close, to judge what the full range has done and what imbalance or liquidity pools are left over.

The day the run already happened

The 15th opened with an enormous overnight run, technically in the London session. Asked whether he'd have caught it: no — he'd have missed it, and wouldn't have seen it coming even if he'd been awake.

Don't chase itWhen you get a big move overnight — roughly 2:00 to 5:00 in the morning — don't buy at 8:30 just because it has gone up. Wait for more information. What typically follows a big run up or down in equities (this part is not forex) is a consolidation shortly after — not always; sometimes it just keeps ripping and you miss it. Expect chop, not precision, and don't try to trade in and out of it.
The rule for those daysBig run overnight on NASDAQ, Dow or e-mini S&P → avoid the New York morning session entirely. Wait until the other side of lunch — 1:00 pm New York time — and anticipate the New York lunch lows or the morning session lows being taken out. (New York lunch is noon to 1:00 pm.)

Why those lows exist at all: the morning printed relative equal lows. Everyone long from overnight jams a stop loss right underneath them, because that is what the books say to do. When price then starts to rally above, that pool is sitting there — that is engineering liquidity, and it is even better when the high above has not been taken out yet, so there is still a draw in both directions.

The afternoon setup

The sequence that afternoon, and the reasoning behind each step:

  • Price drops post-lunch, takes out the sell side below the relative equal lows, and digs into the imbalance. Look at the bodies of the candles — they respect the level. That is not random; these are algorithmic principles, and the markets are unbelievably precise in better conditions.
  • Having run the overnight stops, there is no reason for price to come back down there. They don't want to give the traders they just stopped out another chance to get back in — so the setups that continue the run higher are sneakier.
  • A swing high breaks, energetically, leaving a fair value gap. Price trades down into it and makes a short-term low. You could buy there.
The better version of a fair value gapIt is even better when there is sell side liquidity resting below a short-term low that taps into it — you can use that low as your entry, or one tick below it.

The worked numbers from the chart: the short-term low forms at 2:34 pm with a low of 14528.50, so a buy limit at 14520.25 — or reaching for the 14528 even number — is a nice place for the order. The stop goes below the short-term low that forms after the fair value gap; those are the rules. That worked out to about 14.25 handles of risk, roughly $85 on six micros to make about $300 — somewhere near 3.5 to 1. He flags his own arithmetic as he does it: "thereabouts — I'm roughing, I don't have a calculator in front of me folks, you do the math." Two harder numbers follow in the same breath: buying at the wrong candle would have meant nine points of heat, "basically $54 if you were trading six micros", and on one mini it is $20 per handle. For the micro itself, take the figure Lesson 6 states outright — 1 point = 4 ticks = $2; that is the one to size from.

Imperfection, heat, and what invalidates a gap

Does a wick through the gap invalidate it?No. Look at the body of the candle — if the bodies respect the level, the gap stands. In volatile conditions he permits a greater level of imperfection in price delivery, using the fair value gap as the basis for the entry idea and the stop as the premise. On this trade the stop was never reached — there were about five more handles of room.

And expect heat. Buying one candle late here would have carried about nine points against you before it worked. Don't expect to be in at the lowest point with no drawdown. If you are going to trade small timeframes and be nimble, you have to learn to trust the setups and let the stops do their jobs — a stop-out is one trade you got wrong, not your career. Look for the next one.

He closes with a bonus on the same chart: after the run, with the buy side above still untaken, price trades down into another imbalance and hits the order block — a second buy for anyone who missed the first, from the pattern already taught free in his short-term trading series.

Part 2 · Lesson 3

Daily Bias, the Opening Range & News Events

The most-asked question in his mentoring answered in full — plus the range every setup of the day forms inside, and why the 8:30 embargo matters.

The longest episode so far, and the one he calls the underpinnings of what his camp does. It answers the question he has been asked more than any other over the years: can you teach me the daily bias — will it be an up day or a down day?

The economic calendar

He uses forexfactory.com's calendar — not the only one, just a preference for the colour scheme; they all say much the same thing.

Red
High impact news driver
Orange
Medium impact event
Yellow
Low impact event
Why 8:30 is the crosshairs timeThe news embargo lifts at 8:30, and a bunch of events get ushered into the marketplace at once. That is the reason 8:30 is taught as the time to start looking. Reports and speeches may be a smokescreen, or a catalyst for a move at release — and often there is a buildup or a drop in price right before the report, with the real move starting after.

If you are going to speculate — certainly if live funds are going in — you want to know what the calendar says for the day, or you can be surprised adversely by a sudden rush of volatility.

Power of Three is the daily bias

He is blunt that there is no secret to it: it is the brass tacks of looking at what the daily range is likely to form.

Bearish day
Opens, rallies a little, then goes down and closes near the low
Bullish day
Opens, dips a little, then expands higher and closes near the high
Take the close out of itYou do not need to predict the closing price — that is more advanced and you don't need it to be profitable. All you need to know is whether this daily range is more likely to expand higher or lower than the opening price. That's it. That is the key to bias.

Not every candle in a swing will conform. But in a sustained higher-timeframe swing you are not seeing many up close candles when it's bearish, and not many down closes when it's bullish. Traders make a big deal out of one down day in a bullish run and it takes them out of their game — he felt that too in the 90s.

Swing points — three candles, no moreA swing low is a low with a higher low on each side: three candles, that's all. You do not need a Williams fractal — that's too many candles and you've already missed the move. Once you have a swing high or low with the proper context, you go hunting. And once a swing high or low is taken, expect a retracement or a consolidation.

The opening range

This is the part he says his own students will smile at. On a bearish day:

How to build itThe day opens and rallies — that rally is the Judas swing. Take the range from the opening price up to that high, and project that same distance below the opening price. Open-to-high, mirrored underneath the open — that is your opening range.

Why it matters: every premium array will reside and form inside it. The fair value gaps, the stop raids, the optimal trade entries — every potential shorting candidate from any approach he teaches, including in the paid mentorship — forms in that bracket. It tells you how much leeway you can give the market once it trades below the opening price and still take a favourable entry. Those are close proximity entries.

And if price leaves itYou can't chase it — no matter how good it looks later in the day. Sometimes it just tears off, gives you no setup, and you miss it. Don't be upset; go back through your backtesting and you'll see how many opportunities come in just below the opening price.

Mapped onto the three phases: accumulation is the open and above (where smart money aims to get short), manipulation is that initial rally — the sucker play for the breakout artist, a run up only to go down — and distribution is between the low of the day and the close, where the short positions accumulated at and above the open are being distributed. How do you know the low is in? By time reference: if price has been beaten lower and you're getting to 3:30 or 3:45, it's probably close. Not always — sometimes there's a fast sudden continuation.

Reading the daily chart with it

The bearish case being carried in these episodes, laid out step by step: the market has been going lower, sell stops below a low were taken, then a natural retracement, then the decline resumed, then one more push up that was a failure swing — it didn't get above the high — and then a break down that created an imbalance as it took out a short-term low. As he puts it: that is the model.

What the framework tells you to doWith the model suggesting those lows get taken, any rally, or up close candle, is a potential shorting candidate. Price had traded up into the daily imbalance and swept just above it; once the range is completely balanced there is no reason for price to hang around, and the bearish view is not abandoned.

The bullish version is the same logic inverted, and he walks it through older data: a swing low forms, the next day opens, washes down and closes on the high — bias bullish, so expect the opposite pattern each day, opening near the low and expanding higher, drawing toward the fair value gap and then the relative equal highs where the buy stops rest. Some days give you a consolidation or an indecisive candle and you may take a loss. You do not abandon the bias until price gets above those highs, and then you study whether it still wants to go higher.

The paint roller

Why price returns to a long candleThe chart background is a wall and every candle is a paint roller. When a single long candle covers a whole range in one pass, there are porous places left — prices where the market was never efficiently offered, with no back-and-forth for buyers to participate. An efficient market goes back up and re-applies the paint evenly. So when you see a big, long, drawn-out candle there is a strong tendency — not always — for price to return and overlap that entire range.

Taking the trade on 17 February

The daily bias was bearish — price had worked the upper end of the daily fair value gap and then put in multiple bearish market structure shifts. So the day was expected to open, rally to make the high, sell off and close down. It might not close on the low; a big down move is enough. You just need movement.

  • The dashed level is the midnight New York opening price — that is the "open" of Power of Three, and price trading above it is the same little tick on the daily diagram, scaled down.
  • Price rallied above it into a fair value gap: a sell above the opening price. Open-to-high, projected down, gives the opening range for the day.
  • Price was pumping higher ahead of the 8:30 release — tipping their hand that they're pricing in a premium market ahead of the news, so the news gets used to sink it, with the shorts already accumulated above the open.
  • At 7:00 am it rallied above relative equal highs and cleaned up an imbalance.
  • Then a swing high broken to the upside (buy stops taken), followed by a swing low broken — and those down close candles were sudden, energetic, full of momentum. That is how you know you have a market structure shift; a lethargic, meandering decline is not one.
The top-down gap huntStrip it down 5-minute → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1. Take the first fair value gap you come to and stop — find one on the 4-minute and you never go to the 3. And if there isn't one even on the 1-minute chart? You don't have a trade.
Two gaps in the legTrade the nearer one, but your money management has to permit you to weather a run up into the higher one. That is part of the rules.

Bearish breaker, entry, and target

Going deeper on the 4-minute, the pattern present is a bearish breaker: a high, a low, and a higher high, with price returning to it. He teaches the breaker in the free lessons, and the reason it matters here is the stop:

Where the stop goesJust above the breaker candle — the down close candle before the move up that took the short-term high — not way up above the higher gap. The foundation of the ICT breaker is that the market should mostly stay in the lower half of that breaker candle.

For entry, once price is trading inside the gap he only needs it to trade above that candle's high — the easiest, lowest-threshold entry technique, so he is definitely part of the move rather than waiting for a better fill that may never come. The target was the relative equal lows at 14381, and the projection method was the range high to that low multiplied by two — which is where the low formed. Filled around 14515 aiming at 14381, that is more than a hundred points on one contract.

His one timeframeThe 15-minute is his bellwether chart — the one he sends every student to for day trades and scalps. Forced to pick a single timeframe, it's that one: he can swing trade, short-term trade, day trade or scalp from it. You might prefer the 1-minute, but you still need the 15-minute's storyline for the full panoramic view.

Risk, and the size of these markets

Discount broker marginsBrokers that let you trade a mini for a couple of thousand, or a micro for under a hundred dollars, are — in his words — asking you to blow the account. He watched a 100-point run in a single one-minute NASDAQ candle. In moves like that your stop is not respected: you get filled with heavy negative slippage. Eight contracts and 50 points of slippage is $8,000 gone in one trade.

His floor is $10,000 as an absolute minimum, and he thinks $15,000 is fairer for what the NASDAQ was doing then. His own broker required close to $22,000 per contract, and he has no problem with that — plenty of margin means nothing sudden can smoke the account.

For your notesIf the exchange raises margins, that is the exchange tipping their hand: big monstrous moves are coming. It is not a coincidence.

To answer the students who asked what he'd do with a discount-margin account, he ran a clearly-labelled TradingView paper account from $10,000, NASDAQ only, for two weeks using exactly what is taught here — including three losing trades on the 14th, visible in the executions — and finished up the equivalent of 582%. He is explicit that it is paper, that he won't do it with live funds, and that it is not what he teaches students to expect.

The mindset it requires

Professional losersEvery trade opens as a loser — you've paid commission, and in forex the spread. A trader is a professional management company of losing trades: they turn losers into winners, but not every loser can be turned, and they don't lose the business over the few that can't.

He counts the candles to make the point. In that bullish run, how many down close candles? Two. In the bearish leg, how many up closes? Five. If a losing trade on each of those days would blow your account, then you are over-leveraged or over-trading — that's how simply you can diagnose the problem.

How to practise
  • Write down your intentions each morning before the market opens — that is the purpose of having a model.
  • When backtesting, annotate what you were expecting on the chart and journal it; review the week on the weekend. You are training your subconscious to see it as if you saw it live.
  • Spend months just reading the tape — no demo trades, no picking targets.
  • Recording your screen beats replay: replay only gives you the open and the close of a candle, clunky and wooden, without the organic feel of the candle forming.

And a warning against rushing: those posting that the concepts don't work because they bought a bullish fair value gap that day had missed the whole point — the bias was bearish. Ten episodes in, you are not going to own the world. The moves repeat, always, so don't feel like you're missing out by not trading yet.

Part 2 · Lesson 4

A Live Short & the Nesting of Swing Highs

One live-funded short, walked from the daily chart down to the three-minute entry — and the halos that classify every high on the chart.

An earlier broadcast than usual, and a hindsight view of something that was pointed to before it happened, so the setup could be seen the way his private group sees it. The trade shown here was taken through a live TD Ameritrade account, not a demo — and it is teed up as a taster for the market structure lesson coming on the Thursday.

The daily picture

The e-mini NASDAQ, March delivery. The imbalance had already been outlined — the high of one candle to the low of another — and price had traded down to a discount and back up into a premium.

Measuring the dealing rangeTake the high to the low; 50% is equilibrium inside that dealing range. Above 50 is premium, below 50 is discount. Price ran from the lows into premium, failed to rally above the high, broke back below 50%, and left a gap on the way down.

It then came back up into a premium market above 50 and filled that gap in. This kind of retracement can lull traders into thinking it's going higher — but the thinking was down: the liquidity resting below is what gets attacked, so all of that consolidation just sets up another selling opportunity to run down there. The market needed to rebalance first, and it spent three days in that range before releasing to the downside and trading into the sell-side liquidity below.

On the hourly, the same story with more detail: the high and low ends of the fair value gap, price trading up into it, selling off, consolidating, and selling off once more.

Two opening prices, two purposes

Several people had written in confused about why he quotes both the midnight opening price and the 8:30 opening price. They are two separate reference points:

Entire daily range
Use the midnight New York opening price
Morning session
Use the 8:30 opening price
PM session
Its own accumulation–manipulation–distribution starts at 1:30

Setting up the morning

Price had rallied and taken out a short-term high on the Friday, then started the breakdown. Overnight he was watching, but hoping it would not take that low out before the morning — the wish was to see it trade up, take the high, then consolidate after running below the short-term low. Being in a hurry before the New York session would have spoiled the short and the re-entry he was after. Monday was a bank holiday: trading stops at 1:00 pm and resumes around 6:00 pm New York time.

On the 5-minute chart the 8:30 rally was, in his mind, acting like a Judas swing. The 8:30 candle opened at 13,798.50, so he wanted to be short somewhere above that price, anticipating further weakness and a run below the old daily low.

Not every down close is an order blockThe rally is there to lull in the traders who chase it. People who don't really understand order blocks see a down close candle after a run-up, buy it, watch it go up, and conclude that every down close candle after a run-up is a bullish order block. It is not. The real context here was the imbalance.

So the operating range for the short was that imbalance. Volatility means price can colour outside the lines and that's okay — the bodies of the candles support the idea he is looking for; the wicks he could care less about, because what matters is getting in when it's ideal.

Down to the entry

The gap looks skewed on the 4-minute because it takes two candles to show that range. On the 3-minute, price works up inside the imbalance and at 10:33 — as it bumps against the top end of the fair value gap and starts to move away — that is the short. Fill was 13,858.25; the exit, after the holiday reopen, was 13,612.25. Over 240 handles.

Why he trusted it wouldn't go higherNot because "lower highs and lower lows". Because of the nesting of the highs: from the session high there was a swing high next to it and another beyond, making that high an intermediate term high, with the swing highs on either side lower than it. One candle back from his entry there was a high with a lower high on either side — a swing high, lower than the one before it, which was lower than the one before that. He wanted to be short close to the intermediate term high, because it was likely to break.

And the draw on liquidity below hadn't been reached yet, so it acts like a big magnet. Without that framework the fluctuations feel like noise and chop; they are not — they are telling you exactly what price is going to do.

The halos

Back in the chart-book days, charts arrived once a week with Friday's closing data and the daily candles, and until the next book came you hand-drew the open, high, low and close on the markets you followed. Whenever a swing high or swing low appeared, you drew a little ring — a halo — above it:

1 halo
Short term high
2 halos
Intermediate term high
3 halos
Long term swing high
The definition, and the sourceA swing high is a high with a lower high candle to the left and a lower high candle to the right — the one in the middle is your swing high. The halo system let him classify the level of high that is forming rather than just labelling higher highs and lower lows. He credits this way of deciphering market structure to Larry Williams — a video course bought in the early 90s (four VHS tapes, the Future Millionaires Confidential Trading Course) and the book How I Made a Million Dollars Trading Commodities Last Year, whose market structure chapters he still rates, moon-phase fluff aside.

It went over his head the first few times; he only understood it by going into the charts and saying okay, here's a swing high. Which is also the only way to trust a model: back testing, working through the price action, and classifying the swing highs and swing lows until the patience is real.

Confirmation, and the alternative entry

After executing he wanted to see displacement, and it came. That is the confirmation — the point where you sit back and let it do its thing.

If you missed the first fillA swing high was broken to the upside and a low was taken out. If price touches that candle's high again, you can be short there — using the same imbalance and fair value gap entry technique. Otherwise get as close as you can to the important high already outlined. Note what he is not doing: waiting for a breakout below the low.
You don't need the high of the dayYou do not need to get the highest high. What you need is to understand why price should be trading away from the level you are entering at.

The holiday session closed at 1:00 pm ahead of the usual bell, reopened at 6:00 pm, gapped lower and accelerated straight into the sell stops below that old daily low. Once it runs deep into the low, that's it — take profits and move to the sidelines. The gap left behind is then likely to be rebalanced and filled, and it was; price traded around the old low and eventually pumped up into the afternoon.

Knowing when enough is enough

After a big moveDon't trade the morning session after a big move. He deliberately switches to a demo account to appease the desire to trade, so he doesn't burn the account or dampen a nice win with a losing trade.

When you're new and you've just caught a good lick, there's an impulsive tendency to go straight back in for the dopamine hit. He did exactly that as a younger man — nice run-ups, then a big winner, then a feeling that it wasn't enough, with no support structure around him telling him it was. One of the mental hurdles to contend with is knowing when enough is enough: after real money in a live account, don't rush back in.

On "pushing your edge"You don't want to push your edge — if you keep pushing it, you dull it. You sharpen it by knowing when to get in and when to get out. When he hears people talk about pushing an edge, he already assumes they're gamblers who want to sound like they're doing something all the time.

Later the same morning

The bias after 9:30 was still bearish — the run up hadn't changed it. Equities opened, consolidated, ran up to make a high, then ran up again and took that high out: that is your run on stops. Wait to see if it wants to break down. It did. From there the selling opportunity was the fair value gap between the low and the high, or, trading with the longer-term bias, the sell-side liquidity resting below the relative equal lows.

He teaches it this way so students can pick the trader they want to be — scalper, day trader, intraday swing trader, short-term trader holding overnight, daily or 4-hour swing trader, or position trader. Position trading isn't his personality: too many things show up on a chart that make him change his mind. He excels in the short term, where the account can move with velocity.

The account

Shown live to answer the hardline critics who want to know whether he can push the button. The six days of trading include a scratch where he got in too early, a curiosity short that snapped against him for a small pinch, and then the short outlined above — held through the 6:00 pm reopen — closing for $4,920. One line showing a large negative figure is not a losing trade: it is a broker settlement adjustment on their administrative side, something anyone trading live funds has probably seen in their own account.

Part 2 · Lesson 5

Market Structure for Precision Technicians

The lesson he had never taught anyone — not even the paid group: every rebalanced imbalance creates a key high or low, and that key level tells you when your idea is wrong.

He opens with a warning rather than a hook. This is advanced price action theory, it will raise more questions than it answers, and you cannot learn it in one video. It is also brand new: a lesson his paid mentorship group has never seen. The aim is to take you deeper than the higher-high / higher-low idea that makes up the retail view of market structure.

The chart is the NASDAQ March 2022 contract, and to the Forex traders asking when he'll go back to EUR/USD: what is being taught works in Forex, stocks and bonds. He is teaching price, and index futures happen to be the vein of volatility worth mining right now. He is also explicit that he is not in the business of picking tops and bottoms, and doesn't teach his paid group to do it either.

The only question that matters

What is the current market narrative?Before he sits down in front of a chart there is one question, in four parts. Is price likely to go up for buy-side liquidity (buy stops), or up to rebalance an imbalance? Or is it likely to go down to sweep short-term lows for sell-side liquidity, or down to rebalance an old imbalance below market price? That's it.

Not patterns. Not harmonics, not Elliott wave, not ratio ideas — nothing you can attribute to a retail mindset. And this is why he abandoned indicators: anything that covers up candles or pulls your attention onto what you put on the chart — what he calls lipstick — stops you being receptive to the clues price is giving you. The labels in this lesson are on the chart only to communicate how he internalises the structure; in live trading he labels them in his mind, because on the chart they would be a distraction.

The daily bias question follows from it: the next draw on liquidity. But the daily range will not always submit to a clean bullish or bearish expansion — sometimes you get intraday consolidation, and a trade taken on a good idea turns on you. The point of this lecture is to give you the clues that tell you your idea has probably been proven inaccurate.

The hierarchy: parent and child

On the hourly, inside the daily fair value gap, he marks long-term high and low, short-term high and low, and between those swing points an intermediate term high and low.

SubordinationBecause the daily chart is the parent of this price structure, all minor lower-timeframe swings are subordinate to it. The subordination that smaller swings adhere to is directly linked to the order flow on the higher timeframe chart — and the daily is where the bulk of the volume comes into the marketplace. That does not reduce the usefulness of a 1-minute chart; within the proper context you use it to navigate.

So the long-term high framed by the daily analysis should not be broken to the upside. If it is, the daily read is probably wrong: demand more information, study more price action and sit on your hands — or, if a trade is on, admit it and take the stop out as risk management.

On losingA losing transaction does not mean your model is flawed and it does not mean you are a failed trader. It means that transaction was not a profitable one. It is a cost of doing business.

The discovery: rebalance creates a key level

Price traded to the high end of the daily fair value gap, broke down, found support at the discount end, rallied back near the high but did not take it out, then consolidated — the shape retail reads as a bull flag, which is exactly the pattern he likes to fade. Inside that price action is the rule to write down:

Write this one downEvery single time price rebalances an imbalance, the swing created at that moment is an intermediate term high or low. A single candle passing down leaves a fair value gap; when price trades back up and rebalances it, that high is an ITH. When price drops back down and fills in an imbalance left by a candle up, that low is an ITL.
Intermediate term low
Typically has a higher short-term low to its left and to its right
Intermediate term high
Has a lower short-term high to its left and to its right
Between two STHs
The highest high between them is the intermediate term high

Which gives an intermediate term high two classifications: it is either a short-term high with a lower short-term high on either side of it — the Larry Williams definition — or, and this is the main one, it is the swing that forms as price trades back up to rebalance an imbalance.

Where he departs from Larry Williams

The foundation came from Williams — the VHS Future Millionaires Confidential Trading Course, and the market structure chapters of Long-Term Secrets to Short-Term Trading, which out of a 2,000-book collection is one of the handful he finds useful. But the next step is his own:

The tellAn ITH should be higher than the short-term highs on both sides of it. When it isn't — when the intermediate term high is not higher than two short-term highs — the market is very weak, and the algorithm is tipping its hand to anyone reading it this way. It is only rebalancing. The bullish case is the same idea inverted.

That is what let him anticipate the failed swing as it was forming: the imbalance had been rebalanced, so that swing high was an ITH, so the high should not be taken out — and the up close candles building into it were therefore a bearish order block forming in real time, not something to be labelled after the fact.

And when it failsIf, after a rebalance ITH, the next short-term high trades above it, your trade idea is probably flawed. Don't force it. Go to the sidelines and wait for market structure to get back in sync with what you expect — it may be the same session, the same day, or the following week. That is how you keep from blowing an account.

He is blunt about John Murphy's Technical Analysis of the Financial Markets — the retail trader's bible, and useful mostly for knowing what not to do, since it is what the 90% crowd still follows. Trend lines are the example: which swing low do you attach it to? It's all subjective. "We don't do technical analysis, we do technical science."

Framing the trade top-down

Daily
The logic — up into the imbalance, then lower
Hourly
Frames the trade; gives you what to hunt entries inside
15-minute
The bellwether — the actual get in, get out
Lower
Only if the risk parameters on the 15 don't suit you
Don't over-markOnce market structure is established on the hourly he does not go down and mark out every swing high and low below it — that's overkill. You just need to know what you're looking for on the timeframe you are trading.

What repeats on the lower timeframe is a fractal: the same single-candle imbalance and rebalance seen on the hourly, appearing in miniature. Not identical, but closely related to the general idea.

What an order block actually is

Not the last candleThe order block is the consecutive series of up close candles — not the last up close candle before the down move (or the last down close candle before the up move). He says plainly: that is not his order block, so stop calling it one. Inside that range you go hunting fair value gaps.

That is the light-bulb: on the aggressive entry you do not need to see a swing low broken first. The model taught to everyone requires the short-term low taken — the market structure shift — before price returns into the imbalance to sell. But if the higher-timeframe structure already tells you the market is exceedingly weak, you can trade the imbalance inside the order block as it forms, with the stop just above that high. On the hourly order block that means the drawdown is limited to one candle's movement while the downside objective is many times the risk.

The classic low-risk, high-confirmation short is still there for those who want it: price trades down below the order block, comes back up and bumps the bottom of it, trades into the little gap — that's the entry, stop above that candle's high.

The precision on offerStripping down through 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 minute, the low of the last candles before the turn matched that candle's high to the quarter point. He tells you not to take his word for it — go and look. Equally, volatility means price sometimes colours outside the lines; trading a bit above a level does not mean the level broke and price is going to keep running. Anticipate a measure of imperfection and don't freak out.

Targets

Once a short-term low and an intermediate term low are taken out — or just the intermediate term low — you have a significant break in market structure, far more meaningful than noting a short-term low was taken. That is what unlocks the projections:

  • Range replication: measure the long-term high to the long-term low and repeat that distance downward for generic price targets.
  • Fibonacci: anchor from the intermediate term high down to the long-term low, and the −1.5 standard deviation projection is where the low came in.
Why anchor thereThe answer to the question he was asked constantly on the forums — why that swing high and not this one? Because the retracement that fails is where the decline begins. The swing starts at that intermediate term high, so that is your framework's upper anchor.

Institutional order flow

Bearish swings
Up close candles are your resistance — price should stay below them
Bullish swings
Down close candles are your support — price should hold above them

In a bearish leg, price may come back up and touch an up close candle — that is the bearish order block acting as a speed bump — but you do not want to see it traded above. If price never even overcomes the nearest up close candle, the ones beyond it are irrelevant and the market stays heavy. That is institutional order flow, and it is your signal to keep holding while the move works.

The one permitted violationIf a supporting candle is overlapped, it is only permissible when there is a short-term low in close proximity — then it is likely just a run to take out sell stops before reaccumulating and going higher. With no swing low there is no sell-side beneath it, so there is nothing to be concerned about.

Put together, that's the whole answer he gives to how do I know which swing high and swing low to use. Two components: market structure tells you when the idea is broken; institutional order flow tells you the move is still good.

Ending on "I don't know"

The forecast delivered — the run below the daily low happened exactly as outlined weeks before — but price is now back above that old low. His verdict on the hard right edge, in front of the paid group and everyone else at once: neutral. Do nothing. Not trading Forex, futures, crypto, stocks or bonds, and letting the rest of February pass without engaging.

How to grade probabilityIf you can frame an idea easily one way and it is a real stretch the other way, that is high probability. If it could plausibly go either way, that's low probability — and taking it anyway, because you happen to be in front of the charts, is how the regret trades happen. He blew accounts that way in the 1990s, being reckless with nothing hinged on sound logic.

He closes with the riddle. If trend lines, moving averages, harmonics, Fibonacci, Elliott wave, supply and demand, volume profile and the rest all really moved price — how does the market decide which discipline to follow on any given day? They contradict each other. Subscribing to them is a faith-based premise. His answer is that the market books and prints candles on two principles only: liquidity — above old highs for buy stops, below old lows for sell stops — and imbalance / rebalance.

Why price returns to a one-sided moveThe market dropped in a single candle, one interval, with no give and take. So it is likely to go back up and balance that movement with an up candle — to offer buyers an opportunity to buy at those prices. Whether those buyers are right about the market is irrelevant; the algorithm is allowing efficiency for price delivery.

And the final warning on the daily: you can go long when the daily chart is going lower, but why swim against the tide? Why be the salmon that fights up the current, spawns, and dies — you got there, but you failed in the end. Those quick counter-direction pops on the 5 and 15-minute are traps that just create another selling opportunity. Study the daily, limit your forecast to about five days, and don't be upset if you can't call the whole weekly range yet. It took him six years.

Why the labels correspond to anything — and how far he claims they do

The bridge from the algorithm to the structureIf there is an algorithm then it must follow some form of logic — so how does it reference how far to go up and how far to go down? It cannot see your stop. "It doesn't see Michael's stop, it doesn't see Renee's stop — that's outside of its capability. But it knows where people will have their stops based on these ideas": short-term high and low, intermediate-term high and low, long-term high and low — and where the imbalances are. That is what makes every label on this page a stop-location forecast rather than a filing system.
And his own hedge on itHe is careful, twice, that the labels approximate the algorithm rather than being it: "I'm leaning on algorithmic principles that are in the marketplace that can't be taught to you, but I'm creating a language so that way you can see it visually in your chart and you can measure and reference certain things — not exactly like the algorithm does, but very, very close to what it's doing." And again: "I made a language within price charts that communicates very closely what it's doing… this is the language that I created for all of you." Take the taxonomy as that language, not as the mechanism.
Part 2 · Lesson 6

Advanced Price Action Theory in Action

An extra episode: last night's market structure theory taken straight into the market the next morning — one trade, three scalings, and the logic behind every entry.

This is an extra lesson, added because the previous night's market structure lecture went deeper than students were accustomed to. It is the same material, but simplified back down into the language of the channel and shown working: "it's one thing to talk about it and provide the basis as to what I'm doing when I'm doing these executions." The reason it needs simplifying is stated plainly — "I had to create a language that gets to generally the basis of what that is doing without all the complications within it… you're probably looking at your chart thinking 'how do I classify this swing high as an intermediate-term high versus a short-term high — how does he know?' Right, that's the part you're never going to get."

Why this morning's number is small on purposeThe demo account this demonstration comes out of had already been run to $256,000, and he stopped showing it: "it quickly got to a point where it no longer can be appreciated from a student's perspective — it's too fast of growth… you have no connection to it if you don't know how to do this." He names both ways the big number fails: "you're not going to believe that this is possible — or maybe some of you do and you think you want to go out there and try to do the same thing with your live account. Either one of those things are not my goal." The 21% morning below is the deliberately scaled-down version.

Why the executions are in a demo

He is technically bearish on equities, but the market has already delivered the move he wanted. With heightened volatility, uncertainty around Ukraine and the possibility of a black swan popping off at any time, he is not willing to risk the February gain he has already banked in his live account. Losing it would eat at him all through March — toxic thinking he learned to avoid the hard way.

So where does the itch go?Straight into a paper account. It provides context, keeps him glued to the tape so he can still teach and answer student questions, and carries no monetary risk at a time when he doesn't believe risk is wise. There is also a compliance angle: he is not licensed to give trade advice, so a demo protects him and you — you can't lose following him, and you can't be tricked into thinking following him is how you make money.

And the honest test cuts both ways: if the logic didn't work, it would fail on the demo just as easily as it would fail live. The candles print off the same live data.

Objectives, not hopes

Weekly
An objective he looks for for the week
Daily
Something he is aiming for that day
Monthly
The goal being pantomimed here: 20% per month

On the size of that number: "20 isn't money — it's a percentage." Start with a dollar if you like; the compounding effect of hitting it consistently is what is astonishing. He will not claim students can hit 20% every single month — he might miss it himself in a given month — but it is the goal being aimed at.

Set a target or hit nothingSome teachers say having a weekly or daily goal is the stupidest thing in the world. His reply: those people are hit and miss, not profitable. "If you don't aim for a target you're going to hit nothing 100% of the time." His own goals are deliberately low hanging — easy for his capability, and for students who have put the time in.

Are you ready for live money?

He will not answer the "do you think I'm ready?" email — ever. There will never be a record of him telling a student to go live, because when the account blows the human instinct is to say a guy told me to do it. His own experience is the argument: he rushed into live trading in 1992 after one book and no back testing, saw a one-two-three top, and was down 50% on his first trade. He closed the account, afraid.

The butterfly testIf you feel that tug of war in your stomach and can't relax while you're engaged in the market, you're not ready. You have to be desensitised to the result — indifferent to a loss. That sounds impossible until you have a documented plan and a model you have watched work over and over for months, not a day or a week.

What "documented" means, decided in advance, never once you're in: what you're waiting for, what makes you push the button, where the stop goes, how much you're risking, what you're aiming for, and where partials come off — if you take partials at all. "I got into a trade and then I tried to figure out what I was supposed to do once I was there" — that is retail, and that was him in 1992.

Framing the morning

Price had run below a low. He is bearish, but he doesn't want to sell it there. So the question becomes: what is it likely to reach up into? Two magnets sit above — an up close candle (its low or open) and a fair value gap. Price can trade right up into either and still resume lower afterwards; it may need to go up into it first.

All boats rise in high tideHe was watching the NASDAQ and the E-mini S&P together. ES had a lot of upside energy; NQ was lethargic and slower. These markets normally move in tandem, so the tendency is that the laggard gets drawn higher in sympathy.

On the hourly there are relative equal highs — and above them, buy stops. Retail-minded traders look at two matching highs and read the textbook answer, resistance, a ceiling. Which is precisely why price should be expected to go over it. He anchors a level to those highs, calls it 14,110, and treats it as the target.

The readThe algorithm is not letting price go lower, which means it is going after everyone who has been profitable being short. Their stops are the buy-side liquidity resting above those relative equal highs — that is the draw on liquidity.

What makes an order block high probability

Straight from the previous night's lesson, restated plainly:

Bullish move
Down close candles should not be violated — they act as support
Bearish move
Up close candles should not be breached — price shouldn't even come back
The three ingredientsA high probability bullish order block is the down close candle, plus the imbalance created as price moves away from it, plus the narrative that price is likely to go higher to reach for buy-side liquidity. "Period. That's it." There is no engulfing candle requirement — forget all that, you don't need it.

Note the fractal: the single hourly down close candle he is watching is made up of two candles on the 5-minute chart. When price rallies away it leaves a gap, and when it trades back down and overlaps the gap between one candle's high and the next candle's low, you have an hourly order block containing a lower-timeframe order block containing a fair value gap — a hierarchy from higher timeframe down to lower, all framed on the same idea that it's going higher for buy side.

Time of day: don't chase the open

9:30 is a trap in both directionsThe initial move going into the 9:30am New York equities open is technically the incorrect move — a Judas swing. Don't chase it lower. And don't chase price higher in the minutes right before 9:30 either.

Instead, take a step back and run the checklist. Am I in a discount — below 50% of the low-to-high range? Yes. Am I inside the order block? Yes. Has the equities open happened? Yes. Am I bullish, and has price traded lower so the public reads it as resistance and expects the next support level to break? Yes. It doesn't do what they expect. Price hits the order block on the 5-minute and rallies.

Why it rallies is not a mystery once you follow the liquidity. Whoever gets long down here doesn't want six or ten points — they want to sell up where there are willing buyers. When price trades above the level, the buy stops become market orders to buy, flooding the market with the liquidity that lets the early longs exit at a higher price into people who have to be there.

Holding it, and where the stop actually goes

Once the gap fills, the low that formed is an intermediate term low — and that low should not be taken out until the objective is reached. That is what gives him the confidence to sit through the retracements. As long as the down close candles keep supporting each new leg, the trade is fine.

Trailing without self-sabotageEnter with the stop below the mean threshold of the bullish order block. When price trades above the next candle's high, the stop must stay below that candle's low — price can dig back into it, because it is going to act as an order block. Put the stop inside that retracement zone and you get stopped out prematurely, and most people then lack the wherewithal to get back in.

The stop only gets raised once the market has rallied above and taken out a set of down close candles — then it can move up beneath the next set, treated as one order block. And if price does come down and break the low of those down close candles, "well, there you go — you probably did the right thing by getting stopped out, because it might be failing and going lower."

Mid-trade, watching an opposite-close candle form is where new traders break. Even in profit you feel it: the urge to collapse the trade because the uncertainty "eats at you like mental cancer." He read the same retracement differently — as price going back into the down close candle so smart money could accumulate more long positions. That's where he bought again.

Near the objectiveWhen price is that close to the profit objective it generally doesn't like to come all the way back into the order block to rebalance. The algorithm allows only a small retracement inside the fair value gap — so you'd be a buyer at that candle's low, and it runs to target.

Pyramiding: build the base first

He bought three micros, then two, then one, and let it run to the objective. He counts that as one trade with three scalings, not three trades.

Why that orderThe biggest position goes in the initial entry, so every later entry has all that equity behind it and the position can weather a deeper retrace. Buying one, then two, then three is an inverted pyramid — a pyramid balancing on its point, wobbly, no foundation.
Instrument
Micro E-mini NASDAQ — 1 point = 4 ticks = $2
Total size
3 + 2 + 1 = six micro contracts
Margin needed
Roughly $1,200 at a discount broker
Account used
$10,000 — optimal gearing; more than this would be too much leverage
Result
$10,000 → $12,111 in one morning, over 21% on one trade

Which answers the comment that you can't grow an account trading micros: "stop thinking you need a lot to make a lot." What you need is the ability to compound. And if that one trade is your week — you hit it, you stop, you go back to a demo — the equity growth and the peace of mind of not having to over-trade are the actual point.

The balancing act

Not an invitation to trade dailyThese setups likely form every day and absolutely form every week — that is not permission to trade every day. He is not trying to create monsters who trade every session. If you miss one, you're likely to find another the next trading day.

He is equally blunt about who owns the outcome. Take one comment out of context, watch a couple of videos, go all in on something you think you see forming, and then email him saying you blew your account — whose fault is that? When he blew accounts it wasn't the broker's fault. He was out of control, taking 60 or 70 trades in a day.

So treat these executions as the goal, not the starting point. Nobody is this precise at the beginning; it takes time to grow into the understanding. He believes a YouTube student can do this consistently after about six months of practice and screen time — consistently meaning one trade like this a week, worked in exactly this way.

Why price is the teacher

None of what was executed is retail: no Elliott wave, no harmonics, no supply and demand. He is direct with traders who still use those tools — study this and you'll find that your winners have this information underneath them, and your losers are missing it.

Better than a bookEvery chapter of a trading book shows a handful of examples — and only the examples that help sell the book. You saw the textbook divergence, went to a live chart, and price just kept going lower. Here the signature repeats every week and every day, and looking at it constantly trains your eye to see it by default.

He closes on expectation-setting. You will lose money — everyone does, every educator, every system; some take stunning losses, some just nuisance ones, and the really good traders recover a drawdown so cleanly it's like it never happened. That's experience. He isn't promising riches. The realistic goal is to outpace inflation: get consistent and profitable, and the price of gas or groceries stops being the thing that decides your year. And once you have it, it's yours — like riding a bike. Some students got it in weeks, some took a couple of years. Being a slow learner is fine; he was one.

Part 3 · Lesson 1

A Requested Execution — The Model in Real Time

A short episode: one long trade narrated from the market structure shift to the limit exit, showing what is actually being watched while a position is open.

This one is brief and answers a request — "I got requested to show how I use this model." There is no lecture here, just a trade taken live and talked through from the read to the exit.

The read, before any button is pressed

Structure
A market structure shift to the upside had already printed
Draw
Looking for a gap fill from Friday's close
Instrument
12 micro NASDAQ futures contracts
Entry
A limit down inside the fair value gap — not a chase
Objectives
A run above 14,160; initial interest at 14,180; 14,220 thought possible

He does not buy where price is; he expects it to drop down into that fair value gap first and places the limit there. The gap closes, and the entry fills — "that's not bad, it's the low candle." His own comment on the precision: "probably random."

What he is actually watching

Not the P/L"I'm not watching the number underneath that profit — that's not what I'm watching, I'm watching the candles." The question mid-trade is whether price is constantly going towards the next objective, not what the position is worth at this instant.

The immediate thing he wants to see is expansion through a small fair value gap around 14,122 to 14,138. He also expects price to pause there — to consolidate and reaccumulate for new longs, something like a bull flag — rather than running in a straight line.

Reading the crowd at 14,160

Buy side sits right around 14,160, and that level is in the crosshairs. He expects a consolidation and maybe a small retracement there — the kind that gets everybody thinking it's time to sell short.

Why they think thatRetail resistance ideas see 14,160 and reason: it went down from there the last time, so I'll get short. His read is the opposite — price will "swat bust through the door" and run up into 14,180.

Confirmation from the correlated market

With the position open he pulls up the E-mini S&P micro just to get a feel, and it looks like it wants to run as high as well. That agreement gives him fuel, or confidence, that the NASDAQ will make the level.

Managing it

Partial
Take six contracts off above the level to fund the position
Stops
Roll the stops to even once the partial is banked
Remainder
Leave a limit order at 14,220 working for the rest

Price reaches into an order block, and that is where the six come off. He then changes his mind on part of the plan and closes there — "because it's getting real close to the closure of that gap." He is candid that this is a judgement call: "I might be wrong, but just for general principles, 14,220 I think is doable." The business limit order fills at the objective.

Part 3 · Lesson 2

The Open — Sweeping the Low Before the Fair Value Gap

A live-funded trade at the 9:30 equities open: why the swing low under the gap gets taken first, why he lets it, and how an FOMC day changes the schedule.

A channel update filmed on vacation, partly because people were "freaking out" thinking he had gone missing. The trade is taken on a live funded account, aiming at a mile marker: getting the equity to $50,000.

What the live account is for

Two things it demonstratesFirst, it is meant to show averaging around 20% a month — his answer to the constant question of what a student who has been through the teachings and worked out a model could reasonably expect without pushing the envelope. Second, it is a reminder that he is not just cherry-picking trades in a demo account: "I can trade with live funds too."

Building the setup

Trigger
A swing high broken — that makes market structure bullish
Setup
The fair value gap left behind by that move
Bias
Bullish daily; on the daily chart back toward 14,000, though he calls that a stretch

He watches the candle in question close, because the close is what completes the imbalance — until then the gap isn't confirmed. The plan is stated before it happens: it is technically the open, so volatility can come in and overshoot that low. He doesn't care if it does. If it goes back up into the fair value gap, he will buy it.

Why not just buy at the open?

The 9:30 problemYou could take a long entry right at the equities open — but you don't know how far it is going to whip below that low, and you can be "painfully wrong." So instead of entering, he watches one question: does price want to go below the short-term low that formed moments ago?

That low sits outside and below the fair value gap, so trading through it does not negate the gap. The reason is narrative, not geometry: he expects people to look at that gap, decide price is going up, and buy immediately — with their stop loss below that swing low. Those sell stops were resting at 13,612, and they get taken. Price then trades back into the same fair value gap, and that is the entry. He is plain that entering long right as the low breaks is a high-risk entry.

The pattern in one lineAt 9:30, if there is a fair value gap with a swing low created beneath it, expect that low to be taken out to flush the early buyers — then buy the original fair value gap once price sweeps the low and trades back up into it.

Choosing the objective

The target is the 80 level, and it is chosen for three overlapping reasons:

Structure
There is a fair value gap at the 680 level, and it sits above equilibrium — a premium market
Size
Around 50 handles, which is about $1,000 or more
Milestone
It gives a clean figure — the run to $50,000 on the account

He believes price is going higher than that. He takes the smaller objective anyway because he is on vacation — the objective is sized to the circumstances, not to the maximum available.

Managing the open

Once filled, he wants to see price expand aggressively, not "dilly dally around" — an energetic run above the swing high formed just to the left. There is a small fair value gap in the last three candles up; he doesn't think it needs to be filled or even revisited, but if price did come back he would expect it to be supported there, i.e. not trading below the 630 level.

On the stop, honestlyGenerally he likes to trade with a stop loss. But trading the open like this, "stops can be taken really, really easily and then reverse and never give you a chance to be in it," so he allows himself flexibility: give it a little room below the low, then close at market by hand. He is explicit that he is not encouraging you to trade without a stop — he is sitting there ready to click and close.

Once the trade is working, the stop can go at the entry. And if that took him out, the day would be over — he'd move to the sidelines and take no more trades, because it is FOMC.

The economic calendar

FOMC disciplineOn FOMC you can trade in the morning — but you have to be done early. If you're trading equities it is important to be aware of the economic calendar, because there is likely to be a lot of volatility later in the day.

The result

The limit order fills. Drawdown from the entry candle's low was about three handles — roughly $60 — on a trade aiming at $1,000. The day and the month close out at $1,255 on two trades, less about $15 in commissions, and he takes no more trades that month.

Two asides worth keeping. The waiting is where new traders get nervous — the position was fine, the discomfort was the trader's. And on the monitor tab, the account's commissions look high; that is because he ran latency tests and deliberately did things that mimic what a new trader would do on first going live.

Part 3 · Lesson 3

Multiple Setups Inside One Session

What "two trades in the morning, two in the afternoon" actually looks like — one Friday walked from the daily order block down to a swing projection that lands on the exact low, then back up into the PM liquidity pool.

This lesson answers a question from the comments: what do you mean by multiple setups, and what do they look like? One viewer objected that you couldn't find four such examples in a week, let alone several in a single day. So the whole of one Friday gets walked through, setup by setup.

These are found in review, and he says so"Obviously I have the benefit of hindsight here, but I promise you, if you study what I'm teaching you, you'll see this repeating." He answers the objection again at the end of the session: "I know there's a large number of you that are going to watch this and it's going to feel and seem like obviously anybody can go back in time and do these types of things — but a lot of my trades, when you see my examples and the things I record and show you, they're using logic like this. So it's not contrived, it's not form-fitted, it's not cherry-picked."

The split day

Morning session
8:30am to noon New York local time
Lunch hour
Noon to 1:00pm — the split
PM session
After the lunch hour

There can be multiple setups inside each. The morning typically offers two to three, because volatility arrives at the 9:30 open.

Framing it on the daily first

On the E-mini S&P June 2022 contract, price had recently traded above relative equal highs — buy stops and buy-side liquidity were resting there. Once it goes above them, continuation higher is always possible; but here a swing high formed, and that changes the question.

A swing high, not a fractalA swing high is simply a candle with a lower high on the candle before it and the candle after it. Do not confuse it with the fractal indicator used in MT4 — that takes more candles to form, and five candles later you've already missed the move.

With the swing high closing, the next day is framed for a short: an open, rally, then power of three — accumulation, manipulation, distribution — layered with the next level of analysis, premium or discount. Price is above old highs and stretched out, so it is clearly a premium market. And the down close candle back to the left is the daily bullish order block, at 4504. Trading down into that after running above the highs is the favourable scenario.

Stacking the reasons to go lower

On the hourly, to the left, there are relative equal lows — not exactly equal, which is why they are named relatively equal. Liquidity resting below them is likely to be sought on its own, but it becomes further likely when a discount array — the daily bullish order block — sits down there too.

The routeBreak below the day's low first, then reach below the relative equal lows where sell-side liquidity resides, then tap into the daily bullish order block. Multiple factors pointing at the same area is what raises the probability.
Probabilities are not guarantees"If that was the case I would never take a losing trade, you would never take a losing trade, we wouldn't need stop losses." You build the idea around the likelihood of the scenario unfolding — while being prepared if it doesn't.

Which opening price?

A recurring question, answered plainly. Trading index futures there are two opening prices: midnight New York time, and the open of the candle that begins at 8:30am.

Timeframe doesn't matterOne minute, three minute, fifteen minute, hourly — whatever candle begins at 8:30, note its opening price. Then extend that level out in time.
If you're bearishYou ideally want to see the market trade above that opening price. That run above a key level is the manipulation — market protraction, a Judas swing, price going the opposite way to where it is likely headed later in the day.

Swing projection: where does it stop?

Knowing it should go lower is one thing; knowing how far below the order block is another. The 15-minute chart supplies the sequence that qualifies the move: a swing low decisively broken, then a trade back up into the imbalance left behind, then an expectation that the forming candles push below that low. That low then becomes a fulcrum point — measure the high down to it, and project that same distance lower.

Bodies, not wicksAnchor the fib to the highest body (open or close, it makes no difference) and the lowest body of the swing low. When he first taught this, trolls said he didn't know how to use a fib. His answer: "I'm showing you how the algorithm is going to read the price — the wicks and the tails are all distractions." It came out of his forex models and carries over.

Two projected levels came out of it: 4514.5 and 4501.25. Which to pick? The one that agrees with the narrative: 4501.25 sits just below the daily bullish order block at 4504. And 4501.25 was exactly that day's low.

Why the precision worksIt stabs down into what the algorithm measures — there's the order block it wants to reach, there are the relative equal lows where it knows liquidity is, and there's the measurement. The precision is only beneficial if all the other narrative is incorporated. Use the wrong swing high and low and you get nothing — "that's why everybody that uses Fibonacci struggles."

Checking the boxes on the day itself

Displacement down
Did it take out the swing low? Yes
Return
Does it trade up into the imbalance? Yes
Manipulation
Does it trade above the opening price? Yes

"How many boxes did we just check off there? A whole lot." Probabilities go through the roof that this is bearish. Price then breaks lower, runs the old swing low's sell side, rebalances aggressively back up into a bearish order block, sells off into the short-term low, and works through the lunch hour into the daily bullish order block.

When the lower timeframe looks messyThe same setup on the 5-minute chart does not look clean the way it does on the 15-minute. The higher timeframe is what provides the framework and the context: "this is all we need — we don't need it to trade up into that. It could, but we don't need it to."

Slow down here

Pause the videoHe stops mid-lesson and asks students to pause and find the shorting setups themselves before he reveals them. "Don't Netflix binge-watch ICT." There is a good way of learning and a best way, and the best way is actually participating, not casually watching at two times speed. Waste those moments and you don't learn.

The morning setups, one at a time

Each one has the same skeleton: a short-term low broken with obvious, energetic displacement → a fair value gap left behind → price returns into it → short → target the fulcrum point below.

Setup 1
First fair value gap after the displacement — short on the return, aim at the short-term low's liquidity
Setup 2
Another short-term low taken, another gap, another return — same premise, next objective lower
Setup 3
The imbalance after another aggressive move lower and retrace — a shallow run below the old low, so anticipate a deeper one

Sizing it: go short two contracts, take one off at the first target, let the rest ride toward the lower-timeframe objective later in the day. That partial is what makes the next retracement survivable — even if the remainder gets stopped out, the first contract keeps the trade profitable.

The lunch hour ruleNo entries between noon and 1:00pm. But you can take profits in it — if you've funded the trade with a partial and moved your stop to breakeven, a limit at the order block level (plus a couple of points) can fill during lunch. You don't need to babysit it.
On stops getting runWatching price approach your stop with size on is intimidating. But he has had many trades over the years where price came within a quarter of a point without stopping him out. Index futures are more precise and uniform in delivery — everyone is working with the same price. In forex you're inside your broker's in-house liquidity pool, where they have the luxury of opening the spread on you. He still loves forex, but it is quiet, so his students' attention belongs on index futures for now.

Missing a trade

Trades are busesSome days there won't be this many retracements — one or two and it's gone, or it moves right at the open and that's it. You have no right to be angry about missing a trade. They come around on a schedule "like mass transit"; you should be happy your analysis spoke with that much clarity.

And the goal that makes all of it work: understand where price is likely to reach for. Get that, and "it becomes easy to know what you're looking for." He is deliberate about the wording — he did not say it becomes easy to make money. Over time, though, knowing what you're looking for is what makes making money easier.

Turning the day around: the PM liquidity pool

The morning's most energetic high took price all the way down to the daily bullish order block — the daily objective. It is Friday, the objective is met, and the market is now in a discount. End of week means a retracement back into the weekly range, so the question becomes what it can aim for.

The drawThe buy stops above — where people holding shorts over the weekend put their protective stops. He adds that he personally would not hold over the weekend: too much can go wrong, and he is not sitting in a position that could gap a thousand points against him on the Sunday open.

Anchoring a fib from the day's 9:30 rotation high down to the target, anything above the 50% level is premium. So the market moves from discount to premium, and that premium area is the afternoon's buy-side liquidity pool.

All the algorithm doesIt seeks discount to premium and premium to discount. Within that, it reaches for liquidity — buy stops and sell stops — and for imbalances: creating a fair value gap, or returning back into one. And it does it on the basis of time, then price. He calls that a gross oversimplification, and says it is by far and large all these things do.
Not order flow, not the DOMIt is not buying and selling pressure, and it is not the effects of the DOM. He does not trade with the depth of market — orders resting above or below may not be there when price arrives, because of spoofing. He offers it only because the comments asked, and says if you are profitable using it, don't let his opinion change your mind.

Engineering the liquidity to buy into

Who is buying at the low? The smart money that sold short all the way down — covering a short is buying, and if they're covering they are no longer bearish. So they buy in the discount and target the buy stops above, selling into those waiting buyers.

The trap that funds itPrice took the relative equal lows into the order block, which sells the retail crowd on "support broken." So when price trades back up into those same relative equal lows, retail sells — and those sellers need a counterparty. That is engineering buy-side liquidity on the basis of sell-side flow. Everything looks bearish to them because it's been going down all day, when in fact price only went to where the algorithm wanted before repricing higher.

The afternoon setups

Setup 4
Market structure breaks, price comes back into a mitigation block with an imbalance there — be a buyer, aim at the buy stops above
Setup 5
Price trades down to an old high and fills an imbalance at the same spot — buy, same objective
Setup 6
Once the pool is fulfilled: market structure shift lower on the 1-minute, fair value gap on the retrace — sell, aim at the low or the order block
When old highs really are supportOld highs are a premium array — until price trades above them, after which that old high becomes a discount array. This is where a broken old high can act as support, and it is why the books are sometimes right about key highs and lows. But not all the time — and that inconsistency is exactly the problem. It works when the logic is framed: the market is drawing up into the buy stops above, so a pullback into that old high (especially with an imbalance at the same level) holds. Once the liquidity target is met, stop using it.

On the last one, you can sell into the fair value gap directly, or wait for a confirmation entry: let it turn after hitting the gap, break lower, produce another break in structure on the 1-minute, and take the imbalance that creates. And a rule recalled from earlier — if there is a fair value gap with a small one right above it, anticipate price trading up into the higher one, but use the lower as your entry.

Back testing is discovery

Not about being right"You're not trying to do things correctly in back testing. Back testing is you in a mode of discovery that proves efficacy." Everyone does it wrong at the beginning. If you can't see things repeating, go back to the core content lessons, understand the concept better, then return to the old data.

The method is manual: go through old charts and annotate them — type notes into the empty space, map the moves out, see the logic. It is tedious and it takes desire, and he suggests a minimum of a year of the practice, continued even once you're trading live funds.

Write it as if you saw it comingRecord the annotation like you knew it was going to happen in advance — that's self-talk, "tricking your brain into seeing your annotations as something you foresaw." Over time it creates creases in your brain where the pseudo-experience is retained as real experience, and in a drawdown your own journal becomes the encouragement. Never write negative comments in the annotations.

And the whole search list is short: liquidity, imbalances, time of day. That's it. The algorithm isn't following retail logic — it's asking where the money is, who is the easiest prey right now, and running for it. No harmonics, no supply and demand zones, no Elliott wave, no Wyckoff, no Gann.

Buying and selling pressure is a mythHow many contracts does it take to move a candle from its open to its close? Two transactions. It gaps up, reprices to that point, offers it to the market, someone hits it with a market order — the candle exists. Contract count doesn't make a difference; you only need a transaction.

Finding your own model

Of the six setups on this day, one of them is yours — maybe the old-high buy, maybe none of the morning shorts. A unique model is simply a setup so similar every time you take it that it repeats the same general idea, just on a different chart, day and timeframe. Everyone can use the same teachings, find setups in the same session, and disagree on every individual trade — one long while another is short.

Everything is fractal: drop to a 30-second or 15-second chart and there are more setups still. Or stay on the 15-minute and trade the daily range — there is no reason to do anything less than that unless you want to.

Trade cap
No more than four trades a day — two in the morning, two in the afternoon
Pyramiding
Biggest position first: five, then three, then two, rolled up into the objective
What not to do
One, then two, then four, then eight — reckless; "I've roasted accounts doing it"

He closes by asking for patience over questions. If your head is spinning, you don't need to know what you're asking for right now — you only feel like you do. Take the material at the pace it's given, study it, and a couple of months from now you'll see things in price action you can't identify today even in hindsight.

Part 3 · Lesson 4

The Forex Session — Killzones, Big Figures & the 8:30 Rule

The same model on EURUSD: which opening price to use when two compete, why the 00/20/50/80 levels matter, how a news driver is used against your trailing stop, and why your exit should never be exact.

A lesson on how to apply this model to the FX market. Long-time students will find much of it familiar — most of it already exists in the free lessons on the channel — but there are subtle nuances in forex that index traders don't have to think about.

The daily read on EURUSD

Price moved above relative equal highs, taking the buy stops out of the marketplace, then started going lower. So what is it reaching for next? Sell-side liquidity below — and to the left there are two sets of relative equal lows, so two areas of sell-side liquidity.

Unfinished businessMonday's low did not take out the lower of those lows. So even after three consecutive down close candles, the bias for the very next candle is still bearish — there is business left below.

The mechanics of the run above the highs: those buy stops get taken, anyone short is knocked out at a loss, and that flood of market buy orders is the counterparty to smart money selling short up there — with the expectation that price goes below the lows beneath.

Annotate your charts (even though he doesn't)

Do as he says, not as he doesHe keeps his own chart clean, drawing levels only for teaching. The reason is honesty with himself: a chart full of levels forces the bias, and he wants the clarity to see when the premise is negated so he can reverse or move to the sidelines. But he tells students not to copy that. Draw the relative equal highs, mark your swing highs and intermediate term highs, write the levels on a pad — you need to train yourself to see it.

Institutional price levels

The round numbersThe big figure — the 1.09 in this example — and the 00, 20, 50 and 80 levels are highly influential, because a great deal of commerce and business transactions settle around them. He dubs them institutional price levels. That's where the liquidity is.

Projecting the objective

Revisiting the swing trading measurement: anchor to the highest open or close of the retracement up and the lowest open or close of the swing low, then treat the old low as a fulcrum point. Three candidate levels came out: 1.0919, 1.09, and 1.0901 — and all of them are only valid if that low is broken.

Choosing between them is again a matter of convergence: the relative equal lows sit at the 1.09 big figure, so the level to aim for is the lowest fib projection that doesn't go through 1.09. Multiple reasons pointing at one price is the whole basis of the target.

The day's shape

Before the day even begins, the draw is known: below the lows, down toward the 1.09 convergence. At midnight New York time the day starts, and what he wants to see is a rallyprotraction against the expected direction of the intraday move. That is the Judas swing, the manipulation in accumulation–manipulation–distribution. Price trades up into an imbalance, that forms the daily high, and the rest of the day is distribution looking for lower prices.

Frame high, execute lowOn the 15-minute the imbalance doesn't look that clean — the hourly is what it is framed on. Extend the midnight candle's opening price across the day; if you're selling short you want price above it, because that is where smart money is accumulating short positions.

The algorithm goes higher once more, and once more, and again — then begins its descent. This is not buying and selling pressure; the algorithm is simply constantly offering price above that opening price. And every rally above it is not automatically an entry — it becomes one when you couple it with time of day and price.

Killzone times — FX versus index

FX
7:00am to 10:00am New York — the New York open killzone
Index futures
8:30am to 11:00am; he'll still take a trade up to 10:40 or 10:45
After 10:00 in FX
Generally no new trades — unless there is a news driver
News extends the windowA high impact news driver at 10:00am extends the New York killzone into the 11:00 / 11:30 window, because of the volatility it brings in. Canadian dollar traders get the same allowance for the crude oil inventory number around 10:30.

Inside that bracket you are hunting your setup, and the price you want is at or just above the midnight opening price. What price runs to on the way up is not the imbalance itself — it overshoots that slightly — it is the last up close candle, the bearish order block. You know it is one because of the sequence: displacement lower → fair value gap → price returns to the last up close candle. And he uses the body, not the long tails and wicks.

What news is actually for

He doesn't care what the number saysThe driver that day was the ISM Services PMI at 10:00. "I don't care about the raw data, I don't care what the expectation is." What he expects is the volatility at or around those specific times, because the algorithm uses that injection of volatility to facilitate trades — to move, rebook and reprice to levels that let those in the know participate. It is not trying to give you a good trade. "It's a rigged game — you're not supposed to be in it", not consistently profitable, anyway.

Watch what it does to a trailing stop. If you were short from higher and had been trailing, your protection is a buy stop above the recent swing highs — so price gets jammed back up against it, above the opening price, right into the news. Your stop floods the market with buyers willing to pay a higher price, and those buyers are the counterparty to the smart money selling short. Every buyer has to have a seller.

Why the high heldThat rally went above the midnight opening price again but did not take out the earlier high. Why not? Because there is an imbalance at that high, which makes it an intermediate term high — not merely because a gap is present, but because the narrative expects lower prices and the run had already gone above the midnight open. If you're bearish, that high shouldn't be taken.

Down to the objective

On the 4-minute chart he strips the leg down and asks you to pause and find the fair value gap yourself. Price runs up into it, closes it in, and then and only then runs aggressively below the short-term low and reaches the objective.

It doesn't get to 1.0900 exactly — but it reaches the fib standard deviation projection and the old daily relative equal lows, with the candle bodies respecting that level and very little movement beneath it. The day's low was around 1.0901.

The 8:30 rule

To the objection — you're talking about the midnight candle and now the 8:30, which do I use? — the answer is both, with a tiebreak:

Take the lower one when bearishTrading FX, use the 8:30am opening price for New York session trades, but also refer to the midnight New York open. If the 8:30 opening price is lower than the midnight opening price, use the lower one — because you want to set the minimum threshold for a Judas swing or protraction to the upside. Bullish, everything reverses: you look for a move below the 8:30 open, then go long.

Exits: stop being perfect

Fluff the exitNever aim for the exact level. Add three to five pips of cushion — ten if you're new. Expecting 1.0900? Put the limit to cover shorts at 1.0905. You won't get the best exit, but you have a spread to account for, and every broker can open that spread on you — the ticker is showing you the best case. His own overzealous targeting has cost him "many amazing exits" over the years.
Entry
The candle trading back into the old high — around 1.0960
Stop
Just above that candle's high, ~1.09728 — he'd round it to 10 pips and be done
Target
The 1.09 big figure, fluffed a little higher
Risk to reward
Better than 8:1

On a hypothetical $100,000 demo — the size used in funded account challenges — that one trade gives you what you're looking for. If the stop feels tight, using the swing high above instead is fine.

He closes with the honest footnote: he did not take this trade, and he hasn't taken any FX pair trades at all in 2022. The point is that the model works in forex and in index trading — it's a matter of adjusting to what you're trying to trade, and knowing the handful of rules that differ between them.

Part 3 · Lesson 5

The Step-by-Step Walkthrough & What Makes an Order Block Valid

The whole workflow in one pass — the three-chart layout, daily bias down to a five-minute entry — and the correction that an order block is a change in the state of delivery that only exists if an imbalance follows it.

This is the lesson answering the question the comment section kept asking: if you only had one way of doing it, what would you do, and what does that look like on the chart, step by step? The answer is this model — nothing else bolted on. He begins the answer by refusing the premise the question smuggles in: "a specific style of trading that, if I only had to pick one way of doing it, obviously hits all the time — well there is no method that hits every single time. Everything that I trade with and teach is like everything else: it's imperfect. That means there's going to be losing transactions, largely because of the operator — me or whoever else is using it — and you have to take ownership of that." Again later: "if I had a way that I would never lose, I would have never came out publicly and became a teacher."

Which is why the win rate is not the lever"You don't need to be perfect, and I've proven imperfection still doubles the account." Asked whether a really low win rate can still double an account, the answer is yes"because I was thumbing my nose at this idea that a risk-to-reward model is essential for you to be net profitable. That's not true. I've proven that with a live account."
Stripped down on purposeIf he were starting over from nothing, knowing everything he knows, he would use this model and wouldn't invest any time at all in the central bank dealers range, the Asian range, or anything he hasn't mentioned inside this mentorship. "This literally is the simplest way to work with intraday and daily order flow." It doesn't feel sexy. There are no hard-hitting gadgets coming later — you don't need them.

The chart layout

Upper left
The daily chart — always. This is where analysis starts.
Lower left
The hourly chart.
Right (largest)
The 15-minute chart — the bellwether.

The three panes are linked, so anything drawn on one timeframe appears on all of them. On one screen you get the identical result: annotate the daily, switch that chart to hourly and mark it up, then drop to the 15-minute and every annotation from above is already there. You do not need a wall of monitors.

Set your charts to New YorkIt doesn't matter where you live or what time zone you're in — toggle the chart to New York local time. Do that and your chart matches everything being taught, and the things you're told to look for become easier to find.
Not on your phoneYou can manage a position on a phone. Entering a brand new position on one, no. The data is too compressed to see the lay of the land — he has never met anyone consistently profitable, trading millions, doing it from a phone.

Step 1 — the daily chart and the bias

Bias on this EURUSD example is bearish. Recent price action: a big drop, five down days, then a candle trading back up to create a daily fair value gap. Measured against the range from the high, the market is deep in discount, so a retracement is likely.

As soon as that gap forms you can expect a rally back into it. And critically: trading back to that candle's high is enough to set the stage for a new round of selling. You don't need the midpoint, you don't need complete closure of the gap, and you don't need to catch the high of the day.

Bias is not a prediction"Your bias isn't going to be perfect — and here's a news flash for you as well, I'm not always perfect with my bias either." A bias is just an idea you want to work within. You employ short sales when bearish, long ideas when bullish, and you filter out the other side of the marketplace unless you're proven clearly, absolutely wrong. Without that commitment you flip direction intraday, back and forth, and draw the account down — or blow it.

Step 2 — frame the target on previous daily highs and lows

The daily draw on liquidity is the old low below. But that is not the intraday trade target. The target is framed from the previous day's high and low — Wednesday's, in this example — giving a defined range of opportunity of roughly 60 pips for Thursday.

Where the liquidity sitsPrevious days' highs and lows are what institutional mindset traders use — there is a great deal of liquidity pooled around them, and high frequency trading algorithms attack them. Mark the last three days' highs and lows and you'll see a plethora of setups: "you're never going to run out of trades, ever."

The shape expected for the day, then: open, rally up into the daily fair value gap and above a short-term high — the Judas swing — then sell off toward that previous daily low. Why should it reach it? Because anybody who bought up in that rally is trapped, and there is always a buyer and a seller.

Step 3 — the hourly, then the 15-minute

The hourly does one job here: it shows that the daily imbalance also exists on the hourly, and it shows relative equal highs anchored right at it. That's the whole hourly workup — the frame of reference is still that daily gap.

On the 15-minute, add the daily dividers (a vertical line at midnight) and extend the midnight New York opening price forward to 11:00am. That's the reference the day gets measured against. Scalping on the 5-minute, he'd plot two reference points instead.

Why the 15-minute is the bellwetherIt's the chart he keeps returning to all day, because what it tells him is influential for managing a position, for stalking a new setup, and — the part that matters most — it helps him trust his intraday bias.

The sequence on that chart: price rallies above the relative equal highs, then breaks down below a swing low — and in doing so leaves a fair value gap. That is the setup. The New York killzone in forex is 7:00am to 10:00am, and the displacement lands inside it.

Entry
A limit order to sell short at that gap's price, or one pip better
Stop
Above the high — where the imbalance is stretched out, use the top of that imbalance
Target
The previous daily low that was framed in step 2
Order placed
10:00am New York

Step 4 — refining on the 5-minute

Split that 15-minute range into five-minute intervals and look inside the decline for a gap. There's a small one, a stretched-out one, and another above. Which to use is where your own style comes in — but the honest trade-off is stated plainly: get greedy with a higher limit and you may not get filled at all.

Parent and subordinateTo the objection that a smaller timeframe gap forms before the higher timeframe one — "no, it never works like that." The higher timeframe imbalances are parent to the subordinate smaller timeframes. The 15-minute imbalance is the parent here, so price needs to reach into that; the 5-minute is only the fine-tuning stage, the beginning of the 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 minute entry work.
Low threshold entryHe teaches the low threshold entry deliberately: it always carries the highest risk in pips — but pips are not money. The amount of money at risk is controlled by the leverage you allocate, and that is the thing traders abuse most, because they only ask how much they can make. If the axe swings and hits the target, fine; if it comes back, you've buried it in your own skull.

What an order block actually is

At the top of that 5-minute range sit three consecutive candles. All three together are the bearish order block — it begins at the lowest candle's low. Price traded up into the bottom one of the three, which was sufficient, and it never reached the last up close candle before the down move.

The definitionAn order block is a change in the state of delivery. As soon as price gets below that candle's open, the algorithm changes its state of delivery and the market starts delivering sell side — then it breaks the swing low, and gears have changed internally. Any rally after that is just setting up another run lower — a suspect rally.
What makes it validIt has to have an imbalance. Without the imbalance, there is no order block. That is exactly why this is not supply and demand: supply and demand requires fresh, untouched zones — he'll cut straight through candles and fractals and still trade the level.

So the common answer — that an order block is the last up close candle before the down move — is the one he is correcting here. Price didn't even reach that candle, and it didn't need to, because the parent 15-minute imbalance stops the run short. That's also the answer to "how do I pick the right order block": you pick it by where delivery changed, not by counting candles.

Why the stop goes thereThe high above the entry has an imbalance at it, which makes it an intermediate term high. If the read is right, it should not trade higher than that high — so that's where the stop belongs. And where a small gap sits just above your entry gap, expect price might trade up into it, so the risk has to incorporate that while the limit order stays lower so you don't miss the trade.
Not a one or two pip stopThere are traders trying to work with half-pip and one-pip stops. You might pull it off once in a while, "but I promise you when you start putting down size on these trades, you're not going to pull that off." A sensible stop also lets you walk away from the charts instead of sweating every tick.

How the day actually delivered

5:25am
An early run swept the previous day's low (April 6th), then rallied
London
Nothing taken — London never gave the initial rally into the area
9:30am
Price reaches the level the bias called for — a rich premium
10:00am
Displacement lower; the limit order is placed and left alone
2:45pm
It fills the objective — about 40 pips
The 11:30 ruleIf the order hasn't filled by 11:30, pull it. Don't leave it good-till-cancelled — you want to be entering on the day the setup forms, otherwise it can fill you at a time of day you don't want to be there and then keep running through the highs. Killzones are when you determine your entry, place your order and walk away; the fill itself does not have to happen inside the window. If you can't derive an order placement by then, you have nothing to do — no risk taken, wait for the next day.

The entry wasn't at the very highest high, and price ultimately went a little lower than the exit. Who cares. The trade was structured, and it made sense.

How to back test and journal this

Everything above is the back-testing method — the move had already happened. The routine: annotate the chart, toggle the label to the top left, zoom to the area, screenshot it into a study journal, and do it every single day.

Leave yourself spaceHe deliberately leaves one part of the chart empty — even in the private group — because that space is yours, for observations you want to investigate that no lecture will cover. Then on Saturday or Sunday you revisit the whole week: how the weekly range was fulfilled, when the high and low formed, which was the biggest day of the week and what framed it.

You can't get hurt, because it already happened. Everything anyone ever learns is learned in hindsight — a surgeon studies medical journals about events they weren't present for. What you're building with thousands of examples is the greatest technical analysis book you will ever own, in your own words. Over years it forms your psychological makeup, and the setups begin to leap off the chart.

Bear prints in the snowTwo bears walk through snow, one older and one younger. The prints are not identical — but you recognise both as bear prints, and you can tell which is which. Price action signatures repeat the same way: close to one another, never so identical that you can't tell one day from the next.
If it isn't obvious yet, that's normalWatching it explained and then failing to see it in your own chart is exactly what should happen at the start. "That's how it was for me for a long time in the 90s" — struggling to work out what he was supposed to be looking for. The fix is the study journal, not another indicator.

A note on gold

Event drivenThe model applies to forex, to bonds and to gold — but gold is an event driven market. It usually needs a geopolitical driver to move; otherwise it is highly manipulated, full of stop hunts and consolidations, and very frustrating. He does not believe it is the ideal market for someone to be aggressively short-term trading while learning.

Nothing in this walkthrough used an indicator. Only price, a few rectangles to highlight imbalances, and the lines you draw while you're still learning to see it — in time you won't have those on your chart either.

Part 3 · Lesson 6

When Not to Trade & the Daily Bias That Says When You Should

Sloppy price action means stand aside — then the other half of the answer: how equilibrium on the daily dealing range sets tomorrow's bias, how purge and revert frames the target, and how the midnight and 8:30 opening prices locate the entry.

This is a deliberately long, two-audience session — the private group's midweek commentary blended into the YouTube teaching. It is also the lesson where the question "teach us bias" finally gets answered directly, and where the reason not to trade is given as much weight as the reason to.

Sloppy price action is a signal, not an inconvenience

Cable — his own favourite pair — is walked through and dismissed on the spot. On the hourly: "there's absolutely zero, nothing in this chart, nothing to trade on, not one thing." On the 15-minute, the same. It is all back and forth, and that is what "sloppy" means: nothing you can easily pick out as bullish, pulling to a level, expected to rally from there.

The responseWhen the market you look at is messy, the first thing to consider is closing the charts, turning the computer off, and going and doing something you love. He has not taken one trade in British pound for months — not because the algorithm changed, but because the pair is not delivering what he's looking for.

By contrast, the euro 15-minute was called clean: a run up, a return to the old daily low, then a real energetic run higher leaving a gap. Clean means the story is legible in the candles. On the dollar index hourly, the bodies respected the imbalance with only wicks poking through — "that is algorithmic price action… that's not supply and demand, it's not harmonic."

Why forex was quietCurrencies were "asleep" — trade was being hindered and there was supply chain congestion, and none of the long-standing profitable names were talking about currencies. His attention had moved to index futures. This rotates: when forex comes back to life it will smoke index futures, and navigating between asset classes is what experience does.
The rattlesnakeA heavily manipulated market is a rattlesnake on the trail. You hear the rattle, you stand still, find it, and back away. There were times he thought he was better than the average bear and would get in there and find the honey — "well there you go, I got stung."

And a related instruction: have a hobby outside of trading. Not more videos — an actual outlet, otherwise you burn out.

You do not need to trade every day

Stated as bluntly as it gets: "put the potato chips down, put your drink down, listen — you do not need to trade every single day." What you need instead is to understand why today or tomorrow is a day where your bias is highly probable to deliver to a target you already know is likely to be traded to.

The line between trading and gamblingIf you cannot reasonably outline where price is going next, higher or lower, you are gambling. And the impulse that you have to be in there every day is a gambler's mentality. He does not promote gambling, over-leveraging, or lucky over-leveraged trading.
What he promotes insteadOne contract. Work on trying to double the account with the lowest leverage. How long will it take? He doesn't know. If you don't have the patience for that, you're a gambler — rushing for big money, with one end result: you blow the account.

Knowing when not to do something is described as crucial: it keeps you from blowing the account, keeps you from being undisciplined, gives peace of mind, and removes the fear of missing out. The failure modes he names are not technical — lack of responsibility, no adherence to rules, and not putting in enough time. The same underlying issues follow a trader into any approach, which is why a push-button solution changes nothing.

The two weeks without a tradeGoing two weeks without a trade will drive some people nuts, and make others want to change their style of trading — "and they're both wrong." When the setup isn't in your market, it doesn't invalidate the setup; it means you stand still.

Higher timeframe bias, and not calling tops

The dollar index was long-term bullish, having hit the 100 and 101 targets, and he refuses to call the top: "I don't mind being wrong by not trying to pick tops and bottoms." What would change his mind is price trading below the lows he points to — and even then it would take time before the long-term stance changed.

Where order flow comes fromInstitutional order flow is rooted on higher timeframe bias. There is a lot of opportunity between intermediate term highs and lows — you do not need the long-term high or the long-term low. He isn't teaching "the trend is your friend"; he's looking at how the market moves discount to premium, premium to discount, and where it sits within market structure.

He does have students who trade contrarian to his stated bias — waiting for the point where retail reads a reversal, then taking the counter-trend leg. On euro that leg was mapped out: run down into the old daily low, rally to create a fair value gap, buy it, and sell into the 62% retracement or the bodies of the candles above — roughly 30–40 pips, a bread-and-butter trade.

Not for a new studentCounter-trend trading goes against higher timeframe order flow. "You can and will absolutely lose money trading this style." If you go in nimble, buy-sell-buy-sell, having recently started, you will blow your account. It's shown so that you understand the retracement and don't trade it — it's material for back testing, not for live risk.

The order block as a bookmark

On the dollar index 15-minute, two up close candles into a downside displacement are labelled a bearish order block: take the low of the lowest up close candle and its opening price, and draw them forward in time. Price hammered it.

Why those candlesBecause there was a change in the state of delivery — price was already dropping, then it went higher. The displacement qualifies the order block, because the displacement creates the fair value gap, and the narrative is still lower.
The bookmark analogyThink of the algorithm placing a bookmark. You're reading a chapter, real life interrupts, you mark the page and leave. That mark is where the candle closes. Everything that happens while you're away is the move; when you come back, you pick up the same storyline — it was dropping, it paused, it goes back to dropping. It is a reference point the algorithm will return to.

The algorithm doesn't know where your stop is — your broker does. What it works from is the logic that gets regurgitated in every book and seminar: put your stop above the high. It doesn't take a rocket scientist to look at a declining chart, find the most recent short-term high, and know that anyone short who trailed their stop has it sitting right above there.

Order block theory is being misquotedWhat people are taking from his videos and writing books about is "completely wrong" — it's really supply and demand wearing a different name, and he does not trade supply and demand. He is deliberately holding back much of order block theory until the second volume of his trilogy is published, so the record shows where it came from.

Bias from the daily dealing range

On the e-mini S&P daily: the dealing range is drawn from the most recent swing low — a candle with a higher low either side of it — up to the high. Price then retraced back down to about 50%, equilibrium of that move.

This is the bias, stated plainly"It went down to equilibrium or short-term discount. The next day we can expect it to go higher." That's it. If it's likely to go higher the next day, you go into the next day expecting it to go higher — and if that day is down or doesn't move, you go into the next one with the same expectation. It's not hard, but it isn't perfect either: sometimes the cookies don't rise.
Dealing range
The most energetic and most recent low and high
Equilibrium
50% of that range — at or below it is discount
Mean threshold
The midpoint (median) of an order block — half of it

The upside target set is a premium array: the last up close candle before the displacement lower. That single candle gives you four targets, in order of ease:

Candle low
The easiest — the one a developing student should pick, and be content with
Open / body
Drawn forward in time
Mean threshold
Half of the order block
Candle high
The least likely
Purge and revertBlended in on the same chart: price ran below a short-term low, so it purged sell side liquidity — and it then reverts back to the high of the last three days, with the purge day counted as day one. Above that high sits buy side liquidity, because shorts trail their stops there.

The opening prices: midnight and 8:30

First, the housekeeping: on TradingView, set the time zone to New York. It doesn't matter where you live — do that and everything being taught lines up. Then take the opening price of the midnight candle and draw it forward in time.

The rule he was asked to clarifyMidnight opening price is the price you preferably want to be buying below when bullish. But if the midnight opening price is lower than where price is trading at or after 8:30, it's likely not going to be a factor — so you use 8:30. 8:30 matters because that's when the news embargo lifts.

The day shown is the better case: price was already below the midnight opening price, and after 8:30 it was below it again, still under the midnight open. That is a heavy discount — "we're really, really cheap on the day" — on a day when the bias is bullish. No indicator, no divergence, no Fibonacci required to see it.

Two Judas swings, one conceptThe retracement down after midnight is the Judas swing on the daily candle — the move opposite to the expected daily range. The dip below the 8:30 opening price is a micro Judas swing for the New York session. Both are the same power of three: accumulation, manipulation, distribution. Each move lower is the trap — the snare that catches traders thinking it's going down. We are looking for that drop, not any indiscriminate drop.

If you're not comfortable buying the London or overnight low, you don't have to — you can wait for 8:30.

What to do at 8:30Look to the left. Find the short-term swing lows, because you want to absorb sell stops that smart money will pair with their buys. Pair that with your bias, and look for an imbalance — preferably with an order block too. On the five-minute example all of it lined up: a fair value gap, two down close candles forming a bullish order block, the 8:30 drop down into it, then a rally, a retest of the 8:30 opening price, and an aggressive expansion above the short-term highs.

Where the target comes from

On the 15-minute, two level highs are marked as relative equal highs — and that formation engineers buy stops. Every book tells every reader that stops go above the old high, and that price stalled there twice, so retail reads it as formidable resistance. When price then drifts sideways and slightly up, they read a bear flag and project a measured move lower.

Think in pairingsPrice ran below old lows, so smart money bought those sell stops and is now net long. How do they get out? They have to sell to willing buyers — and the willing buyers are the buy stops resting above those relative equal highs. That's the draw. "If you don't have this mindset going in before you click the enter button of your trade, you are gambling."
The simplest targeting there isOld highs and old lows, and relative equal highs and lows. These are the easiest, most visual representations of liquidity pools, and the logic can't be changed: above an old high there will always be buy stops, and below an old low there will always be sell stops.

The shape of the day, then: a small move down to make the low of the day, then a rally up to clean out that liquidity. You are not trying to predict the daily closing price — you're trying to participate in the morning session move that gets you long and runs into that area. Point of origin, terminus. That is what narrative means.

The same pattern, every timeframeOn the dollar index hourly, price broke a low inside a gap, and 50% of the parent price swing sat right below that low — the same fractal pattern being taught for intraday charts, on an hourly. On the one-minute S&P: a run above a short-term high (a bullish shift in market structure), a trade back into the fair value gap, and three consecutive down close candles as the order block. Same model, different resolution — and it applies to forex, futures and bonds.
There's a setup every week"Every week, every day, and it won't stop" does not mean every day in every individual market. Some days it isn't in futures — it might be in forex or bonds, so you have to be flexible. But every single week there is a setup like this.

Make it boring

The closing block is about how you condition yourself. Refining which days you trade, what time of those days, which asset class, which market in it, and which direction — that is how you narrow things down to a recipe, and a recipe is an algorithm.

How to annotate a back testWrite it up as if you saw the trade beforehand. It's self-talk: the subconscious stores it as a positive memory, so pattern recognition builds pseudo-experience you haven't lived yet. Never write "I was stupid, I missed it, I should have known better" — keep every annotation positive, in your journal and everywhere else.
Don't over-leverage a demoRecording a paper trade with leverage you could never afford teaches you to ignore real risk for a dopamine hit and a video-game high score. His standing comment on those videos is the same every time: "next time, use realistic leverage." It's clout, and clout builds a barrier to consistency. Focus on points or pips, not the money — the money is a derivative of doing the right things.
The goalThink about how you can make this as boring as possible, because if you make it boring you won't be a victim of your emotions. Treat it like a business you show up to, not a college course you pass. Don't try to be an Olympic trader — one bread-and-butter setup a week, with money management doing the heavy lifting, is enough.

And when the read is wrong, that is not a verdict on you: "I'm going to make mistakes, I'm going to read it wrong, I'm going to react too late, I'm going to react too soon." It means you're human. What it doesn't mean is that the framework broke.

Part 4 · Lesson 1

The London Open in Forex — Trading Euro Off the Dollar Index

A level called out the night before on the dollar index, hit to within a few pips on the London low — and the euro short that the inverse relationship hands you at that exact moment.

The comment section kept asking one thing: can you show this working in the London session, on forex? This lesson is the answer. The level was published in advance in the previous episode, without a safety net — "I can't edit a video on YouTube; once it's there, it's there" — so the claim can be checked against the recording at roughly the 20-minute mark.

What this is notThis is not the model and not an addition to the model. It answers a question, and it stops there. The next request is always can you do live London sessions so we can copy youthat isn't going to happen, no matter how nicely it's asked. "If you're not seeing this as proof, move along." You are meant to go and find these setups yourself with what's being taught.

Where the level came from

The call was that the dollar index would drop below the 100 level, and that if he were making the market — setting the parameters at which the dollar goes down to set up a buying opportunity — he'd take it to 99.92.

The derivation was deliberately plain. There was a run up at the beginning of a candle; draw that out in time and you get a small band of about three pips, roughly 99.95 to 99.92. That's what was eyeballed, on the fly, before midnight.

Held back on purposeThere are things in his repertoire that fine-tune the actual low to within two or three pips — sometimes right on it — and those are reserved for his community, not taught here. But the point stands: it isn't needed. The rough extension was enough.

Price dropped, made the low of the day inside the London killzone, and reacted — close to the outlined level, not exactly on it, and that is fine. He was also not convinced the dollar's top was in; this was a setup going into London, which is what he'd expect at that time.

What the dollar index then did

Killzone
London open: 2:00am to 5:00am New York local time — set your chart's time window to New York
Low
Made inside that window, near the outlined 99.92 area
Retracement
Ran back up into an order block and an optimal trade entry — visible on the lower timeframes
Objective
Swept the relative equal highs above, as the daily objective
Relative equal highsThe market does not like to leave relative equal highs sitting there — it likes to run through them at a later point, because leaving them is not efficient. It is only "efficient" for retail technical analysis, which sees a perfect line of resistance. "The books are meant to trip you up." Investigate the claim rather than believing it — that's how you get to dismiss almost everything else on your chart.

The barometer: why the dollar tells you what euro will do

If you trade forex you have to relate your analysis to something. Euro is the trading market; you need a barometer to measure its movement, and that barometer is the intermarket relationship with the dollar index.

The teeter-totterDollar and euro are inverted. So if the dollar is dropping into a level you've marked as bullish, it is no surprise to see euro rally into that moment — and the instant the dollar reaches that buying opportunity, the same instant is a shorting opportunity in euro. Dollar strength introduces weight to euro.

What euro reached for was the previous week's high — it traded up above it and cleared the buy stops resting there. That is the false breakout, and the only reason it can be called false in advance is that the dollar's buy level had already been published.

He took neither side of it. "Could I have bought that? Sure… did I? No. I went to sleep." Being able to do a thing doesn't obligate anyone to do it — the aim is to get you trusting your own analysis and leaning on your own experience, even when there isn't much of it yet.

The euro entry, step by step

On the 15-minute chart, euro's high of the day formed inside the London killzone. Then strip it down — straight to a 2-minute chart, which holds a very clean fair value gap.

After running above the old weekly high, price traded lower and took out a short-term low: a shift in market structure. There was a nearer short-term low it could have used instead, and the reason it didn't is the whole lesson of the sequence.

Displacement is the filterOn the nearer low, the fair value gap forms on that candle and the very next candle opens essentially right at that low — so price hasn't moved away. Displacement is the energetic move away from the fair value gap and away from the low or high it took out. No displacement, no entry. It cannot be a limit order for a short until price has moved away from the gap.

Once the run through the short-term low happens with displacement, the gap becomes the entry. Price didn't reach it on the first attempt — it went a little deeper first. You don't chase it. You wait, because the London killzone is still open, and it retraces into the fill.

Entry
Limit order at the 2-minute gap — hypothetically 1.09244 (the candle's high; a pipette or a pip above is also fine)
Stop
Above the high — 1.09365
Drawdown absorbed
To 1.09301 — about five pips, and it never came to the stop
First target
The 50% of the parent price leg, measured from the most energetic low up
Full-day target
The imbalance below — which it traded into "rather handsomely"
Gearing, not dollarsDon't think about risk as "a thousand dollars per trade." Think in a fixed percentage of your own equity: 1% is the maximum, and while you're learning it should preferably be a half or a quarter of one percent. You're not trying to do a lot at the start — you're trying to trust the idea of seeing these moves.

The five-minute chart was used at the end for one reason only: the fractal moves up then down, so everything fits on one clean chart. Nothing special was being done with that timeframe.

The takeaway

Bias for forexUse the dollar index for EURUSD and GBPUSD bias. The framework is given beforehand on the dollar, and everybody should already know that euro goes the opposite direction of whatever the dollar does.
Part 4 · Lesson 2

Risk On, Risk Off & A Market Too Heavy To Rally

Why the dollar index leads both forex and the indices, and what to do on the day the model's setup never arrives — no rally above the midnight open, none above 8:30, just relentless selling.

Risk on, risk off

The dollar index on the hourly is the starting point, because it explains why the relationship between the dollar and everything else exists at all.

The mechanismA rising dollar is a risk off scenario: it implies generally every other market or asset class starts to decline. It is treated as a flight to quality — a safe haven. Money pours into the dollar and out of risk assets, foreign currency among them. So dollar up, foreign currency down; dollar down, foreign currency up — a rising dollar makes sustained FX rallies unlikely and sustained declines likely.

The same logic reaches the stock market and the index market. Everything taught here is universal, so it works across them.

Not cryptoA standing reminder because it's asked constantly: he does not trade cryptocurrency and has zero experience in it outside a demo account — never opened an account, no interest in the asset class. Plenty of students swear the concepts work there; he isn't co-signing it. He is a forex and futures trader.

The forecast, checked

The published call was the dollar dropping to around 99.92, then running the relative equal highs and heading higher, with objectives named around 102 and 103. Then, on the e-mini S&P, the reverse: weakness into May, reaching for the relative equal lows on the daily. Both are now on the chart.

Dollar index
Made the low, rallied — the London setup, then continuation into the named objectives
E-mini S&P
The inverted leg: rallied into the daily bearish order block, then sold off
Seasonal
May is usually a seasonal decline for the indices — so he looked for signatures to warrant downward pressure
Draw on liquidity
The relative equal lows on the daily, then the old low beneath them
Which part of an order block is likely to tradeWithin the daily bearish order block he works with the low, the open, the mean threshold (halfway) — and the high as the level least likely to be traded to. Price rallied into the block and never reached that high. The order block isn't a main factor in the public model, but he leaned on it as the basis for the bearish analysis.

The point being made with all of it: "this is what it's like to be mentored" — a bias built on tools that make sense, nothing ambiguous, nothing splattered across the chart. And it is offered to be judged. "If I'm right or if I'm wrong you get to be the judge."

Where the algorithm is marchingPrice keeps going lower because it is gravitating toward the relative equal lows on the daily chart. That is the heaviness objective — "the algorithm is marching every minute, every hour, every day to that level." How long it takes to get there is unknown, and it does not need to be known.

The two opening prices

Two reference prices do two different jobs, and they are routinely confused.

Midnight New York
The opening price used to trade the London session (2:00am–5:00am) and to frame Power of Three for the daily range
8:30am New York
The New York session's opening price — and the New York session is 8:30 to 11:00 New York local time
The ideal scenarioIf bearish, he wants to see price rally above the opening price; if bullish, decline below it. That move above is the Judas swing — a false or suspect rally — and he likes to fade it, selling right into it as it goes up. Scary if you don't know what you're looking at; routine if you do, after a lot of back testing.
Time zones, settledThe daylight-savings confusion in the comments has one fix: on TradingView, click the time field and toggle it to New York. Then stop worrying about it. Better still, keep a clock on your computer tracking New York local time 24/7, 365, and you'll never be confused about what you should be doing relative to time.

The day that refused

He states the miss plainly: he expected one more spike up to flirt with 4320 and then a roll over. "This is one of those times where I didn't get it right and I have no problem telling you."

On the 15-minute there were only one or two tiny moves above the midnight opening price — anemic, where he wanted a 15 to 20 handle Judas swing. London broke down at 3:00am, retraced into a bearish order block and its imbalance, then rolled over right before the 9:30 open, ground through lunch and sold aggressively into the close. Power of Three was in effect — just so small it may not be useful to you.

The read that mattersBearish bias. Did it rally above the midnight opening price? No. Did it rally above the 8:30 opening price? No. That combination is the tell — and he states it with the qualifier attached: "obviously with the benefit of hindsight, it's extremely bearish." Extremely bearish — it can't even rally to a short-term premium above the opening price at key levels and key times. So it will not hand you those tidy short-term rallies to fade. Either you get in where you can find small pockets of imbalance, or you miss the move entirely.

The 8:30 model, for contrast, is what didn't appear: something to the left prior to 8:30 — a short-term high — a rally above the 8:30 opening price running those stops, then a break down with displacement leaving an imbalance, a rally back into that imbalance, and the sell-off. "The model doesn't exist in today's price action on the five-minute chart."

The one sound entry

The London open setup was, in his opinion, the only real sound entry that took place: displacement leaving a fair value gap, a rally into a bearish order block and its gap, and it's held through the micro market structure shift below the short-term low.

When there are two fair value gapsPrice can spike into the upper one, but your entry is the lower fair value gap and your risk is the upper one — the stop has to allow for a trade up into it. You may not like that much risk and may not be able to take the trade; that's part of the game. And don't assume you'll get the best entry up high — here it never went there.

That kind of repeating behaviour is what he calls a signature in price action: algorithmic things that repeat, but which need discernment and experience to know when they're likely and when they're not.

What 9:30 actually is9:30 is when stocks begin trading their New York session, so it brings initial volatility — it can whipsaw both directions in a small range, or run a large range and clear both sides of buy and sell stops. Then you wait for the real move to unfold. Today it gave no rally at all; it just accelerated what had been in motion since 3:00am.

Power of Three on the New York session

Accumulation
Smart money accumulates short positions, because the market is bearish
Manipulation
The move above the opening price — where they take on more shorts
Distribution
Shorts are distributed at a forecast important low — framed by daily relative equal lows, old daily lows and fib projections, in agreement with time of day

On this day that low came in around the lunch hour, beginning at noon: a retracement through lunch, one more punch above the high, a break down, consolidation — and then continuation into the afternoon session.

Trading a market this heavy

The answer is not to abandon the concepts, it's to drop the requirement that isn't being offered. Go to the 2-minute and 1-minute charts and use the small imbalances to get in sync with what is already in motionwithout waiting for a rally above the 8:30 opening price, because it isn't likely to come.

It doesn't mean anything is brokenSometimes markets are simply too heavy and will not rally for you to short into — in index futures, in corn, soybeans, gold, oil, stocks. "It doesn't mean that they've changed anything, it doesn't mean that the concepts don't work" — it means the market is extremely bearish, and when it's extremely bearish you have to trade it differently. He also concedes those entries aren't scalable with the model shared publicly.
Don't jam the stopJust because price has gone lower does not mean you drag the stop down to the last swing. You need time and price behind you before you start moving your stop loss.
The mistake he made for yearsOn days like this, in his early development, it felt like it's too low now, it can't keep going lower, the indicators say oversold, I'll buy it. 1992, 1993, 1994 — "I blew account after account after account doing that."

Holding, and being human

Overnight
He stopped holding 24 hours years ago — and no longer holds over the weekend either
Session
100% in a session or a day, and out before the close
Typical hold
90 minutes to two hours maximum, then take it and reassess
If you leave
If you won't be watching, close the entire position — delays and broker connections are not worth the risk

His own day: he took his wife to the airport and captured about $2,000 in the e-mini, against two figures he names for two different sizes: holding what he had on that morning was "around twelve thousand dollars today alone", and holding just one of the two contracts and letting it run was "about eight grand or so." He doesn't dress it up — "real life creeps in, it's going to happen."

Permission to be humanYou will misread it, you will miss moves — including huge ones. He called Bitcoin's runs publicly for years and never traded a single one with real money, and missed a great deal in futures, commodities and stocks while teaching forex. "Guess what — it's okay. I'm able to still find trades. I'm not starving." Reason with yourself in advance rather than blaming the market afterwards. That's what the stop loss, the limit on how many times you enter, and a measure of flexibility are for.
Part 4 · Lesson 3

Reading the Tape — SMT Divergence, Pyramiding & the Fib Settings

A full Nasdaq execution narrated contract by contract, the divergence between ES and NQ that confirmed the sell, and the exact Fibonacci settings behind OTE and the projections.

The daily e-mini S&P recap first, because the whole day sits inside it: the bearish order block marked weeks earlier, the seasonal tendency into May, the risk off relationship with the dollar — and the call that price would draw down into the relative equal lows. Today it tapped them.

The draw on liquidity, drawn on the chartOn TradingView he marks that level with the bullseyethis is what you're aiming for — or the magnet icon, which is the analogy he teaches: imagine a magnet down there and price being drawn to it.
The entry is the easy partNew students always want to know how to pick the right order block, which is the entry candle, where to get in. "That's the easiest thing out of all the learning" — once you understand what the market is likely to do, where it's going to draw to, and why it should get there. The bulk of the study is watching the tape.

Bodies inside the imbalance

On the hourly there's an imbalance coupled with an actual gap — between one candle's low and the next candle's opening. Several candles afterwards poke above that area, and that is fine.

Permissible price actionLook at the bodies of the candles: they stay inside the imbalance. Price reaches for liquidity on the wicks, but the bulk of the volume is held inside the imbalance. When the bodies respect a fair value gap like that, it says a great deal — that's high probability. Get used to it rather than treating the wick as a failure.

The 15-minute checklist, and the two references

At 9:30 the equities open — the bell, the clapping on television — and price ran a short-term high, broke lower, and left an imbalance. Run the checklist:

Did it take a high out?
Yes
Did it break below a low?
Yes
Was there displacement?
Yes — energetic
Did it trade back up into it?
Yes — that's where you can be a seller
Target
The old relative equal lows on the daily — the blue line

At 8:30, using that candle's opening price: price traded above it, so it was in a premium — and it was also above an old high, which makes it a premium too. That last point answers a question from the comments.

Premium and discount, defined by liquidityAny time the market trades above an old high, that is a short-term premium, because it's going into liquidity. Any time it trades below an old low, that's a discount.
But it can keep goingJust like overbought and oversold indicators: things can be overbought and still go higher; things can be in a discount and keep going lower. So you can't assume a premium is automatically a shorting opportunity. Market structure is not the answer — it helps you frame an idea, and the idea must be in alignment with the present narrative. Narrative is why should the market go where you think it's going on this particular day — the climate, the economic calendar events, and the volatility on offer for that session.

Power of Three, and who supplies the liquidity

The shape of the day: the open, a rally — manipulation — creating the high, then the move lower to distribute the shorts below where stops rest. Smart money sells short into the buy stops up high, rides it down, and offloads into the sell stops beneath the relative equal lows.

Why those lows get takenTraders read relative equal lows on the daily as a breakout level. There are plenty of long-term trend-following systems that want to be short if price breaks below — which floods the market with market orders to sell. That is the perfect counterpart to smart money being short from higher up and wanting to buy it back at a lower price. Outlining that a week or two in advance isn't hard to believe if the algorithm is in control and you understand what it's doing.

Down through the timeframes

On the 5-minute: relative equal highs with buy-side liquidity resting above the opening price, plus a cluster of highs just to the left that might get cleaned out for good measure. The furthest high was judged "too rich" an expectation — the nearer area was reasonable. Price punched up, took them, broke down, came back above the opening price once more, then "gives up the ghost" and ran aggressively for the sell side.

Some traders stop there — short up high, buy it back below the lows, walk away. Nothing wrong with that if that's your model. On the 1-minute, the same sequence refines: run above the relative equal highs, break below a swing low with displacement, retrace back into the small gap above the opening price — that's enough, you can be short there, weathering one more run up into the entry.

Where the stop goes, and why it's bigAt an absolute minimum the stop sits above the candle that creates the fair value gap; conservatively, above the high. "Oh but ICT that's a big stop" — look how volatile it is. Do you want to be knocked out of the trade prematurely, or are you only concerned about making the maximum amount of money while dismissing the level of risk? "That's what gamblers do. I'm not trying to teach gambling."
Back in after 1:30He likes to re-engage around 1:30pm — earlier trades happen, but by then the lunch hour has been smoothed out and there's usually a retracement higher when bearish (or lower when bullish). That afternoon it delivered exactly that: an imbalance with relative equal highs to short into, then another fair value gap, both aiming at that daily relative equal low.

The Nasdaq trade, narrated

Insomnia, an early start, and a setup already formed. The backdrop: a high taken out — buy stops run, breakout traders long — then relative equal lows broken, giving a market structure shift on the 5-minute in a market where heaviness was the protocol. Below those lows came displacement, leaving fair value gaps above.

One gap versus twoIf there is only one fair value gap, put your entry there and don't expect a deeper retracement. Because there was a second one above, expect price to stab up into that — so the stop must be able to weather it. Either you have the pockets to place it beyond, or you trade the micros. His own choice: "I don't want to do a micro, I want to be in there 20 per point" — but that requires an account that allows it.
Don't be an ICT juniorWanting to be filled on the highest candle when selling and the lowest when buying is understandable, and it isn't always going to happen. Aim only for that and you'll miss moves — and on a day that runs like this one, "that's a heartbreaker." Worse, you spend the rest of the session kicking yourself and miss the afternoon setups too, ending with nothing.

The fractal and the swing hierarchy

Zoom in and the same pattern nests: relative equal lows, a high taken, then two candles pushing below — the identical structure as the larger move, just smaller. A gap forms, price trades up into it, bodies respect it, a wick goes slightly above, then it breaks aggressively lower.

Intermediate term high
Any high with an imbalance at it — an ITH leaves behind imbalance
Long term high
Of two such highs, the higher one — the turning point in the hierarchy
Short term high
The high formed by the retracement inside that structure
Consequence
With long term and intermediate term highs above it, the market is predisposed to go lower — it should respect the underlying order flow and reach the sell stops below

So when price retraced back into an up close candle — a bearish order block — that was the area to execute in. And he's explicit that this narration is not the public model: "I didn't say that's what this was — I'm telling you how to read the tape."

CalibratingCalibrate means refining top-down: take the order block seen on the 5-minute and refine it down to the one on the 1-minute. Then, as price retreats back into it, aim to get in around its midpoint.

The execution, contract by contract

First fill
3 contracts — the largest size, at the largest part of the framework
Second fill
2 contracts at the next fair value gap
Third fill
1 contract after a retrace into the bearish order block — entry 13,335, a quarter of a point above that candle's low of 13,334.75
Heat taken
The candle ran to 13,339.54.5 handles, and only on that one contract
Exit
Bought all six back at 13,285 even
How to pyramidStart with your biggest position first, then go smaller and smaller until you can't go smaller. He never does one contract and then one more and one more. Because five contracts were already carrying built-in equity, the 4.5 handles of heat on the last one was insignificant — "I don't even worry about it." Each add was at a logical, precise area: "it's not randomness, it's not willy-nilly, it's not flipping a coin."
Exit just above the levelThe buy-back went in just above the targeted level, because price might do shallow runs and never give the fill. It hovered, then dug deeper and filled — and he posted the screenshot to the community tab as it happened.

Longer-standing students will recognise the whole thing as a market maker sell model — selling in the area where distribution would take place. Later, at the 9:30 volatility, he also took a small long scalp in the live account, exiting around 13,409 when he'd wanted 13,425 — apprehensive they might not stab through it. About $740, and then his attention went elsewhere.

On the statements being picked apartMuch of what's in those statements has nothing to do with being precise: they include close proximity entries, and demonstrations for students of how to weather drawdown or recover a period of drawdown. "That's not all I've got" — and he won't publish live time-and-sales statements, because people rebrand his material and would use them to scam.
Does teaching it break it?No. It takes discipline and organisation, and most who parrot it aren't actually doing it — "humans are lazy creatures." The algorithm doesn't change, and liquidity never runs out: PT Barnum said there's a sucker born every second. His own test of honesty: "if I honestly believed that this would fail and stop working if I taught it, I would not teach it."

SMT — the divergence that isn't an indicator

Both indices declined in concert, but look closer. On ES, the rally after 8:30 made a high that was lower than its overnight high around 2:30am. On NQ, the same rally made a higher run.

Smart money techniqueThe S&P 500 composite and the Nasdaq 100 composite are closely correlated and generally move in tandem — not all the time. So if you're bearish, and NQ makes the higher run but ES doesn't, that shows the run is a stop run and that ES is really weak. That is your confirmation, without an indicator, and it gives an x-ray view of real accumulation and distribution — here, distribution, because ES didn't join the rally.
How to plot itWith NQ up, use the compare tab, add the e-mini S&P in a new pane, then in that pane's settings change price source to High. Compare high to high — higher here, lower there. It looks like an indicator divergence, but it's price.
Where a sell program reprices toWhen ES enters a sell program and seeks lower prices, it is likely to reprice to the low where something was respected — not to the low where a sell-side purge has already occurred.

The Fibonacci settings

Anchor the fib to two price points, then open the tool's style settings and type in the levels you want.

0.5
Equilibrium — the divide between premium and discount
0.62 & 0.79
The optimal trade entry levels
Standard deviations
Projections — how far the move is likely to travel; calibrated to the daily range they give a good idea of where the low should form
Anchor OTE to the bodiesFor premium and discount, use the range from the high to the low. But for optimal trade entry he uses the bodies — the lowest open or close in one swing and the highest open or close in the other — because that is the bulk of the volume. The wicks beyond them are stop runs. This is what people made videos about, claiming he doesn't know how to use a Fibonacci; anchored that way, price trades up into the 79% and the fair value gap together — "that's what makes it optimal."

Run the projections the other way and one standard deviation below the low marks a sensible place to take profits — which is exactly where the market turned and retraced. For the little level labels: anchor a price note to the high you want and drag; hold shift and it stays level. The same trick keeps trend lines straight.

On the live sessions

Watch, don't actThe live streams run in May only, starting around 8:00am and possibly to 10:30 or 11:00, on hand-picked days announced in advance on the community tab, and recorded for anyone absent. No trade recommendations, and he will not enter trades in front of you. He won't read the chat either — not rudeness, just concentration. "Don't act on it, because you don't know what I'm doing." And the most useful thing that can happen: "the best thing that can happen is for me to get it wrong sometimes" — so that being wrong stops frightening you.
Part 4 · Lesson 4

Trading a News Day — Run vs Sweep & the Eight Setups

An FOMC afternoon narrated live with no replay button: the knee-jerk sequence a news release delivers, the difference between running a high and sweeping it, and the eight separate setups hiding inside one move.

The chart is the micro Nasdaq 100, and the recording starts inside an imbalance — the initial one, with a second above it that price could stab into. It's FOMC, and he has deliberately waited a few minutes for the initial shakeout before saying anything.

Marked before, not afterEverything is drawn as it happens — the checkered flag for the end of the drop, the bullseye below the short-term low, the blue shaded target zone. The replay button is dimmed and the candles are painting. The plan was also posted to the community tab before the video was recorded.

The shape of a news release

The knee-jerk sequenceFOMC — like non-farm payroll — has a knee-jerk reaction with a repeatable order: an initial leg, then another leg, then a fake-out leg, and then the real setup comes. That is why you can afford to wait for price to trade up into the higher timeframe fair value gap rather than chasing the first move.

The two o'clock announcement makes the initial leg where the market prices in whatever it's going to do, high or low; around 2:30 that leg finishes and the rally begins. On the day, the turn came just a little past 2:30 — "pretty much close to that in terms of algorithmic delivery."

Running versus sweeping

He is deliberate about the vocabulary, and the two words mean different outcomes.

Sweeping a high or low
A real shallow little run above the level, then it comes back down and reverses into the range
Running a high or low
It goes right over the top of it and doesn't look back — an expansion move that continues
Both happened on the same levelTuesday's high was swept first — shallow, above the red line, then back down. Later, after the drop into the target zone, price ran it: straight over the top and away. "I try to pick my words carefully so that way you understand the distinction."

The call, and how it played

The expectation stated in advance: drop down into the blue shaded area first"the end of the road for the bears"then run out Tuesday's highs. He notes the sell-side pool resting just below the turquoise imbalance, so a small dip beneath it wouldn't upset the idea. What he did not want was price dropping too far, because that would upset the fair value gap that hadn't been traded into yet.

Bodies inside the zonePrice traded down and the bodies of the candles respected the blue shaded area — "really really handsome price delivery." It dipped a little below. "That's fine, I'm not worried about being that accurate — the main thing is going down into that area."

Shorts along the way were framed the same way each time: sell into the return to the imbalance or the bearish order block, with the stop above the high of the most recent up-close candle to the left. Once price rallied and crossed back above the larger fair value gap near 13,150, he anchored a Fibonacci from the 2 o'clock high down to the post-2:30 low and projected upward — the target came out at 13,437, and the market hit it.

Wicks or bodies — the fib decision

Volatility decides the anchorNormally he anchors to the highest open-or-close and the lowest open-or-close — the bodies — when the swing isn't expected to carry a lot of volatility. On FOMC the market is far more volatile, so the extremes of the range should be considered — that means using the wicks. That is the whole answer to the question asked constantly in the comments about why he sometimes uses one and sometimes the other.

Drawn from the low up to the high, the projections gave one objective, then a second — the day fell just short of the further one, which he treats as the extreme target. The measurement of the earlier decline worked the same way: anchor the 2 o'clock high down to the low, find 50% of that range, and note that the turquoise fair value gap sits below the 50% — a discount, and the draw.

Eight setups in one move

Counting back through the session he finds eight distinct trades inside the single sequence — the drop into the fair value gap, the return to it, a scalp long up into the buy-side above the high, the short into the objective, the buy at the turn, the return to the order block, the small imbalance on the way up, and one more after the recording stopped.

You are not meant to take them all"I'm not Spiderman" — and neither are you. Any one of these could be the specific setup that fits your unique model. He explicitly does not want every student trading the same setup: "the things that you're looking for are going to be much more important when it's uniquely selected, not me pushing you into a mode saying this is how it's going to work every single time." You may take one of the eight and never take the other seven.
The one that matters mostThe highlighted setup is the highest form of analysis — the one where you can see exactly where price is going to draw to before it turns around. That is the one he called in advance.
The run before the release doesn't countThe move that happens ahead of the FOMC announcement he refuses to count. "That's a gambler's setup before the FOMC announcement."

The warning attached to all of it

Not an invitation"I don't want you thinking this is an invitation for you to try to trade FOMC or a non-farm payroll event — they're very, very risky, extremely risky." They are, however, a wonderful case study: go back over them in hindsight, or watch live, to see how liquidity is taken, how price runs to the other extreme of the range, and how institutional order flow starts to deliver — with all down-close candles supporting price as it goes up and takes the old high out meaningfully.
Part 4 · Lesson 5

Where Setups Form — Responsibility & the Two Entry Patterns

The day the setup never formed, why that is evidence the model works rather than evidence it broke, and the two entry patterns drawn out as diagrams — plus the accountability lecture that had to come first.

This episode opens with a warning that it isn't the usual lesson: "if you don't have the proper mindset for this one, this could be taken out of context." It is delivered once, deliberately — "this is not going to be a repeating theme, I just want to let the foundation be laid here" — and then the model diagrams follow.

Where you actually are in the journey

Not trading. Not even demo trading.The mentorship is early, in the development stages. That means discovery: when you see the pattern, you go back through the data in your old charts and look for it. "You're looking for this pattern through back testing." Everything taught is under the guise of demo and paper trading — you can't make money on a demo, but you can't lose it either, which frees you to think about what you're doing without the tug of war of making and losing money.
The community tab is part of the mentorshipThe posts there are the other half of the channel — chart prompts, ideas to think about, occasional links. The morning's post asked readers to open the Nasdaq and e-mini S&P 15-minute charts, mark the relative equal highs on both, note that price had dropped into a discount overnight, and study how those highs get treated that day and on non-farm payroll Friday.
"Study this" is not "buy this"The post said you are studying this and I am watching this. "Pray tell, does this in any manner whatsoever suggest that any of you should be buying or selling this? No, it doesn't." The words are specific elements of study, not code words — put your attention here, watch, observe, see whether the characteristics repeat. "That's not trade advice, that's not investing advice — it's just practicing reading price action."

Why he won't trade live in front of anyone

He has been asked for years to run live sessions and take trades on camera, and has refused for one reason: somebody will copy something and push a button with live funds, lose money, and hand him the blame. The most he will do live is state a bias — "this is what I think is going to happen, it might go up to this level or down to that level" — and that is opinion and logic, not a trade idea.

Take accountability for your actions"I didn't reach through the screen… I didn't press your cell phone to get you into a trade." If you took the trade, the result is yours. And the same rule runs in the other direction: when students credit him for their profits, the answer is "wrong""the only thing I did was show you how to read price, I did not sit with you and push a button." If you did the back testing, the demoing, the track record, and chose your own moment, the success is yours and it's well deserved.
What earns a banComments are open on every mentorship video and he uses them to steer future lessons. You can disagree respectfully and the post stays. What gets removed: disrespect, comments meant to start a ruckus, and "here's the minute marker where he starts really teaching" timestamps — those take other viewers' attention away from the real lesson.

The day the setup didn't come

The idea he had drawn attention to: price drops into the fair value gap at the 9:30 equities open — the Judas swing — creates displacement, leaves a gap inside that displacement, and offers a long back into it, targeting the relative equal highs above. It's Thursday, ahead of non-farm payroll Friday, and those highs are the obvious draw.

Price did trade into the shaded area on the 15-minute — the candle stopped right at the old candle high — and then "the next candle just gave up the ghost." Run the checklist on it:

Traded below an old low, running sell stops?
Yes — the initial criterion was there
Displacement back above that old low?
No — on the 15-minute and the 5-minute alike
An energetic move leaving a fair value gap to buy into?
No — it consolidated, returned, and melted
Setup?
None. Two scenarios he'd have liked to see simply did not pan out
The model proved itself by keeping him out"This is actually a good lesson because it shows where I'm looking for something to form — but it doesn't form." No entry pattern meant no losing trade. If a model has valid, reasonable, sound logic behind it, it should prevent you from taking bad trades — not always, but sometimes, and especially when a big move goes the other way unseen. "It doesn't mean the model's broke. It just means the market did not provide the structure to allow this to form."
Anyone who bought that daywas not using what is taught here"they're just impulsively pushing a button." The logic that would have produced a losing trade was never utilised, because it never formed.

The exercise: draw it on a napkin

The question for your journal is a subtitle in itself — where do setups form? He runs this exercise with students constantly: could you draw the diagram out with a pen on a napkin and explain to a co-worker exactly what you're looking for in price?

Pattern one — the run on relative equal highs (bearish)

1
A level of relative equal highs; price approaches, corrects, approaches again
2
It finally runs through those highs — buy stops taken
3
At that moment you pan back through the price to the left and find the nearest short-term low — that is your trigger
4
Price must trade below that short-term low with displacement — an energetic move
5
Go back through that displacement leg and find the fair value gap — that's where you sell
The filter that removes the low-probability trades"It's not that it goes above the relative equal high and then goes down below that — that's not it, folks." You must see it take out the short-term low with displacement. Until it takes out that short-term low, there's nothing going on — there's no trade there, there's no setup there. The displacement leg is the foundation of the setup; only then do you look for the gap.

Pattern two — the old fair value gap above (bearish; reverse it for longs)

The market is below an old fair value gap and trading up toward it. You are bearish, but you expect it to reach that gap first.

Treat the gap's low like the relative equal highsIt doesn't have to completely close the gap — anywhere inside it will do. To keep it simple, use the low of the fair value gap and apply exactly the same logic you use for relative equal highs. Once price trades up through that level, go back through the leg for the trigger — the short-term low, the shift in market structure, the displacement — and then look for the fair value gap to enter on. "That way you don't have to worry about how far into it does it need to go. You don't need to know that."

Those are the two entry strategies for this model — there is nothing else to work out about what it should look like. If it doesn't feel simple, watch that part again, then go and find it in live data and in old back testing. "It's algorithmic, it repeats."

Losses, and the ones that don't cost money

The promise to write in your journalDate it today and write it out: "I promise that as long as I'm doing this, I'm going to endure losses." Endure — not be defeated by. Trading is all about managing losing trades: every trade starts underwater by the commission or the spread, so you have to trade your way out of it. "Every trader is a losing trader that finds success out of loss, or suffers ruin in it. That's the only two things that can happen."
A missed move is a loss tooMissing a move is a loss. A monetary loss is a loss. A losing demo trade is a loss. What you control is the mental impact — you can amplify it, or ask what can I take from this so it never hurts this much again, because it will repeat. Condition yourself so that when the knocks come you can say I've been here before, and they don't derail you. Woulda-coulda-shoulda "doesn't make you money and doesn't take any more money out of your pocket, so don't do it — it's toxic thinking."
What consistency actually isTraders who are consistently profitable are not lucky and they're not stupid — they have a logic they adhere to and rules they trade with. Deviate from the rule-based strategy and it's reasonable to expect ruin or loss, and those are the most painful moments, because you can look back and say this is not what I should have done.
It isn't Netflix and chillWhen a video says pause here and study it before it's revealed, the people who joke that they won't pause will not learn this — it shows a trait that isn't conducive to the business. "It's ICT and study your ass off." The promise attached: not that you'll copy his results, but that "you're going to learn how to read price better than you ever imagined."
And the release attached to the promise"It's up to you to go through the charts, see if it fits you. If it doesn't fit you, folks, there's a lot of other ways to trade. There's lots of ways to trade — you don't need to trade my way."
Part 4 · Lesson 6

Daily Rebalance Theory — Rebalancing the Previous Day's Range

The seasonal backdrop, the last three days of open-high-low-close, what to do when there is no fair value gap in them, and a full strip-down from the daily chart to the two-minute entry inside a candle that looked indecisive.

The chart is the e-mini S&P June 2022 contract on the daily, and the opening instruction is blunt: everything taught here works in forex. It is not limited to index futures — the questions in the comments are already answered in the earlier videos. "Don't start here — go back to the very first one."

What the model actually isOrder blocks were introduced in the free Scout Sniper series, and they are not the secret sauce. The fair value gap is what you're being taught to focus on — that small area of price action is the easiest thing for a brand-new trader to sit down and understand right away, which is exactly what this mentorship was designed around.

The backdrop that was called in advance

Weeks earlier the bearish order block was marked, and the high of that candle was named the most unlikely level to be traded to — price should not go up to and through it. From there the expectation was a draw down into successive levels, the last being the relative equal lows where sell-side liquidity rests.

Seasonal tendencySeasonal tendencies are times of year where markets or asset classes historically move a certain way — usually, not always, never guaranteed. The analogy: living in Maryland, would you expect snow on the 4th of July? No — sunny and hot is what's likely. From about the last week of April into the month of May, the S&P, Nasdaq, Dow and Russell tend to be weak. By itself that means little; in the hands of someone initiated with this material it is a road map to consistency.

So the sequence on the daily reads cleanly: relative equal highs are run — smart money selling into those buy stops while entering a bearish seasonal window — then the decline down to attack the sell stops beneath the old lows. They sold high and now have to buy it back cheaper, and the sell-side pool below is where that happens.

Why sell stops sit there at allTraders run models that want to capture these moves and expect an old high to be taken out before they start trailing — large fund traders, not "retail Rick on MT4." Retail stops often sit in the same place, but small speculators' liquidity is minute, tiny, irrelevant; the pools that matter are the large ones. The low itself is known to everyone the moment the day closes — what's different here is treating the liquidity resting below it as the target.

Daily rebalance theory

This traces back to something taught on Baby Pips in 2010: study the last three days — the open, the high, the low and the close. It was a laboratory experiment to see whether anyone would find what he had found. Nobody arrived at the fair value gap.

The routineLook back over the last three days and ask: is there a fair value gap in them? On this occasion there wasn't. But Monday opened, extended down and closed near its low — a large-range day. When there's no gap to work with, go back to the previous day's low (Friday's, in this case). That level becomes the place a retracement can reach to rebalance the entire down move.
What the rebalance does to peopleWhen price returns to that level it tricks people into thinking the low is in and it's going to keep going up. All it has actually done is go up to a logical level on the daily timeframe that rebalances Monday's sell-off. Indicator followers are seeing oversold and hunting bullish divergence; breakout traders are reading it as resistance-turned-support.
Don't try to pick the bottomPrice was below the relative equal lows and below the swing low — a deep discount — and the bias had been publicly bearish throughout. "We don't try to pick bottoms. We don't try to call the long-term lows while markets are bearish." On this he is unusually direct: "I have lost more money trying to do that than any other thing." Even a lucky buy at the low is unlikely to be held. There's a lot of meat in between the major turning points, and you can afford to be wrong at the end — when you're wrong it will be obvious.

Which liquidity gets taken first

The order matters, and it validates the biasPrice ran above the buy-side liquidity first, at 9:30, without the low below having been taken. That is bearish — it's inside the context of the bias. If instead it had gone down and taken the previous low out and then rallied up here, that is not bearish. A bearish bias says the market goes up to a premium to run old highs and take buy-side liquidity so smart money can counterparty those buy stops, then seeks the cheaper sell-side liquidity to offset into.

Midnight, 8:30 and 9:30

Midnight New York
Where the new day begins. "This is how the algorithm works — it operates on New York time." Wellington does not start the 24-hour cycle; claiming otherwise is how you know someone doesn't know what they're talking about
8:30am
The news embargo lifts — the algorithm can start seeking liquidity from that time. Use that candle's opening price and draw it forward
9:30am
The equities open — the manipulation, the Judas swing, the fake rally that looks like a breakout and generally does the opposite

On the daily, Tuesday printed a big wick up, a small wick down and a tiny body — the sort of candle that gets called mixed or indecisive. "No. No no no no." Break it into hours and it's the opposite of indecisive: an opening price at midnight, a rally, a decline, and a close back near the open — with relative equal highs above and an old low below, and the run taking that buy side at 9:30 on the way to Friday's low.

Power of three inside the indecisive candleAccumulation at the 8:30 opening price, the rally above it to create the high — manipulation — then the pattern taught in the mentorship: fair value gap, market structure shift, displacement, and distribution to the downside into a discount array. "You have to understand what you're looking at relative to time and price — when you do that, it takes away all that confusion."

Stripping down the timeframes

The displacement leg is the price swing that broke through several short-term lows on the way down. Shade that swing while you're learning, then descend through the timeframes looking for the gap inside it.

5-minute
The displacement leg identified and shaded
4-minute
No fair value gap
3-minute
No fair value gap — nothing to do yet
2-minute
"Lo and behold, the unicorn" — a small imbalance, with a short-term low taken out
The hard-line rule: never sell in a discountPut the fib on the high and low of the displacement swing. Equilibrium — 50% — came in at 4044.5. An earlier-looking gap sat below that level, and taking it would have broken the rules: you have to be at 4044.5 or higher to be in a premium. "That's a hard-line rule — if you just follow that, it will keep you out of so many ill-fated scenarios." Not 100%, because there is no secret recipe: "if I had it, I wouldn't give it to you. It doesn't exist and I don't have it."

Stops, and the risk you have to leave open

Minimum stop
One or two ticks above the candle that creates the fair value gap — on this trade it was never hit
Ample stop
Above the swing high — a lot of movement, so size down
If that stop is too big
Trade micros$5 per handle versus $50 on a mini. If you can't weather it even on a micro, you are under-capitalised and not prepared to trade
When to move the stop
Only after a larger shift in structure — when the next low down is taken out. Then it can come down to the area above that broken structure
What filters people out of this industryYou cannot open the trade, watch it move your way, and then trail your stop-loss real tight. You have to hold with a certain measure of risk open. Two failure modes: rushing out of a marginally profitable trade because you're used to seeing them turn against you, or strangling the position with a stop so tight it never gets to breathe. And if it does stop out — who cares? Think about how often this pattern forms: somewhere every single day, in the London session, on the overnight highs and lows, or in New York.
Why New York, and what about AsiaNew York is taught because you have the advantage of knowing what took place in London. It works in London too. In Asia, not that often — if that is the only session you can trade, look for this pattern on the 1- to 5-minute charts in the yen pairs, the New Zealand dollar and the Australian dollar, which have more movement then because that's when their markets start. "That's as far as I'm going to go with it" — it remains one of the most illiquid times.

How the day finished

The whole model in sequence: the setup identified, the move back up to rebalance Monday's range at Friday's low, the level hit, and the pattern forming at the expected time elements. Smart money sells short there, adds to it at the next area, and the decline pairs up with the sell-side liquidity below. A limit order would have been filled during the lunch hour.

The one thing that didn't line upHe wanted that push down through the level at or just ahead of 12 o'clock; it came about 27 minutes later. That is the only complaint about the day.
The dividing statementThe algorithm goes up there whether there is sufficient volume or not. Not because people bought it, not because smart traders coordinated buying pressure. "These markets are controlled, they're rigged and they're algorithmically driven." This is where people whose systems rest on other explanations stop being able to follow the argument.

The invitation, and the timeline

One pattern, one setupThe private group is so rich with material that students can't settle — "like a kid in a candy store" — and so never fully engage with one approach. What works is what he trains them to do: take the one thing that makes sense, one pattern, one setup, applied with the time and price theories, and submit to it. He can strip any of it — breakers, mitigation blocks, a stop run on buy stops — down to a simple model the same way.
Six monthsThree months of serious daily study and back testing, then two or three months of forward testing. After six months with just what's been taught here, "I am absolutely confident that you will have found your model" — simple, rule-based, visually recognisable, tied to a specific time pattern so you're in sync with what the algorithm is going to do. This version was deliberately simplified with the expectation his daughter would learn it: when to expect it, when it forms, where it should be, and what to do once it forms.
Don't dilute itYou don't need to buy anyone's courses or subscriptions. And if you're bolting on Bollinger Bands and garbage like that, you're not using the model and you won't get the results otherwise available. Do what's taught, avoid what you're told to avoid. Losing trades still come — "expect to lose money if you're going to trade with live money" — but you'll understand why you were wrong, and know more specifically the times and locations where these formations are likely to be successful. That is not a promise of profitability or a win rate.
And it may simply not fit youAt the end of the six months, "you will decide at that moment if this is something that fits you. If it doesn't fit you there's no harm in that… I have people that paid me that said 'I just can't make this work for me', and I have other people that are killing it. What's the difference? Personality and capacity."
Part 5 · Lesson 1

Tape Reading Practice — Trading Against the Daily Bias

A live long taken against the daily bias once the sell side had already been taken: the draw on liquidity that justifies it, order blocks annotated in real time, pyramiding into six contracts, and a stop that is deliberately not rushed.

This one is framed as "a quick little ditty on institutional order flow" — a practice run in reading the tape rather than a new pattern. The position is a long taken against the daily bias, and the whole lesson is the reasoning that makes that acceptable.

Why a counter-bias long is on the tableTwo things had already happened: the sell stops / sell-side liquidity had been taken, and price had already traded into a fair value gap around the 4000 level. With the downside objective met, the working idea is that price could run up and take the buy stops above the high of the day"it doesn't need to do that to be profitable."

Draw on liquidity, and the target you actually need

The first job is to draw the buy-side and sell-side liquidity pools and let the framework explain the entry. The market had dropped below relative equal lows"I bought those sell stops" — so the sell side is taken and dimmed on the chart, leaving the live levels in colour.

Best case
Expansion up to 4051 and a quarter, taking out the high of the day
What's actually needed
The nearer buy-side liquidity above the short-term high — where the bulk of the position comes off
How it comes off
Four of the contracts at market once price runs above that high
Where to put your attention"Try not to worry about that profit and loss — that's the distraction. Pay attention to the price." The demo position is only on the screen because a lot of people like to see it; if you are practising order flow and tape reading, you don't have to put a position on at all.

What retail is seeing at the same moment

The bear flagPrice dipped inside the fair value gap to the left and then went below to take the relative equal lows. Retail sees that as a bear flag and is thinking lower prices — "I'm not." Later in the move the same thing happens again: traders sell short off the rebalanced 8:30 imbalance because imbalances have "gotten real popular lately", and the stated position is "I'm going against that and I'm targeting them."

Order blocks, drawn as they happen

The additions are made on order blocks marked live on the chart, not after the fact — "you saw it happen, I've outlined it, gave you the logic."

How the block is pickedWhere there are two down-close candles, the annotation is anchored to the higher of the two, using its opening price as the level being watched. Price can drop into it, pick up momentum from there, and then the algorithm will likely reprice higher to the buy-side liquidity around the 4036 level. It might only touch the higher wick of those two candles — or not touch it at all.
A drawing tip in passingHold shift while dragging a trend line in TradingView and it straightens automatically.

Managing the stop

With six contracts long after the additions, the stop moves up just a little, underneath the low — "it should not trade back down into that; if it does I'm wrong, and that's fine."

Why that level
It sits inside the lower end of the fair value gap and at the old short-term high around 9:30 — so market structure supports the idea
What has already happened
Sell-side liquidity is out and price is back inside the range between the stop and the short-term high marked for buy side
Pace
"Notice I'm not in a hurry to rush my stop-loss up." Break-even comes only once price has expanded away
The supporting evidence for the counter-bias tradeEven trading against the daily bias, the fact that price had traded down three times intraday and taken out yesterday's low — and then showed a lack of follow-through — bolsters the case. That is what triggers the decision to add two more contracts on the order block.

Reading the delivery

The confirmation being looked for is behavioural, not indicator-based: price driving higher in big candles, with speed of delivery toward the level. A large green candle gets its own nickname — a "caffeine bar""if I'm bullish I want to see that; if I'm bearish I see it, I don't like it." As the move develops, the down-close candles are supporting price and we're seeing expansion: exactly what the premise predicted.

The standard being set"This is me just making sure you understand that I see this before it happens." The calls are made not speaking in wafflesvery specific, nothing ambiguous being hinted at. The point of narrating it live is so you can see what is being internalised: what is seen, and what is likely to pan out.

How it finished

Entry 1
The fair value gap / sell-stop buy
Entry 2
The order block add, taking the position to six
Exit 1
Four contracts sold at market above the buy-side liquidity
Exit 2
The raised stop tripped out the final two

The 4051 and a quarter level was left to the market — "it doesn't need to at this point" — with over five thousand hypothetical dollars booked reading order flow, and the fulfilled liquidity level recoloured on the chart.

Part 5 · Lesson 2

Counter-Trend Ideas — And Back Testing as Pseudo-Experience

Framing the same fair value gap model inside a counter-trend idea: relative equal highs as the draw, the afternoon retracement into discount, the 1:30 seek for liquidity — then the study method that turns annotated hindsight into experience your brain treats as real.

The chart is the Nasdaq June 2022 daily, on Friday the 13th. The week had declined hard and Friday put in a retracement. Posted on the channel that morning: the 12,553 level is "too clean" — one candle's high is 12,547, the next 12,553, and those relative equal highs are the draw on liquidity.

The draw doesn't have to be reachedThe draw on liquidity does not need to be traded to for the framework to be profitable. If you are below the objective and you think the market will draw up to it — today or next week — you look for a setup that lets you participate in the expansion towards it. Think of the level as "a big magnet drawing price up towards it."

Reading down the timeframes

Daily
Relative equal highs at 12,553 — the objective
Hourly
A low swept below the relative equal lows, price back above them, one more attempt lower rejected. Sell side is taken; the obvious remaining pool is the buy stops above. Little imbalance left in between — that area is already rebalanced
15-minute
9:30 manipulation: the overnight London low is taken out, then the rally. No trades were taken in it — "I was not available during this time"

The afternoon setup

Power of three on the day: the consolidation drops down to create the low of the dayaccumulating long positions, manipulating early longs out and taking the overnight stops — then rallies. The retracement that follows is what the trade is built on.

9:30
New York open — the low of the day is created
12:10
The high — lunch time, which usually creates a retracement or consolidation
1:30
The algorithm starts seeking liquidity. If it is going to continue higher, it seeks sell side first
2:00–2:25
Price drops into equilibrium, then below it into the fair value gap
After 2:25
Displacement — the shift in market structure back up
Sell side is not enough — it has to be a discountThere were relative equal lows sitting below, but they were not in a discount of the day's range. The dashed purple line is equilibrium — the same thing as putting the fib on the low and high and taking 50%. The buy is inside the fair value gap because it is at or below equilibrium between that low and that high.
Why a bullish retracement was expected at allThe displacement is counter-trend to the higher timeframe. The logic: the market has been down a long time, and most people want to be out over the weekend — so the algorithm starts squeezing them to get their positions squared before the Friday close.

Descending to the entry

4-minute
Only a small gap — "I'm not looking at that"
3-minute
A gap exists, and "that would be fine if that's what you were looking for"
2-minute
Down-close candles = the order block, with the fair value gap above it. Price trades down into it — the entry
Buying through the gap, not at one price36 contracts were bought — at the beginning of the fair value gap and about the middle of it, with attempts at the lower portion that never filled because price didn't get down there. The assumption is a discount broker with low margins; these are paper trades, illustrating execution and theory, stated for compliance.

The execution errors — and why they happened

Don't trade off your phone"I made a mistake today." The 20-contract close was meant to be a limit order above 12,430 and ended up going in as a market order. The causes are all admitted plainly: working in TradingView rather than a live platform, and doing it on a phone while out doing other things"this is the reason why you don't want to be trading off of your phone." He can manage a position on a phone but does not normally enter trades on one.

Ten contracts came off after the rally out of the order block, the mistimed twenty went next, then more, and a final single contract was held late in the day in case of a parabolic run into 12,553 — "this wasn't in the cards today." None of the closures were above the 12,430 level being aimed for.

Where this fits in the modelYou can frame what is being taught inside a counter-trend model if you are a contrarian by nature. But if you want the highest probability and to be in sync with the early session move, trade exactly as outlined around the 8:30 to 9:30 window. The freedom is offered deliberately — "to try to make it your own" — on one condition: fair value gaps are useful if you know what the bias is.

On still struggling with bias

The honest answer"You're not going to watch a dozen of my videos and come away now I know exactly how to do bias." The fix is to go into the charts and study each day. Back testing means going back and looking at moves like this and marking them up — either with the replay button, watching them paint partially, or in hindsight. Both count.

Back testing that trains the subconscious

The second half of the episode is a study method, taught from personal experience: the coping skills learned for generalised anxiety and agoraphobia after 2001 turned out to work on students too. The mechanism is positive self-talk placed inside the back testing.

The methodAnnotate the old move as richly as you can. Then, in the empty space on the chart, write commentary in your own words, in the first person, as though you saw it coming: you expected the drop into the level, you wanted the displacement, it came back and allowed the long, you scaled a premium profit above halfway. Screen-capture it and store or print it in your journal, then re-read those journals at the end of the week.
Why it works — and the objection answered head-onHe states the objection himself: "you're telling people to lie to themselves." "I'm being honest — you are lying in the chart when you do your annotations for study purposes. You're tricking your brain." Your subconscious retains the image and the words, so when you see it live it remembers having done it before when technically you really didn'tpseudo-experience. The comparison given is the reticular activating system: buy a car and suddenly everyone seems to have bought the same one, because it has become meaningful to you. Charts take on that same characteristic when you put your personality and interest into them.
No timetable"You're going to develop at your own pace and arrive at full understanding right on time." A couple of weeks for some, a year or longer for others — it depends on what you pour into it.

The account, and why it is shown

Proof of conceptThe demo account is shown going from $100,000 to about $354,000 since the 6th of the monthwith red in it: two back-to-back losing trades. It is shown to answer the claim that rented MT4 servers were behind the old Twitter posts — "I don't need that folks." The data is live with no delay. The stated limit is explicit: "just because I'm doing it with a demo account doesn't mean that you're going to be able to go out there and do it too with a live account. The only thing I'm showing you here is I understand what I'm doing."
Why his fluency isn't transferable as-isSeeing it before it happens is proof of concept and proof of understanding — but the asymmetry is stated outright: "I'm the author of this algorithm, so I can operate in it very efficiently. You, as a student of mine, you have to understand my language first — and then you go into the charts and you study with that language."
Part 5 · Lesson 3

Narrow Range Days, SMT Divergence & Close-Proximity Entries

The day before the Fed chair speaks is a small-range day. Trading one anyway: why the short never qualified, how divergence between the S&P and Nasdaq picked the instrument, and what to do when you fumble the ideal entry.

Monday 16 May 2022, and the reference point is unchanged: 12,553 and a quarter — the relative equal highs on Nasdaq — still the draw on liquidity behind a bullish bias. The S&P had a daily swing low much like the Nasdaq; it had no relative equal highs of its own, but the bias was judged warranted at least for the beginning of the week.

Why the day was lethargicTomorrow brings retail sales at 8:30am and the Fed chairman speaking at 2:00pm New York time. The day before Fed chair Powell speaks is usually a very quiet, small-range day — that is why the market was lethargic. "It doesn't mean you can't trade it, obviously, but it takes a little bit more experience." It is important to know when volatility is likely to occur and when it is likely to shrink up.
And the day itselfThe closing instruction is blunt: "Tomorrow's going to be very volatile. Be careful, do not try to trade tomorrow — you'll probably hurt yourself if you do. Or don't listen to me and learn the lesson the hard way."

Why there was no short — even though it looked like one

Work starts straight on the one-minute chart, because the bias is already bullish. At 9:30 the market takes out a short-term high and declines — and that decline is deliberately left alone.

The disqualifying detailThere was a rally, a broken short-term low, a fair value gap traded into, and a breakdown — "big deal." It doesn't fit the criteria: the displacement leg would require a fair value gap above 50% of that leg's high and low, and there isn't one. With no qualifying pattern and a bullish bias, nothing there fits the model for a short.

SMT — letting the two indices pick the instrument

Both markets dropped to relative equal lows and retraced. But then Nasdaq made a lower low than its 10 o'clock low, while the S&P refused to go below the low it made at 10 o'clock. That refusal is the signal.

Smart money technique / smart money tool"No indicators, folks — I'm using inter-market relationships." That divergence between two closely correlated markets is what he dubs SMT. With a bullish bias already in place, the market that resisted going lower is the stronger one — and every execution that day was in the S&P; there were no Nasdaq trades at all, despite having originally gone in looking for a Nasdaq trade.

Close-proximity entries

The sequence that was traded: a run on sell stops, a rally, a short-term shift in market structure, then a retrace back down into the fair value gap. The entry, though, was not clean — the recording software had to be restarted "and the whole time this candle was doing its business."

The rule for a missed entryIf you miss the ideal entry — you fumble the order, something happens — getting in really close to it is acceptable: a close proximity entry. The condition is that you get close to the fair value gap without price running too far away from it. On this move the market gave eight candles of opportunity to get in, either inside the gap or in close proximity to it.
First fill
3994.50 — the candle's low was 3993.25, so 1.25 handles against. ICT talks himself down to "less than one handle of heat" mid-sentence; the two prices he prints beside it give 1.25
Second fill — the add
3996.25, the limit order that filled once the highs were taken out and a small fair value gap formed. Price went to 3994.50 — seven ticks (one and three quarter handles) against — before running in his favour
Exit
The whole position off at 4022.50"I did not get the highest high, I was a little disappointed in that regard"
What the first entry actually wasThe 3994.50 fill was not entering in the fair value gap — it was in close proximity to it. That is the one the software fumble cost him, which is why the close-proximity rule is attached to it: "very, very, very tight placement" on the candle he could still get. The underlying idea being traded stays the same: price was going down there in order to go higher, retracing into the gap to go higher.

Where the second market structure shift came in

As the market started to rally, the highs being taken out gave one more indication that market structure had shifted bullish again — which is where the add was made, into the small fair value gap that formed off it.

Proof of concept, and the limits of it

Putting the MT4 question to bedThe session is explicitly the last word on the "rented MT4 servers" claim — "I'm never going to bring the topic up again." The account is live data, no replay button, orders entering and filling on camera: "you can't fake what I'm doing." A side note on the watermark: TradingView doesn't add it — it is a Camtasia text callout added when editing, so the chart is blank while recording.
The disclaimer, in his own words"I'm open about paper trading because it's compliance — I'm not legally allowed to give you trade advice." You cannot make or lose money with paper trades. He calls himself "the demo baller" and championed the meme on purpose: "I'm not promising you profitability… you're not going to be able to replicate this. You're not." What is being demonstrated is narrower than it looks: "I know how to read these candlesticks. I know what they're likely to do most of the time before they do it — not all the time. I take losing trades."
The takeaway he wants leftYou can learn to read it before it happens. The things being taught are rooted on sound logic — not randomness, not retail logic — they are algorithmic, and the day is offered as a testimony to that.
Part 5 · Lesson 4

PM Session Trading — Sweeping the Lunch Lows on a Fed Day

A bottom-up review of the afternoon the Fed chairman spoke: the Judas swing that missed the morning high by one tick, the lunch lows swept before the real move, the 3 o'clock spool into the target — and a sell-off the model deliberately gave no setup on.

The chairman spoke at two o'clock in the afternoon. The review is run deliberately backwards — starting on the one-minute chart and working out to higher timeframes"kind of like a bottom-up analysis."

The Judas point, one tick short

Falling short on purposeAhead of the 2pm session the market printed a Judas point that fell one tick short of the morning high: the morning high was 12,535.75 and the afternoon run reached 12,535.50a quarter of a point, one tick, short. It ran up after clearing relative equal highs and then broke lower — and there was no model short in there.

The lunch lows

The market then dropped below relative equal lows — and those lows have a specific identity: they are the lows made during the New York lunch hour, noon to one.

The PM session ruleMany times when there is an afternoon continuation to the upside, the lows at lunch time will get swept first. That is exactly what happened here, and price dug deeper still, down into an imbalance sitting below those relative equal lows.

What that manipulation does to everyone in the market

The annotation made live on the chart was that long holders were "raked across the coals" — not permitted to profit on the run to 12,553.25. The move starts off looking like it will reach the level everyone was watching, falls short of it, and breaks down.

Breakout buyers
Buy stops are triggered — bull-flag and breakout traders get long, then get taken against
Those without stops
Get squeezed out — they can't take it any more and bail below the relative equal lows
Morning longs
Had trailed their stops below the lunch lows, so the sweep takes them out — "they don't want them being able to profit on the real move"
New shorts
Are about to be squeezed as it rips higher into the target
The internal dialogue exerciseHe narrates it from the other side: someone short from around 12,530 with their stop just above"would you feel safe? Certainly you would feel safe. But watch how that changes." Then it starts running.

The entry, and the one that got away

A poor fill, honestly labelled"I got one off as far as a long, and a really poor entry." The fill was around 12,417.75, just below the 20 level — taken because the priority was simply being below those relative equal lows, with the stop set beneath. The intended entry was in the earlier imbalance and it was missed"I wasn't quick enough on the draw."

The correction offered on the chart at the time matters as much as the fill: that area was annotated as not resistance"don't look at it like that… it's going to lift off from here." Price went down to an order block and started rallying.

How the afternoon delivered

Into the order block
Traded into it multiple times, with the fair value gap above allowed for even though it wasn't reached
3:00pm
The algorithms start to spool price in the direction of the liquidity — the 12,553.25 level
Just below target
A consolidation right below it, then the pump up into and above the level
Result
A little over five thousand dollars of hypothetical profit on the paper trade

The most important part: the setup that never came

When the market isn't going to deliver, the pattern doesn't appearOut on the five-minute, the afternoon sell-off is plainly visible — and the model gave no setup in it. It didn't run buy side; it sold off; it did not give a setup. "It's important to notice that." The answer to "what happens if I take a trade and it's wrong" is partly this: when the market is really in sync, these algorithmic principles will not appear in markets that are not likely to deliver. The caveat is stated in the same breath — "it's not a fantasy; it means it's not going to work all the time." The market can sell off without offering a setup, and then create the real move in the other direction where the fair value gap formations do appear.

Working back out through the timeframes

1-minute
The sweep of the lunch lows into the imbalance, the order block, the rally
5-minute
The bump just below the morning high, then the break down — liquidity resting above was treating retail as if that level were trustworthy resistance
15-minute
An imbalance traded down into — an optimal trade entry, aiming at the same 12,553.25 liquidity
Hourly
The area flagged a week or so earlier on the channel's community tab, now pressed into
Daily
The relative equal highs that were the daily bias all along — "this is the run that I liked, and this is the one that was the hunt"
What comes next on the upsideReaching that level is not a call for a high to go lower. The area above is sloppy, so the next one worth anticipating and studying is the high at 12,624 even. A further area beyond it exists if price really runs, but "I'm not going so far as to say that for right now."
The rule this day was built onIt is a little bit of an advanced idea, but it comes straight out of what has already been taught about PM / afternoon session trading: if you're bullish and it consolidates in lunch, find the lunch lows, wait for it to run them out, and then they'll resume.
Part 5 · Lesson 5

The Scout and the Sniper — Entering on a Swing High in the Gap

Why pointing at a level is not calling a trade, what the May 16th low was really being flagged as, and a midday short taken the moment a swing high closed inside a five-minute fair value gap.
Before anything else"I do not use WhatsApp. I'm not going to be in the comments section asking you to reach out to me… I'm never going to ask you for money, I'm not going to direct message you" — on YouTube or Twitter. Any account doing that is a scammer pretending to be him. Report them and ignore them. "You're here to eat off my table for free and I'm happy to do it."

Why the examples are index futures, not forex

Follow the volatilityThe complaint that there is too little forex is acknowledged — even the paid membership group has seen very little forex. The reason is deliberate: this asset class is where the volatility is right now. "Price is price, it doesn't make a difference." When forex starts moving big again, index futures will get slower and quieter by comparison, and the currency markets will probably start having some pretty wild movement within the next 12 months or so. Until then: look for volatility where you can find it — and learn from it, because it works the same way in forex. That morning he was long dollar CAD off the 8:30 impact news — "a snooze fest" that took forever to move.

Scout and sniper — what a "call" actually is

Answering a critic who said the bar had been lowered for calling out trades: "I don't call out trades. I'm not going to put you in a trade, I'm not going to give you an entry, a stop, a target." What he does instead is point to where the market is going to go.

The analogyAttention was drawn that morning to the low of 16 May 2022 while price was well above it. The question posed back to the audience: am I saying it should not come back down here? No — "my style is we're aiming for liquidity." Pointing down there means "I'm acting like a scout; you're the sniper in training." The scout shows you where to aim — you do the work of scoping it up and pulling the trigger.
No hand-holding, paid or freeThere will never be a session where "everybody, are you ready — we're all going to buy right now, all put our stop-loss in the same place, all put our exit in the same place." "I never promised to do that… it does not work for lazy people." He didn't do it when people paid him and he won't do it for free. The entry, the stop and the limit orders have already been taught — the missing piece is the experience of knowing where price is likely to go next.
Don't wait only for the openSome students are fixated on only looking for the setup at the opening. If you don't get a trade at the open — can't you use a fair value gap? You have to get involved with the move if it is going to travel down to something like this. "That's what I did today."

Building the trade down the timeframes

Daily
The draw is the low of 16 May 2022, below current price
15-minute
The up-close candle right before the move lower is the bearish order block — drawn out in time, and price comes back and hits it
5-minute
The fair value gap inside that area — "doesn't look like a fair value gap until you zoom in". Price hits it, overshooting it, granted — but there is a lot of volatility right now
The trigger: a swing high inside the gapThree candles form a swing high in the gap. "As soon as this candle closed, I'm going to go right here at this candle and just get in and go short" — trusting three things that are already true: there was a fair value gap, price already went through it, and there is a swing high, and it's bearish. The objective is stated at the same moment: a run below the old low of 16 May.
Position
Four contracts at 4007.75
Stop
Above the high of the candle"everything is reduced in terms of risk"
Hold rule
Hold the position until it starts to break lower, then manage
Why bother with the trail
Volatility was extreme and late afternoon it could easily have whipped up; there was no time to babysit it
Moving the stop, and what that is notOnce price broke lower and moved aggressively in his favour the stop was moved — only because volatility is so high and "I just don't want to see it come back and knock me out. That's not fear — that's just sound money management. I'm not trying to take a losing trade."

How the rest of the day walked down

Partials came off on the way, one via a limit order that filled on camera. From there the day repeats one shape over and over:

Into lunch
Sideways drift, then the typical New York lunch-time consolidation — with stops taken ahead of lunch
Then
Break lower → consolidation → trade lower → consolidation that bumps into stops → sell-off
Finally
Sell side taken, one more consolidation, and the low of the day — a close at 3910
The tone of the walkthroughHe narrates the repetition with the objection built in — "oh this ICT just makes it so complicated" — while the same three-step sequence delivers the whole decline. "It's almost like it knows what it wants to do, huh." He did not participate in the afternoon session after New York lunch.
Part 5 · Lesson 6

Consolidation Days — The Middle of the Range and the 3 O'Clock Setup

How an outside day that falls short of an old low sets up a choppy session, why the middle of the daily range is the magnet, and the one specific window — three to four o'clock — where the day's only real setup was called in advance.

The whole day was narrated live on Twitter — "I literally took them through every minor fluctuation" — and the trade was outlined in detail, with reasons, way before it happened. Everything is time and date stamped; nothing is edited or deleted, spelling errors included.

The outside day, and what it forecasts

Outside day
A day that trades higher than the previous day's high and lower than the previous day's low — the whole range sits outside yesterday's
This one
An outside day that closed down
The tell that produces a choppy dayThe favourable version is trading down to an old low and running through it. When instead price trades down to that old low and falls short of it — the setup people read as a double bottom, and it feels safeit tends to be a choppy day, especially after an outside day with a down close. Here the untraded old daily low was 3855, and price stopped at 3856 — one handle short.

The morning: opportunities that never come to fruition

Price traded up into an imbalance, worked lower, made a small fair value gap, bumped into it and traded lower — and none of it was a short. The market "many times can present opportunities that look like they're likely to form a setup but it really doesn't come to fruition."

Why the middle is 50/50As price traded around that area it was called a 50/50 probability — as likely to go higher as lower. That is not a general disclaimer: it statistically moves to 50/50 when you start trading back into the middle of the range. The one tradable thing in the morning — up into the imbalance, down to a short-term low — worked, but after it the session became short-term lows taken, highs taken, back and forth: "really ugly type of price action."
Judge each idea by its own dealing rangeThe stated longer-term bias still favoured 3855 for sell side"I don't think that they're done with it down there" — but every trade idea has to be taken based on its current dealing range, which is measured from this high down to that low. The nearer objective called repeatedly was 3933.25, and price ran right up into it, clearing the relative equal highs.

What a consolidation day is

The definition and the clockOn a consolidation day the market creates an initial range and then stays in that range until the afternoon at three o'clock. "It used to be the bond close that started this whole thing, but now it's just three o'clock to four o'clock when equities close" — the closing bell that sets the tone for on-close orders.
Why the chop is so expensiveRanges like that are very difficult to trade — they can come back on you, stop you out, and then go nowhere for a long period of time. The advice for anyone getting chewed up in one: wait until three o'clock.

The setup, called in advance

The instruction given on Twitter was literally to draw vertical lines at 3:00 and 4:00 New York time — that window is where the setup would form — and to study the middle of the daily range.

Step 1
Run up to take the buy stops above the relative equal highs
Who that hurts
Shorts who trailed their stop-loss down get squeezed out — the highs were bumped shallowly once, then rammed properly to clear them out
Who that recruits
Traders induced into thinking it will go higher, reading the run as a breakout — which builds sell-side liquidity below the lows as they protect those new longs
Step 2
The reversal back down into the middle of the range
Why the buy stops matter mechanicallyThe buy orders resting above are protective stops on short positions. When price trades above them they become "a rushing liquidity wave of willing buyers at the market" — which is exactly what smart money needs to sell into at the close.
Finding the midpointTake the low of the day and the high of the day from around 9:30 and split it in the middle — that is the midpoint the market wants to gravitate back to. Many times between three and four o'clock the algorithm goes outside the bounds of the daily range, trades up into it, and then rams it back down.

The execution

On the one-minute the market rallies above, bumps into the buy-side liquidity, and smart money uses that to go short. The checklist runs in order: is that a swing? yes. Is there a fair value gap? yes. Does it trade back up into that range? yes. Then it works lower, back into the middle of the range.

Entry
Short at 3940.75
First scale
Four contracts off at 3908.75 — the middle of the range
Runner
Position left on with a limit order at 3855"it doesn't matter if it goes down there now, I don't care, but I have a position in play should it do so"
What the day did to everyone elseOn these afternoons nobody is really allowed to make any money: those long into the run get punished, those short get knocked out at their stop and left with a loss — and most of the time traders are too afraid to go short into that high, which is precisely where the setup is.

Around the trade

Reading the tape versus crunching numbersPlenty of people won't put the work in because it seems too hard"give me a MACD, give me a stochastic, a moving average, and we'll call it a day." The objection to them is specific: they don't give you logic and narrative, they just give you a crunching of the numbers. That is beating up the data of price action versus reading and understanding what the tape is.
A live account, not a demoHis son was sitting beside him executing in a live AMP account linked through TradingView, while the tweets were being written and the reasoning explained out loud. That account went from $6,000 at the start of the week to over $10,000real, live money — including one or two hairy moments and a losing trade that was recouped.
A squawk box, not a signal serviceThe Twitter Spaces feature is floated as a possible "ICT squawk box" — talking out loud about what he is looking at. The boundary is restated immediately: it is not a trade setup or a signal service, "because that's not what I do."
Part 5 · Lesson 7

Waiting for the Level to Break — Confluence, Not Support and Resistance

Why nothing was traded until one specific level gave way, why a broken low is only tradable when a gap sits with it, and what "it didn't reach a premium" really means when the market is in a hurry to reach the week's objective.

The week's final review, and the market finally made a run below the 12 May 2022 low. On the hourly the day consolidated, ran up — taking the stop on the final balance of the paper trade from the previous session — moved into a deeper fair value gap that created the high of the day, and then broke down below 3915.25.

The turning point he required"I didn't want to do anything prior to this run." Through the whole morning commentary the position was the same: not interested in anything until that low was taken out. Price was being given the chance to show a willingness to come up and run the highs instead — that could easily have happened. It didn't; 3915.25 broke, and only then was there a trade.
Why that level, and not any short-term lowThe question is answered before it's asked: "you could have, if you want to be ultra aggressive." He wasn't willing to be, because there is a lot of volatility in these markets right now"I want to know that I know." Above 3915.25 the 15-minute is simply consolidated, and he doesn't want to catch a break below a short-term low only to see relative equal highs get run.

The rule that separates this from break-and-retest

The gap is the trade, not the levelThe entries all occur at old lows where sell side was resting — but the mechanism is a fair value gap after a run below, not a broken support turning into resistance. "Listen, folks — listen. Not go back to the old low broken and act as resistance. That's not how I look at it. If the fair value gap doesn't exist, I don't trust that level." Hence the answer to "he's just trading break and retest / support and resistance": the levels are classified beforehand, on the logic that the market will create these patterns around them.
Liquidity, not levels"The key levels that I note, they're not just indiscriminate levels — they're levels built on the logic, and it's based on liquidity, not support and resistance. It's liquidity: the orders I know are going to be there." That is also why price didn't simply stop at 3872.25 — it was going into the imbalance beyond it before delivering lower.

Confluence, spelled out

Condition 1
Break below the level being watched
Condition 2
A fair value gap formed with that break
Condition 3
The next level breaks too…
Condition 4
…and gets another fair value gap, which delivers even more
The pointReaching the 3855 objective was conditional on all of those coming together — "a confluence, not just one thing." That accumulation is what justifies the exercise of the pushing of the button: it requires a lot more things than a single signal.

How the day walked down

Morning
Chop — "I don't have a setup yet, it's sloppy"
10:00
He goes off air anticipating the algorithm taking that low out — it does, and then creates the pattern: the fair value gap with displacement
Through 3872.25
Another gap, another short
1:30
The short-term low, and the point at which the afternoon PM session is watched
Last hour
Rally back up into a fair value gap — measured on that range, a return to a premium, which is a target
Into the close
A small drop into a gap after 3:00, then the algorithmic spool running aggressively up into the level flagged on the hourly, and consolidation into the bell
The "random" level that wasn'tThe close ran "up into a completely random level" — random-looking, except that it had already been marked on the hourly chart, which is the whole point of marking it.

"But it didn't go to a premium"

Two answersFirst: measure the displacement leg and it genuinely didn't reach a premium — and he didn't expect it to, "because it's going to be in a hurry to get down below that 3855 level for the week." Second: on the one-minute, framed against the short-term dealing range — that swing high to that swing low — the entry at 3915.25 is at or above equilibrium, and equilibrium or above is a premium. The level highlights where the liquidity is; the imbalance is what is being keyed off.
The honest framing of the objection"Don't be discouraged… you just don't have the experience to see it yet. You have to do this for a while, folks — it isn't a watch-one-time and then you know it." But: "if you work at it you're going to get it, and once you have it you can't forget it. It's like riding a bicycle."

Why he won't hand you a daily example

One model is not the whole toolkitHe prefaces the day's better trade with a caveat: "I'm teaching you how to find the highest probability, and also trusting the model. I'm not limited to just one model""I don't want you thinking that I'm just this one-trick pony."
And why the discovery has to be yoursSitting down every day to hand over an example of the model "takes away that discovery for you." You have to go into your charts and find them, and building a backlog of old data showing those moves builds confidence and your own pattern recognition"that's just the way you are supposed to do it, period." He has taught what it looks like, how to find it, and where it forms; collecting the examples is back testing.

The live account beside him

His son's trading, shown with permissionThe live account went from a previous balance of $9,751.66 after commissions to $13,451.66$3,700 added that day, from two shorts and a long taken through the same levels. Over three weeks that is roughly a 300% return.
Stated plainly in the same breathAMP allows leverage far lower than the accounts topping retail leaderboards, "that kind of return obviously is not typical, and I'm not promising any of you that you're going to get that." And: "yes, he's my son, so he has a lot of experience sitting next to him." The teaching method is the same one used on the audience — "I'll prompt you: what do you see here, what do you see there" — while he pushes his own buttons and decides for himself whether to get in or out.
Part 6 · Lesson 1

The Sunday Opening Gap & Drawing the Dealing Range

One level plotted across the whole week and treated as dynamic support and resistance, why a consolidation week is exactly when it matters, and the correction on how a dealing range is anchored — on the expansion swing in the direction you intend to trade.

A price action review of the session that had been called live that morning on ES. The day started with a gap when the session opened Sunday evening, drifted lower, made relative equal highs, broke down through the sell side and into the Sunday gap, and then spent the rest of the day working around that one level.

The Sunday opening gap as a weekly reference

The instructionPut the Sunday gap opening on your chart and plot it across the entire week. Many times there is a lot of valuation around that gap, so it gets treated as a dynamic price level: if price is above it, look for it to act as support; if price is below it, look for it to act as resistance.
He says the quiet part himself"Did you just hear ICT — that's blasphemy, he just talked retail, that's a cuss word around here." The framing is deliberate — it's put in the language you'll already understand, and what is actually being traded around it is the liquidity that sits there.
When it works, and when it doesn'tSometimes the week just runs away from it and never comes back. It earns its keep in weeks where there's consolidation — like an FOMC week; those events create choppy, range-bound markets that don't give the clean one-way directional move, and you have to know how to trade in that environment.

How the day traded around it

Overnight
Gap on the Sunday open, drift lower, a small rally, SMT divergence, then relative equal highs
Morning
Break down through the sell side and through the Sunday gap opening, into an older fair value gap below
Back up
Rally into the opening range, then down into an order block, then a short-term high taken and a retrace into another order block
Lunch
Consolidation ahead of lunch, then the typical lunch-hour retracement back up to the opening range
Afternoon
Back up into the Sunday gap opening — it acts as resistance — down into an order block, accumulation, then rally back above it
Then
Trades back down into it, now as support, rallies, falls short of the relative equal highs, retraces into it once more at the discount low, then a 15-minute order block and the run to the objective

The objective, and how close the delivery ran

The level called that morningThe interest was in an old high, rounded up a quarter point to 3953. The afternoon hammered it — the actual high printed 3954.50, off by a point and a half.
You don't need the exact numberIf price is going to trade down into the Sunday gap opening, look for it to run to the relative equal highs"you don't need to have this level that I pointed out, this is enough." Relative equal highs are the buy-side liquidity pool; the specific level is a refinement, not the requirement.
Perfect price deliveryOn the five-minute, the low of one candle at 3926.75 was traded right back up to the high of the nextthe same value. "That is absolutely perfect — that's perfect price delivery."

"Sloppy" defined

What sloppy actually meansThe morning was sloppy — not unprofitable, but "it's not really giving you a whole lot to work with; you have very few options and you have to know exactly what you're looking for." The tell: the gap stayed open the whole way. It was a nice delivery but it wasn't giving all of the mechanics of entry that the afternoon gave. That is why the morning "really wasn't my choice session."

Drawing the dealing range — the correction

The lesson closes on a mistake seen in a student's public study: measuring a range low-to-high, taking the 50% off it, and then applying that level over on a different price leg. "That's not how we do it."

The ruleAnchor the fib on the expansion swing — the impulsive price swing that runs in the direction you are trying to trade. Looking for a long? Draw from the low up to the high of that up-leg, then wait for the anticipated retracement. The retracement down to and below 50% is the discount, and that's where you hunt the long — better still if it lands in a fair value gap.
The error to avoidDon't use a price leg that runs high-to-low to measure something you're trying to go long on. Reverse the logic for shorts: for a short you anchor to the down leg. The measurement always follows the direction of the trade you want.

Where the market is drawing to next

The open gap aboveBack on the 15-minute, the gap overhead is missing data — an actual gap, and "in my opinion it's not going to be left open." A perfect delivery would run right to the low of that candle"but I'm not expecting perfect, I'm not suggesting that at all." If price gets above that area, a deeper run on the daily is likely, toward the high above and the order block whose low sits at 4000.

On signals and dependency

Why there is no signal roomThe requests for a paid signal service are refused outright. The worst thing that could be done is to sit down with you a few times a week — "that would create such a co-dependency on me that it would not help you." The promise made was narrower: to show the things before they happen, so you can see what it looks like. "Either it's going to work or it's not going to work — but you have to be in front of the charts doing these types of things, and failing is part of that. That's how you learn."
Part 6 · Lesson 2

Mean Threshold, Two-Stage Legs & SMT at the Open

The three sensitive prices inside an order block candle and what it means when the middle one gets taken, which leg to measure when a delivery came in two stages, and the times of day SMT divergence actually shows up — plus why it is worthless without a bias.

The daily chart had delivered up into a bearish order block, and the day's range traded up into that up-close candle without quite taking the high above it. The whole lesson hangs off what was happening inside that one daily candle.

This one sits outside the modelHe raises it twice, unprompted, because the audience had already asked: "what about the times you said for the model… teaching you something that is outside the model, as the reasons why you're not going to anticipate or see that typical setup — that's the whole point of why I did it today." And again: "I'm not limited to this model… why are we not using the timeframe that's used for the model? I'm showing you again just proof that these things deliver as I teach them." So read what follows as evidence the concepts hold, not as an addition to the Part 1 killzone model.

The three sensitive prices in an order block

What you are watching inside the candleWhen a candle is being used as an order block, the low, the open, and the middle of the range are the three sensitive areas. The middle — 50% of the candle, found by running a fib across it — is what he calls the mean threshold.
What it told him that dayThe mean threshold was taken, and "that to me bodes well for a continuation to take out this short-term high." Price was digging up into the daily bearish order block, climbing through its range — the block was giving way rather than holding.
The corollaryThe mean threshold is the level the block has to defend. If it doesn't hold, expect the order block to fail — here, a daily bearish order block being eaten through from below.

Two stages to a delivery — measure the most recent one

On the five minute, the run up was not one clean pass. One leg made a single pass from its candle's high to its candle's low; the other made two — low, high, a small retracement, and then a second level running.

The rule"Because I had two stages to this delivery, I want to use this most recent one — and this is my dealing range." Short-term low to short-term high, fib across it, 50% is equilibrium, and the expectation is a drop into discount, ideally into the fair value gap sitting there.
The same shape, repeated up the hourlyThe market structure read is the same fractal over and over: dealing range low, dealing range high, retrace into discount, fair value gap or order block, rally — then a new dealing range and the same again, "picking up discount levels each time, the algorithm accumulating more longs to press deeper into the range."

SMT divergence — setup, timing, and the trap

How to plot it
Add the correlated contract as a compare symbol (here NQ against ES) on TradingView
The setting that matters
It defaults to plotting on the close — change it to plot on the low, because you are comparing lows
What you're looking for
Nasdaq made a lower low; the S&P failed to go lower — that is the divergence
What it means
One is taking liquidity out while the other accumulates — a stop-out on one side, an accumulation of longs on the other
When it appearsThe two normally move in tandem; the cracking correlation shows up at specific times — 8:30, 9:30, and at news events being released.
The trap"If you have a bias it's helpful, but if you don't know where it's going you're going to encounter what would look like SMT divergence and then it disappears" as the two start moving in concert again. Hence the standing instruction: know what price is reaching for. The bias had been bullish; the higher low against Nasdaq's lower low was the telltale sign it was going higher.

The early run as a heads-up for 9:30

A sequencing tellA nice run early — before or around seven o'clock in the morning — means a deep retracement is probably coming, and SMT usually occurs around the 9:30 period after such a run. "If I get an early run like this, my first thought is I need to go to SMT later on at 9:30, because it's probably going to require some kind of a cracking correlation to set up the next leg."
How the entry was actually takenWith little time that morning, the ideal entry was missed outright — "I just hurried up, saw the chart, missed the actual ideal entry, and used a close proximity entry with an order block." The objective was 4000, called during the week's commentaries; price ran it, then pressed deeper into the daily order block.

Why it was going up to keep going up

High resistance liquidityAsked what would constitute a short up there, the answer is the range structure itself: price is not likely to run straight up through all of that range — that is a high resistance liquidity run. Not that it can't happen, but it is unlikely to pan out.
Order flow, read off the candlesUnder price sat down-close candles supporting itunderlying order flow that is bullish. So the market was going up to keep going higher, not going up to go down: to go up in order to go down, it would have to pierce and break all of those ranges, and that requires intent, not selling pressure.
The scolding"How many of you first didn't listen when I said don't trade — and then tried to sell short? Why? The bias has been bullish." The market had made a low, a lower low, a dramatic low, come back up with a shift in market structure, and retraced to imbalance. We try not to pick tops.
Part 6 · Lesson 3

No Entry Means No Setup — Reading a Liquidity Run

A move that gives you nothing to enter on is telling you what it is: a rush to clear liquidity, not a delivery. Plus which market structure shift counts, and why a satisfied week ends on Wednesday.

A short review of an ES session that ran the sell side at the open, shifted structure, and rallied all afternoon. The lesson worth keeping is a piece of negative evidence — what it means when a big move offers no entry at all.

Premium and discount without an indicator

The hourly readSwing low to swing high gives the range; the fib only marks where equilibrium is. Price had moved down from the high into a fair value gap and below equilibrium — a discount. Asked whether an indicator is needed to know the market is oversold: "nope, absolutely not." The rectangle and the fib are drawn for the viewer's attention, not for the read.

The morning, in order

Pre-open
A run up into a premium relative to that high and low — flagged in advance on Twitter
9:30
An aggressive slide taking out relative equal lows — sell-side liquidity — quickly, right at the opening
Then
A short bounce, and one more push below the low, knocking out anyone who had tried to buy
After
A shift in market structure, then a roll higher that rebalanced all of it
Pullback
Back down into a five-minute fair value gap — the long, at 4120 on five contracts
Target
The morning high as the draw on liquidity; it ran, and "actually went a little bit higher than I thought it would", up into a fair value gap at a deep premium
The trade management, stated plainlyThree contracts sold at 4139.25 (the partial, taken at the moment of the tweet), the final two filled on a limit at 4143.75. It ultimately ran higher still, which was fine.
Two trades, not oneHe is explicit that there were two that day: the morning "small trade" he recorded and tweeted — partials taken, then the limit order getting hit — and then "the only other trade I had today was waiting for it to drop down to a discount, and when it did I went long here, had a little bit of heat here, not much — it was like five handles", with the stop just below the swing low. Which of the printed figures belongs to which is not resolvable from the episode, so read the entry-and-partials chain as one trade and the heat and stop as belonging to a second.

The core observation: no model entry

Negative evidence is evidenceOn the drop, "notice there's no model entry here. That's telling — it's tipping its hand to you, because there's no real setup and it's a rush to get down here." A big run that never offers an entry is not a delivery you were meant to be in; it is the market running the liquidity before it does what it actually intends.
What that run does to peopleIt clears out sell-side liquidity going down, then rallies to sucker in longs trying to pick the bottom, and knocks those individuals out. Now "they are not allowed to be long — their stops are taken" — and retail rarely takes a re-entry after that. They're afraid. That is precisely where he was buying: "I'm buying those sell stops."

Which shift in market structure is the shift?

The range you're working within decides itWith two candidate shifts visible on the one-minute, the answer is not a rule about the candles — it's the frame: "if this is a range I'm working within, the shift in market structure occurs here, when it takes out that high" — and then the drop back into the fair value gap is what gets bought. Define the range first; the shift is the one that breaks that range.
Why the lows weren't expected to go"I didn't believe we were going to take out the lows, because we should have done it at 8:30 news and it didn't." That made the move a deep retracement, sent higher into a premium right before 9:30 — and then sunk.

Ending the week on purpose

Rules of engagementIt was NFP week and the first week of the month, and the preference is to have all trading done by Wednesday. With that day's work banked: "I'm satisfied with this particular week." The anticipated objection — you still have Wednesday, Thursday, Friday — is answered with "I have to be disciplined, and how you get to consistency is having rules — rules of engagement."
And the real reason to stop"It can go either direction based on that daily chart. Because I don't have a clear definitive objective, I'm going to sit on my hands." No objective, no trade — the same standard applied to a session, applied to a week.
Aside — why the June contract in MayIndex futures are delivered by contract month. With a couple of weeks of June trading left, the June contract is still the one being charted; after that it rolls over into September.
Part 6 · Lesson 4

Bias, News Days & the Journal That Builds Experience

Where a bullish bias actually comes from on the daily chart, why Non-Farm Payroll Friday is a study day and not a trading day, and the journaling method that manufactures the pattern recognition no video can give you.

The daily ES chart had worked inside a fair value gap that is also a breaker, filled it, and started to rally. From there the lesson builds the bias, then spends most of its time on the two things that decide whether you ever get good: which days you engage, and what you do with your charts afterwards.

The frame on the whole lesson"If you're out here trying to gamble with live money — which is what none of you should be doing — if you're in here learning how to read price, that's why you're here… months from now, if you come to the conclusion that you think you've done well enough on paper and then demo consistently, if you decide to go into live trading, you've done that on your own — I've done nothing to instigate that or try to get you to do it." That is why the second half of this lesson is a journaling method and not a trading method: "I try to be responsible as a mentor, try to protect you from yourself."

Reading the bias off the daily

The breaker
Low, high, low — find the high in between and extend it out in time; price trades back down into it
The gap
The same area was also a fair value gap, and price came down and filled it in
The bias
Once price moves off a low and creates a swing low, it's easy to assume it wants to come back up to that highbullish until that high is taken out
After the high
A day or two of retracement is logical, because the rally left a fair value gap; price trades down, fills it, tests it, and rallies
Next draws
The short-term high first, then — with acceleration — the relative equal highs and the fair value gap above
The conditional for the next sessionIf price has not taken that high out overnight, and at 8:30 it is still above the fair value gap's high (that candle's low), expect an attempt to reach that level. "It doesn't need to go through it, but the bias would be that I'd expect that to be attempted."
Levels transpose, they aren't redrawnThe lines on the hourly are not support and resistance found on the hourly — they are the same daily levels, carried down when the timeframe changed. Lose that context on a one- or five-minute chart and you won't understand why price is dropping to where it's dropping.

Non-Farm Payroll: study it, don't trade it

The advice, and the reasoning behind itNFP Friday is not a day to speculate on. The reason isn't that money can't be made there — "there's going to be a group that says I've made money doing Non-Farm Payroll trades." It's that you're here to learn to read price action, the day can be very volatile, choppy, or a complete dud, and you don't have the experience to weather something that jarring.
What to do insteadDetermine which side of liquidity price is reaching for before the 8:30 release, then watch what it does on the one- and five-minute charts when the volatility hits. It is "an amazing study for liquidity purposes only." Sometimes the taught patterns materialise to script; not always.
The underlying principle"If you have advantages by trading on the days that don't create these conditions, you trade in those arenas — and you avoid the times where historically your proven walk-forward results have been diminished." On big days precision drops precipitously; the visibility available on other days simply isn't there.
Why he traded it anywayHe deliberately took a short on the day he tells everyone to avoid — "I forced myself to engage, not because I'm breaking rules or being undisciplined, but because I want to teach you why I avoid these days." That trade was covered as price dipped below the short-term low.

Stop trading by Wednesday

The rule taught to his studentsStop trading by the New York session on Wednesday. If you were profitable up to that point, stop for the rest of the week and just observe. And if you have not bagged anything from Sunday's open through Wednesday's New York session, don't do any tradessit with the desire to trade and do nothing.
What that buys youIt forges discipline and patience, and on a bad week that offers little movement you are rewarded psychologically and emotionally because you didn't do anything. The Thursday and Friday of an NFP week can be choppy, sporadic, come back against you unexpectedly, and lose a lot of their precision.

Power of Three, on a lower timeframe

The day's own shapeThe session opened, consolidated, rallied, dropped into the daily fair value gap low, bounced, took the short-term high and closed near the highsaccumulation, manipulation, distribution. The open creates the low of the day, then it rallies.
Why "it's just noise" is wrongThe pattern is easy to read on a daily candle and easy to lose on a one-minute chart among the fluctuations. "That's why the uninitiated look at it and say it's noise. It's not noise — it's doing what it does on the daily chart, just represented on a smaller interval."

Spotting, not signalling

The Twitter exerciseHe asked followers to locate the five-minute fair value gap above market price, gave them a minute, then posted the chart. Price ran up into it shortly after. "For clarity, folks — that is not a trade signal. I'm not telling you to buy or sell anything." The purpose: "I'm being your spotter", pointing at the right-hand side of the chart before it develops, so you study how price gets there — "and I'm sometimes going to be wrong."

The journal that builds the experience

The final section is the method itself, drawn on a two-minute chart — with the caveat repeated twice that the arrows are not a trade entry and not a trade exit; that trade was not taken, in live or in demo. It is how your chart should look when you journal after the fact.

Mark the structure
The order block — the down-close candle prior to the move up — the consolidation, and the drop into the fair value gap
Mark the moment
Where price was when the observation was made, and where it delivered to
Log the timing
Two-minute candles: it started delivering six minutes after hitting the gap, and took roughly twenty minutes to complete the move
Log the context
It came from a discount, above the New York midnight opening price, going into the lunch hour — with the PM session, after 1:00–1:30, as the window for delivery
The part that does the workPhrase every annotation as though you saw it in advance. "You're tricking your subconscious into believing this is an experience you really had — it's self talk. You borrow that experience for the study." Keep it factual, and cheerlead yourself.
And what never goes in itNever write anything negative — not "I wish I'd seen this", not "I was foolish", not "I'm never going to get this." These entries exist to be reflected on later, so they must be positive.
The review cadenceScroll back through the charts and read the annotations each weekend — the previous week, the previous month. Do it for weeks and months — "how much time I don't know", maybe half a year or so, certainly by the first year — and you will have built all of that pseudo experience. "Yes it's laborious, yes it's boring in the beginning — but this is how you get it."
Said as bluntly as it gets"Nothing else gives it to you. Watching my videos will not do it for you. If you fail under my tutelage, it's because you don't do this." That is where everyone who fails starts their tailspin"I ain't got time for that." There is no shortcut around it.

How the afternoon finished

The lunch stop runA short-term low formed during the New York lunch hour, price consolidated and then dropped back down and took it out — a stop run — with unfinished business at the old high above. It then slowly drifted up and took that high out. After the low was formed, there was no model entry — but there was a fair value gap with continuation to the upside, the one flagged in real time before it happened.
Part 6 · Lesson 5

Changing Gears — Abandoning a Bias & Trading the Afternoon

The objective never printed and the model never set up — so what replaced them. How a bias gets abandoned, which characteristics justify reversing it, how the lunch hour tells you whether they'll work through it, and the trade that came out of all of it.

The day opened with a stated draw on liquidity — 4070, below the daily fair value gap — and it never got there. "It did not give a setup either, based on the model I'm teaching you." The lesson is built out of that failure, and its agenda is stated up front.

Read the caveat before the lectureWhat follows is framed on his own authorship: "because I'm the author of these concepts I have a lot of tools at my disposal, and I have a little bit better understanding of price delivery than the average student of mine." It is stated again at the end — "because I'm the author of these concepts I don't have a limitation to just that one." So this is an advanced manoeuvre, not a technique to copy off a 15-minute chart.
Question 1
How do you go about abandoning a specific bias?
Question 2
How do you change gears — when that is even applicable? Sometimes reversing isn't; sometimes it just means the sidelines
Question 3
What characteristics lead to a bias that is changed, and how do you use that logic going forward?
Question 4
How do you navigate the New York lunch hour?

What the morning actually showed

The evidence that the bias was wrongMultiple lows were taken — one run, then another, then another — and then the market reversed while offering no high-probability shorting opportunity. 4070 was never tagged; that liquidity was left in place, and the relative equal lows stayed intact. Above, the previous day's high at 4168.25 and a fair value gap sat as two premium arrays that could become the draw instead.
The turn, on the bellwether chartOn the 15-minute — the bellwether chart — price finally ran higher, giving a short-term shift in market structure, creating a fair value gap, and then trading back down into it. That is the trigger: if it digs into that gap and repels higher and takes the short-term high, that is enough to set the stage for the afternoon trend. On the daily, that same run took out the short-term high — an absolute market structure shift, bullish.
The reaction that is not required"No panic. No 'I'm missing a move'. No calling somebody or reaching out on social media asking what do you think's happening." Nobody else's opinion matters — "you're going to learn how to trust yourself."

Not support and resistance, and not a full rebalance

Why it dug past the highIt looks like resistance-broken-turns-support, but price dug a little past that high and went into the fair value gap instead of stopping dead at it. The read is structural: price went through the short-term high, created an imbalance, and then traded into that imbalance.
The contrast he draws himselfChris Lorie teaches liquidity voids — that the market wants to come back and fill all of that area in. "I don't teach that. There are times when that can occur, but because I understand the algorithm, that is not likely to occur most times." The nod is genuine — "he's the only one I really give a nod to in technical analysis", with no business relationship — but the imbalance does not have to completely rebalance.
What replaces itKnow where the market is reaching for, then look for the imbalances in price. Any of them can be the one — it's a fair value to buy, if you're bullish. "I'm not trying to teach you entry patterns with the importance that getting in at a specific price is the most important factor. I'm teaching you how to determine where the market is likely to go next."

Narrative, defined

The definition"Narrative is the understanding of what price should do, why, and what things it will encounter to prove that the narrative you are assuming is in fact underway." It is not buying and selling pressure — it is algorithmic — and it is why an indicator crossover is no basis for a decision.
The narrative that formed that dayPrice dipped into the lower end of the daily fair value gap, rallied, traded back down into the 15-minute fair value gap, and rallied again. "Right away, that tells me the algorithm is priming itself for an afternoon run to potentially previous day's high." Crossing up gave the maybe; the drop into the gap and the rally from it is what confirmed it.
Narrative alone is not an entry"By itself it doesn't mean go in and buy it, because I could see myself stopped out if I'm premature. I want to see something that makes sense logically." That means displacement — an energetic price run — then measure that low to that high for premium and discount, and wait for the discount.

Carrying the higher timeframe down

The work you have to doOn the five-minute the area doesn't look like a fair value gap. Go back to the 15-minute, shade the run in, then drop to the five-minute — you'll see it drop into that shaded area. Same for the daily gap. "If you're not carrying higher timeframe analysis into your lower timeframe, you're going to be trading blind — you have no idea what you're looking for."

The model is a scalping model

Stated plainly"The model I've provided for this YouTube channel is a scalping model — that's exactly what it is." To day trade the daily range you use the 15- and 5-minute charts; you can still use the model's entry criteria, but with the logic and narrative of trading the daily range. Asked whether the same logic scales beyond the 1–5 minute charts: yes — the lowest timeframe just gives the most repetitions to practise on.
The bullish day's shapePower of Three: the midnight opening price, a drop that creates the low of the day (here around 9:10 New York time), then a rally and a shift in market structure. When bullish, you want to be buying at or close to the opening price. Knowing the market is likely to go down to go up, you can wait for exactly that: the drop, the shift, and the return into the 15-minute gap.

Navigating the New York lunch hour

The normal bullish profile
Rally in the morning → consolidate into the lunch hour → after lunch, drop and sweep the sell stops below a short-term low or the lunch lows → rally
What happened instead
Price made a low ahead of noon and dropped into the fair value gap — but as a retracement, not a consolidation
What that signals
They're going to work through lunch
Where that comes fromLearned from an actual floor trader in the open-outcry days: when the floor knew the market was in a hurry — a fast market — they didn't go off the floor, they stayed and traded. "That same mentality has been transferred into electronic trading, so the algorithm does the same thing."
How to trade each caseIf it consolidates into lunch: mark the swing lows made during the lunch hour, wait for the drop to sweep them, then look for the rally. If it retraces into lunch: identify where it is likely to retrace to, expect it to create a short-term low, leave smooth relative equal highs above it — which shorts read as resistance and put stops behind — and then drop once more below that short-term low, into the sell stops.

Choosing the dealing range

Why that low and not the earlier oneAsked why the measurement ran from one low rather than an earlier one: because the objective is the daily range, and the midnight opening price is a factor. Price had gone above the midnight open twice, so "I'm not expecting it to go back below there again — referring to that older low is pointless." The range used is the market structure swing low to the swing high, with the fib across it, and the fair value gap below 50% as the discount.

SMT, and buying the sell stops

The divergenceAdding NQ as a compare symbol — plotted on the low, because you are comparing lows — showed Nasdaq making a lower low while the S&P made a higher low. That is real accumulation: Nasdaq failing to go lower, and the S&P's push down being just a stop hunt below a short-term low.
The buy"I want to buy sell stops — that is buying sell-side liquidity." Done inside the fair value gap, during a classic buy day — open at midnight, trade down, create the low of the day, rally, then an optimal trade entry or fair value gap. The fill was 4110.25, a quarter point below the entry candle's low of 4110.50. "I bought that very candle — I didn't buy the next candle, I didn't buy the one before."

Four ways in, once the bias is calibrated

Optimal trade entry
Low to high, fib, buy the 62–79% retracement
Turtle soup + OTE
A low, then a lower low violating it, taken with the OTE
The fair value gap
Low to high, find the gap below the 50% level — the discount — and buy as it trades to the top of it, stop below the lower low
Buying strength
A buy stop at the swing high prior to the move into the gap, stop below the lowest low afterwards — "not, in my opinion, the preferred entry strategy"
The common ingredientAll four are only usable because of a bias that has been corrected and calibrated by what the market did at key times — the 9:30 volatility, the shift higher, the SMT.

Managing it out

First partial
Half of ten contracts taken in the area marked with a rectangle before the trade — an old area of buy-side liquidity and an imbalance that might stall it or make it a failure swing. "I'm taking off half in the event that I'm possibly wrong."
Second partial
Three contracts at 4134.50
Third
After it pumped through the old high and the 4140 level — 4141.50, a few seconds early of the expansion candle
Last contract
Closed by choice: "I'd rather take my price at my own exit and not let the stop out occur" — though the stop never would have been hit
Stop handling
Raised as it advanced, because once it has left that fair value gap it should never come back down into it — if it does, I'm wrong, and I'll kill the trade and move to the sidelines
Why it was closed short of the objectivePrice traded through the down-close candle acting as an order block, and the market was still inside a multi-day daily range — so previous day's high might need Wednesday's trading rather than that afternoon.

Being wrong twice and still getting paid

The summary of the day"I was wrong on this level, and I was wrong on the 4070 level — but I was able to trade and take the lion's portion of the move in the middle. That's all you need." You do not need the absolute high and the absolute low. "I don't need this level to get profitable."
And on being publicly wrong"Last time I checked, if you don't put a trade on, did you lose? No." The 4070 call didn't print; there was no setup, so there was no trade and no loss — "I don't need to be right."
Patience, in two places"Just because I'm sitting in front of charts doesn't mean I'm taking a trade." There is more time waiting between setups than actually doing anything, and you need incredible patience in both stages — waiting for the setup, and then letting the trade pan out. The morning was simply given up.
Why he doesn't only teach the model"When the model speaks, I'm going to show you — but I'm also teaching you how to read price when the model isn't giving you a setup, because every market isn't going to give you that model's setup every day, every session." When it didn't, what he leaned on was experience and the concepts already taught on the channel — nothing new was invented that day.
Aside — rolling the contractBoth symbols were about to move from the June to the September delivery. The roll rule: monitor open interest, and roll when the September contract's open interest exceeds June's.
Part 6 · Lesson 6

Time, Narrative & the Five-Point Model

The complete session model — narrative before the open, the four times of day the algorithm works, and the low, disciplined threshold ICT teaches a beginner to aim for.

Narrative comes before everything

The day in this episode was framed before the 9:30 open, not after it. On the daily chart the S&P had relative equal lows sitting below the market — a draw on liquidity — and a fair value gap further down. The bias posted in advance was bearish, with 4070 named as the objective, and a stated condition: if price goes below those lows, it is not going down there to go back up — it is drawing into that daily fair value gap. That single statement also predicts the size of the day: a large range day, not a small one.

Rule Start your annotations on the higher time frame and keep them simple: the level price is likely to draw to, and the key levels that may confirm or change the bias. Then transpose those levels down onto the lower time frame chart you trade from.

ICT's warning here is aimed at a specific misreading of his own material: people teach that price always sweeps relative equal lows and then reverses the other way. That is not the case. The pattern alone tells you nothing — what the market is reaching for is the whole point.

Without narrative "It's not a breaker, it's a gamble, it's a guess, it's a speculation that's aimless." Narrative requires experience, and experience is what a mentor is lending you.

The daily range framework

The reference point for the day is the opening price at midnight, New York local time, extended forward across the session. Power of Three then plays out around it: shorts accumulate, the market runs up into a short-term premium — the Judas swing — and only then breaks lower, taking sell side in stages until it reaches the objective.

Rule On a down day, if you are trying to capture movement on the daily range, you want to be shorting at or above the midnight opening price — or as close to it as you can get. Reverse it for a bullish day: buy below the midnight open or close to it.

Once short, you take a partial at the first objective and then submit yourself to time — the last hour, three o'clock to four o'clock, is when the delivery into the daily range objective comes.

Lunch, and why the highs get swept

New York lunch runs 12:00 to 1:00. On this bearish day the algorithm repriced higher through the lunch hour, taking the stops above the short-term highs formed inside it.

Why it happensThe algorithm doesn't want participants who shorted in the morning to be comfortable. Instead of releasing lower, it reprices up, knocking those shorts out.
What it createsTwo kinds of buy-side order in one place: the stops of the shorts being knocked out, and the buy stops of breakout traders getting long on the broken high.
Who uses itSmart money needs a counterparty to sell into. That buying interest is engineered, then sold into while price is held at the high.

Large range days can form with a busy lunch hour, so the session can make a significant high or low there. If you don't trade the lunch hour, that's fine — the model's next setup waits until after it.

The afternoon: ask the range a question first

Before any PM trade What is the daily range trying to do? Is it expanding higher, expanding lower, did it reverse in the morning session, is it going to run counter-trend — or is it simply consolidating because it's waiting on a big news event the following day?

The PM session setup on this day was a bearish breaker: a swing low, then a rally to a higher high that runs the buy side, then a break back down below that short-term low. When price returns to that level with a bearish narrative in place, it should repel price and send it lower. Here it did — heaviness fell below 4070 and then accelerated with no retracement into the daily fair value gap. As ICT puts it, that is an algorithmic sell day: you are on board beforehand, or you watch the ship sail without you.

Algorithmic theory: time and price

This is the reminder ICT returns to for anyone who has lost it along the way.

Rule Price is delivered by an algorithm. There is no buying or selling pressure — that is an excuse used for what the market does and doesn't do. Algorithmic theory is based on time and price, and the code leans heavily on the time element.
The time elementWhat time of day → what day of week → what week of month → what month of year → what seasonal influences and tendencies.
Price without timePrice levels are useless until time is considered. This is why support and resistance is a fallacy — anyone can find the level that worked in hindsight; picking it live, consistently, is the problem. He answers the obvious objection himself, and the answer is conditional rather than flat: "Can you make money with retail concepts? Yes. Yes you can — if you understand how to reprice like I'm teaching it." The claim is about the reasoning, not the levels.
Time without priceTime is of no use unless price is at a key PD array. Being free to sit at the charts means nothing on its own.
Blending the twoYields astonishing results and the precision demonstrated in the forecasts and objectives throughout this mentorship.

The algorithm doesn't count the orders

When a short-term high is penetrated, the algorithm has no idea how much volume rests above or below it — and it doesn't need to know. It simply has to take out a short-term high, and it does. ICT's analogy is a video game: what keeps Pac-Man inside the maze is the program, and every modern game map has boundaries that are coded in.

Analogy The daily range has those limitations programmed into it too — until manual intervention removes them. That is an FOMC or rate announcement: someone sends price to a specific level, aggressively, well outside the range you would reasonably expect for that short-term perspective.

The economic calendar is useful for exactly this — you can see in advance where those events are likely to form.

The four times of day

Set your platform clock to New York local time. The model takes the student to the chart at specific times, with a specific logic in mind, looking for one repeating pattern.

The two rules that stop him trading The model has two brakes, and both are conditions for standing down. No news event, no normal risk: the days to engage are those with a medium or high impact news event"if there is a lack of one, he can practise but he shouldn't be engaging with his normal risk percentage." And no pattern, no trade: "have him hopefully see a pattern that repeats — it may not form that day he sits down, then he has to just move to the sidelines and do nothing." That is the choice to say I don't see it today, and it is the counterpart to the no-objective-no-trade rule from Lesson 3.
8:30 AMThe news embargo lifts — the economic report or news event lands. First element of time in the model.
9:30 AMEquities open. The second opportunity, taken if 8:30 was missed.
1:30 PMThe afternoon session setup, after lunch ends at 1:00.
3:00–4:00 PMThe market-on-close macro run by the algorithm — a little setup forms there most days of the week. It may be a buy setup, not only a sell.

The pattern itself is deliberately narrow. On a bearish day at 8:30: price is above the midnight opening price, it runs a short-term high, then trades lower through a swing low and leaves a fair value gap. Rally back into that gap, sell short, with the expectation of a run to the sell side liquidity below.

Five points, then stop

The model ICT built for his son is shaped around the person, not around the market's maximum. Short attention span, easily distracted, real money on the line — so the threshold is set low and easy to hit.

Rule Five points, then out — even if the framework allows for thirty. Below five points you are ultra short-term scalping and commission costs will kill you; five is the lowest threshold a setup should reasonably yield.
One live trade in the morning8:30 or 9:30 — if he gets his five points at 8:30 he doesn't trade 9:30. If he misses or loses at 8:30, he tries 9:30.
One in the afternoonOnly if the morning was missed or lost. If he made money in the morning, the afternoon is demo or paper traded.
Why not push the edgeBecause the lesson is discipline, not greed. Seeing that you can make more and choosing not to builds the contentment that stops over-trading.
The arithmeticOne E-mini S&P contract: one point is $50. Five points is $250 a day; done consistently that is 25 points — $1,250 — a week.
Not a promise ICT is explicit that this is his son, sitting beside him, being coached minute by minute with three decades of experience acting as his internal dialogue. You are not ready to do this with live funds while you are still learning the concepts — and you should not expect five points every single day.

Reading a setup that is failing

ICT was short from the 9:30 setup and took a partial as price broke below the low. Then he closed three more contracts before his stop was hit. The reasoning is worth following, because it is narrative reading rather than a rule:

  • Multiple levels of sell side had already been taken — old lows, then relative equal lows, then another low, then another — without price moving very much.
  • After the buy side had been run, that high should have been the high of the day and price should have torn lower. It didn't.
  • The up-close candle above should have capped price as bearish institutional order flow — at most one more touch, or a small poke above the short-term high, then aggressively lower.
  • Instead price reached back up into that order block and traded into it. With that many levels of sell side already taken, the algorithm's next objective is buy side — which sits above that high.
Note He took a partial rather than closing the whole position, deliberately: closing everything would feel like panic, and taking something off still leaves the trade alive if the stop is never reached. The remaining contracts were stopped out better than break-even.

The model has to fit you

Why not just copy a model that works for someone else?
If it doesn't match your personality — the way you see and engage price action — you will never make it work for you.
How do you kill fear of missing out?
Back-testing. Seeing how many times these things form removes the panic of watching a move happen while you were away from the charts.
What do you do after a losing trade?
Stop. Don't rush to win it back. A loss is a flat tire — it costs time and money and delays you, but it doesn't stop you arriving.
What if it stops being enjoyable?
Take a week off, enjoy another hobby, come back fresh. Making it "I have to do this, it must work right now" makes it harder and slower to learn.

The closing promise is deliberately not a promise of riches. The skill set removes the fear of missing out, the fear of failing — and the fear of inflation, because it will always outpace it. Money management is the one piece left, and it comes next.

Part 6 · Lesson 7

Daily Bias, News Days & Risk On / Risk Off

The most-requested topic, answered plainly: you don't need a bias every day. Plus the three-bar swing, the London close hour, and reading one market to trade another.

The three-bar swing at an old high

The episode opens on USDCAD. The market ran up into an old daily high last week — not by much, but it ran it — and the following day printed a lower high. That gives a swing high: one candle with a lower candle to its left and a lower candle to its right.

Rule A sweep of an old high followed by that three-bar pattern is when lower prices are expected; the read is confirmed when the next candle trades lower. Reverse it for a sweep of an old low.
Not a fractal This is not a Williams fractal on MT4 — ICT doesn't use MT4, and this is not five candles. "If you're waiting for five candles you missed the boat."

The complication on this particular chart was a down-close candle beneath price — a bullish order block — which price would have to dig into on the way down. That is the impediment to one big sudden candle clearing straight through to the objective, and price did indeed close about half-way into that candle's body.

Why forex rebalances a one-sided move

After the 8:30 news displacement the down move left an unusually elongated imbalance — all sell-side delivery with not enough buy-side delivery in it.

Rule In forex there is no central measure of volume, so the algorithm that delivers price is going to want to come back up and overlap that one-sided move, offering buyers an opportunity in it. That is where the entry lives — and the stop goes above the fair value gap.

Drop a fib on the swing and you get the equilibrium at 50%: you need price at that point or higher before selling, so the sell window is between equilibrium and the top of the imbalance. Entry anywhere in that range is acceptable — 129.44 to 129.47 in this example — and the risk is small in pips. Forex is very scalable, which is its advantage over futures, where you are stuck with the contract size and either make it work or don't take the trade rather than over-leverage.

The London close hour

10:00–11:00 AMLondon close profit-taking hour. Usually — not always — the opposing end of the daily range forms here. If the session high is already in, the low is likely to form in this window.
What to do with itIf you are in a directional trade you want roughly 80% of it off between 10 and 11.
The news exceptionCrude oil inventory numbers skew the Canadian dollar, so on those days ICT widens the window to 10:00 to noon rather than the tight 10–11.

The keys to daily bias

This is the topic ICT is asked for most, and he names the expectation directly: you want a simple A-B-C procedure that always works and always yields a winner. What follows is the simplification — the rules his students actually follow.

What the six rules are and are not The qualifier arrives in the same breath as Rule 1: "notice I said that I'm not perfect — some of you hold me up to this hero-level status and I'm not a hero, okay, I'm just somebody that knows what they're looking for… because I'm looking for a procedure and process that will lead to an outcome that generally — not all the time, but generally — yields a specific result." He says it again working through them: "now you might be wrong, because sometimes I get it wrong." Six numbered rules, then, but a procedure that generally works, not a checklist that does.
Rule 1 A bias every day is unrealistic. Going in with a predetermined daily bias before the market opens, invariably it will be wrong.
Rule 2 Determine the likely weekly expansion from the weekly chart. Not where the week will close — where it is likely to reach for. That gives the strongest bias.
Rule 3 Look for obvious liquidity in that direction — below old lows, above old highs.
Rule 4 Identify imbalances in price delivery top down — weekly, daily, four hour, one hour, 15 minute, then five down through four, three, two and one for whichever gives the clear fair value gap under the model's rules.
Rule 5 Focus only on high or medium impact calendar days. Yellow events are of no interest — red and orange are the drivers to look for.
Rule 6 Look for the directional price run inside the killzones intraday, at the same time the calendar says a high or medium impact event is likely.

The weekly question is the same question you would ask of a daily chart, just one tier up: is it gravitating toward an old high to run above it, an old low to run below it, or an imbalance it needs to revisit? Or is there simply no data that week, so the algorithm works other markets and this one is lackluster?

The framing question Who's in the crosshairs? Have people been making money going long? Is there a low to run down and stop them out with? That alone is enough to frame an expansion lower.

Why not trade every day

These rules deliberately give you permission not to know the bias outside of them. The everyday trader is more prone to losing trades, because there are days you should not be trading at all — the mistake ICT made blowing accounts at 20, 21 and 22.

Warning "Trading is not an Olympic sport. They don't give out gold medals for over-trading — but they do blow accounts."

Journalling is what proves it. Back-log every day, mark up the charts, and over time you will see that the best setups occur when calendar events are in play, and that they originate around the same time the news comes out. That is what turns "plan your trade and trade your plan" from a cliché into a procedure: the calendar gives the day, the killzone gives the time, the weekly chart gives the direction.

Reading the wick days

On the S&P hourly there was a stretch that whipsawed both sides — sell side taken, then buy side taken, then a break down. That is usually FOMC or a rate announcement.

Rule When you see two big wicks on either side caused by news, ignore the wicks. The manipulation is already done; it can't hurt you now. Take the real range from the swing that follows and measure your equilibrium from that.

Protected lows: buying before 9:30

On the S&P, the market opened at midnight and went down into an imbalance, then came off it energetically — a bullish shift in market structure during London. London creates the high or the low most of the time, around 70% when the directional bias is right, so that low is probably pricing in the daily low. Price then retraced into the New York session, into a fair value gap and the last down-close candle of a three-candle order block.

Rule When London gives an energetic move, price retraces, and at 8:30 you open near the low of London, you can buy before 9:30 with confidence. The manipulation already happened, so the 9:30 open does not need to deliver more of it.
Why the low holds That low had already taken sell side — a low, then a lower low, then the reaction off the order block — and the only fair value gap there had already been rebalanced. There is no reason for price to go back down. That is why stops go under those lows: they are protected lows.

The targets were set top down: buy-side liquidity above as the first partial, then the low of the hourly fair value gap, then its high. All three were hit. Everything is read from candles relative to time and price — no indicators, no moving averages, no candlestick replacements.

Risk on, risk off

The two markets in this episode were traded as one idea. USDCAD had the high-impact news, so that is where the read starts — the dollar is the first currency in the pair.

Risk onDollar down. Foreign currencies, index futures and stocks go higher. Lower USDCAD, higher S&P.
Risk offDollar up, everything else down.
How it was usedA bearish bias on USDCAD is the same as saying lower dollar, higher foreign currency — and it is easy for the E-mini S&P to rally on that. The trade was found in a market ICT wasn't going to trade.
Not correlationThese two are not correlated pairs. The synergy between them is purely the risk-on / risk-off state.

The same logic answers the perennial question of which pair to trade: start from the economic calendar. Trade the pair the news is in, or the correlated pair. If the driver were on EURUSD, compare EURUSD and GBPUSD for SMT divergence — if both fell ahead of the news and GBPUSD failed to make a lower low, buy GBPUSD, because it is the relative strength leader and they move in sympathy. The same applies to AUDUSD and NZDUSD.

Sequencing on news You could sell short into the fair value gap that exists before the 8:30 release, but the driver could just as easily send price higher into the imbalance above. Waiting for the news to hit and then create the setup is the more conservative choice — and the aggressive version takes experience to find and trust. Use a demo account to watch those form.
Part 6 · Lesson 8

Risk, Stop Management & the Final Word

The closing episode: position sizing worked out on a real trade, the drawdown ladder, when a stop is allowed to move — and why a losing trade is a tax on success.

A day where the expectation fell short

The episode opens by showing something rare in trading education: a call that didn't come to pass. The read was for price to run up to 3805, and from there ICT would have watched for a short to form, a drop into a discount, and then a run beyond it. Price ran the short-term buy side, gave up the ghost just above it and broke lower. The trade taken was stopped out plus two points — covering expenses.

Why show it "That's one of the benefits of seeing it live with me — an expectation, an analysis, a call, a viewpoint, a perspective, an opinion… not coming to pass. And that's okay."

Two things then kept him out of trouble, both of them time-based. The New York index AM session is 8:30 to 11; trades can be taken after 11, but sticking to the rules means accepting that you will miss certain opportunities. And with the move failing off a Fed chair event while the noon hour approached, the better response was to close the computer rather than keep pressing the morning session.

Rule A fair value gap only counts if the move that created it showed displacement. Price dropped back without meaningfully breaking the short-term low, so although a gap existed there, it was not one to participate in.

The low of the session came at one o'clock — the close of the lunch hour — after price closed in the fair value gap. The PM session runs 1:30 to 4:00, and ICT prefers to wait for 1:30 because the price action is cleaner. From there the market drew all the way back up to the level he had wanted in the morning.

The gold standard setup

The afternoon long is the pattern the whole model has been building toward.

1Price trades down into and closes in the 15-minute fair value gap.
2A short-term shift in market structure — it shows willingness to go higher.
3It trades back down into the order block, the last down-close candle, with a fair value gap there.
4That is also an optimal trade entry — the 62% to 70% retracement, below equilibrium relative to the swing high and low.
Rule Fair value gap + order block + optimal trade entry, after a short-term shift in market structure, is the flagship pattern of the channel — the gold standard of the ICT setup.

The numbers on that trade

Entry3754.75 — a limit order a quarter point below that candle's low.
Stop3745.75, the low. Nine points of risk.
First objective3780.25, the high of the candle above the imbalance — 25.5 points.
The ratioRisking nine to make 25.5 — better than 1 to 2.5.

Position size follows from those numbers, and the arithmetic is deliberately plain (lot-size calculators are a free Google search away — this is worked by hand to show the process):

  • $10,000 equity, 1% risk per trade → $100 is the total amount you are willing to lose.
  • $100 across nine points of stop → about $11 per point.
  • An E-mini contract is $50 a point — you can't trade one at 1% risk.
  • A micro is $5 a point, so two micros, $10 a point.
  • Nine points × $10 = $90 risked — under a full one percent.
  • 25.5 points × $10 = $255, a 2.25% return on one intraday scalp.
Note Commissions, fees and spread are not factored into this example. ICT doesn't factor them into his own risk maths — "costs are always going to be there, they're like taxes" — but if you want to be hard-lined about it in the beginning, that is yours to work out.

What one percent actually compounds to

One percent a day, Monday to Friday, four weeks a month is not 20% — compounding makes it about 22% a month. Professional money and fund managers do 12–15% in a year and call it a stellar year; over 20% is a blockbuster they parade in front of clients.

Realism One percent every single day is unrealistic for a new trader. For a seasoned trader, one percent average per day is easy — and one trade a week that makes five percent is the same thing. ICT doesn't sit in front of charts trying to earn it daily; he has businesses and family to tend to.

The two-order version of the same trade shows the ceiling: at 2% risk you place two limit orders at the same price with the same stop, take one off at the first objective, and let the second run to 3805.50 for the daily range. That is 2.25% banked plus roughly 4.5% on the runner — about 6.75% in one day, from two orders in one trade. The funded-account challenges asking for 10% are achievable on that math, but only if you know what you are doing and can weather drawdown. Once funded, aim for 10–15% a month, take it, and stop.

The drawdown ladder

This is the rule that keeps a losing streak from becoming a crisis.

Rule Take a full 1% loss → your next trade risks half of one percent. Lose that → the next risks a quarter of one percent, which is the floor. You must make back 50% of what you lost before returning to full risk.
Why step downAfter a loss you carry the psychological impact — you want revenge, you want more leverage than you should use, and patience feels unbearable. That is the loser's cycle, the gambler's mentality.
The arithmeticThree consecutive losing trades at 1%, 0.5% and 0.25% leaves you down one and three-quarter percent. That is easy to come back from.
The alternativeDouble up to 2% to win it back, lose, go to 3% or 4%, stop using a stop or widen it — and 10% drawdown arrives quickly, along with embarrassment and shame.
The professional standardMoney managers don't care about being in drawdown; they care about expectations and discipline. They are not allowed to touch their account when they are highly charged or emotional.
How to see a loss Professional money management views drawdown as a loan you are going to collect interest on. A bank doesn't cry about lending you the money and doesn't want it back straight away — that's the business model. Your career is not framed by the last five trades, weeks, months or years.

The hard stop is not optional

Warning "I don't really use a hard stop but I know when I want to get out" — if you don't know where to place a stop loss, you really don't know what you're doing. Without a hard stop you are not respecting the risk; you're saying you'll work out where you were wrong once you get there.

If the stop gets hit, it did you a favour. Your job then is to listen to it: the next trade is managed with less risk, because you now have a task — come out of drawdown incrementally.

When the stop is allowed to move

These rules are static, so you always know where the stop is and when it moves. Measure the expected range from your entry to your target — 25.5 points on this trade, so half of it is about 12.5 points.

Rule At 50% of the expected targeted range, the stop can be trimmed by 25% of the entry-to-stop distance. At 75% of the expected range, the stop goes to break even — period.

The point of trimming rather than jamming straight to break even is that you get the small reward of reducing risk without inviting the worry that comes from a stop pressed up against price. What you should be doing instead of watching the stop is measuring whether price is still giving you what you expect — is institutional order flow still on your side?

  • Do down-close candles keep supporting price?
  • Does it run below a short-term low and then run higher with energy, having taken the short-term sell stops?
  • Does it drop into a fair value gap, re-accumulate, and send another leg higher?

As long as those things are happening, collectively or individually, you are on the right side — keep holding for target. At competition-level leverage, which ICT puts at 3% to 4.5%, you take partials instead: pick a static number of points that always triggers one, and take something off whenever price reaches it. That part is yours to define — static rules cast in stone take away the individualism you bring to your own model.

The final word

The tax You are going to have losing trades, plural. You will do it wrong, you will have expectations that don't pan out, and you will take a monetary loss. That is a tax on success. Nobody gets around it, and nobody is the exception to the rule.
What do you control about that tax?
How bad it gets. You limit it — but you have to do the math and stick to it, rather than trade willy-nilly.
Why is wanting it back immediately a problem?
It's infantile — wanting the toy back the moment it's taken. You don't need it back right away, and thinking you do is what blows accounts.
What about traders announcing they're quitting?
If you're going to quit, you don't post about it — you just aren't here anymore. Posting it is a cry for help.
How long does it take?
Give it six months and you'll see things you never saw before. At the end of one full year you'll understand what you're looking for.

Getting there is not ten trades and you've made it. It is longevity, controlled risk and impeccable risk management. And "having it" doesn't mean trading every single day, knowing the bias every single day, or never taking a loss — it means knowing what you are doing, and having enough faith in the model to keep going through the hardships, because it will repeat in the future more times than it fails.

The challenge ICT closes the mentorship by challenging you to determine for yourself whether that last statement is true.
2022 Mentorship · Section Review

ICT 2022 Mentorship (Parts 1–6) — Section Summary

Every concept from the 40 lessons, condensed onto one page for revision. Nothing here is new material — it is the same episodes, re-ordered so you can re-read the whole mentorship in one sitting.
How to use this pageRead it top to bottom the day before you sit the Final Exam. Where a line doesn't click, go back to the lesson it came from — the part and lesson numbers are in the sub-headers. Then take the exam.

The one idea underneath everything

Price is delivered by an algorithm. There is no buying or selling pressure. Algorithmic theory rests on time and price: a price level is useless until time is considered, and time is of no use unless price is at a key PD array.

All the algorithm does (P3 L3)It seeks discount to premium and premium to discount. Within that it reaches for liquidity — buy stops above old highs, sell stops below old lows — and for imbalances: creating a fair value gap, or returning into one to rebalance it. All of it on the basis of time, then price.
The time element (P6 L6)
What time of dayday of weekweek of monthmonth of yearseasonal influences
The question behind it (P1 L2)
"What is price most likely to draw towards? Is there an imbalance higher, or a liquidity pool lower?"

Bias before precision. The entries are deliberately forgiving; what you must be precise about is the directional bias and where price is reaching for.

Part 1 — Foundations & The 2022 Model

What this mentorship is, and isn't (L1)

Your side of the dealSetups repeat a lot but are never carbon copies — you learn to recognise, not to template-match. No trade signals: levels are pointed at for study. Your side: an independent mindset, no codependency, no cutting corners, do the homework — and backtest, backtest, backtest.

The objective is income, not home runs: 25 handles a week on a market like the E-mini S&P. A handle is four ticks — $50 on ES, $20 on NQ, $5 on micro ES, $2 on micro NQ. Not a scalping course: the model looks for a whole intraday leg.

The four elements of the setup (L2)

1
A run on liquidity — buy stops taken, if you're bearish
2
A break in market structure — a short-term swing low broken
3
The imbalance displacement leaves behind — the fair value gap
4
Price trades back up into the gap — that's the short

Enter in the gap; stop above the candle above it, or above the swing high that was run; exit where the liquidity is. Whenever a move lower is expected, anticipate a stop hunt on buy stops first — the Judas swing — and the reverse before a rally.

Don't chaseOnce a low has been taken out you are chasing. You have to learn to sell short while the candle is going up.

The fair value gap, candle by candle (L6)

The bearish criteriaCandle 1 is the high; its low must be traded below on the immediately following candle. Candle 3 must trade with an extended low below candle 2, and must not trade back up to candle 1's low. The gap runs from candle 1's low down to candle 3's high. Mirror it for bullish.

The optimal bearish gap forms after a run into buy-side liquidity. Easiest entry: a limit just above candle 3's high, stop above candle 1. For indices the 1, 2 and 3-minute charts are where these show up.

Displacement (L5, L6)

The energetic move away from the gap and the high or low it took out. Animated, preferably closing beyond the short-term level — a lethargic drift is not enough.

No gap, no tradeIf there is no fair value gap inside the displacement range, you don't have a trade. Wait, or go to another market.

The market structure shift, and the one condition (L3)

The ruleBreaking a short-term high is significant only if the run down before it traded into sell stops. Bearish is the mirror: breaking a short-term low matters only because buy stops were taken first. No liquidity taken, no shift.

Shift, not break: an intraday shift implies an intraday draw, not multi-day movement. Where relative equal highs sit above an older high, use the equal highs.

The order block, defined properly (L3)

What it actually isA change in the state of delivery — a series of candles running into buy-side or sell-side liquidity. Not "every down-closed candle is a bullish order block and every up-closed candle is a bearish one."

Combine it with the gap: the opening price of the block, inside the fair value gap, as a limit order — the algorithm remembers that opening price. He selects the bodies.

Two stacked gaps (L3, L6)

With two fair value gaps, take the higher one but expect a stab into the lower — or wait for the lower to be traded into, then enter as price returns to the higher. Bearish reverses it, and the stop must account for the further gap. If price runs into the opposite imbalance before reaching your area, nix the trade. Partial at the liquidity inside the range, balance at the liquidity beyond it.

Don't roll the stop earlySharp pullbacks knock out anyone trailing too tightly right before the real leg. Use the first partial to quench the urge to move your stop: only once a significant intermediate-term low has been taken out can you roll the stop down to it — not before.

Premium & discount (L2)

Above 50%
Premium — expensive; where you sell
Below 50%
Discount — cheap; where a sell is looking to go

Low hanging fruit: take the closest target — an old low, or an imbalance. Don't aim for the lowest low on the chart; the market can deny you that.

Framing the day (L5)

New York local time — no exceptionsSet the platform to New York local time, and calibrate from that wherever you are.
Morning
8:30 to noon — preferably positioned before 11:00
Lunch
Noon–1:00 pm — no trades. Not even in demo.
Afternoon
From 1:30 at the earliest
Also mark
Highs and lows of London 2–5 am, New York 7–10 am, Asia 7–9 pm, and any intraday extreme just before 9:30 — these get swept

A swing high is three candles: a lower high to its left and to its right. Whether they close up or down has no bearing — swing points are where the stops are. In three drives, the third need not clear the old high — because every time a swing high turns down, bears sell it and place buy stops above the previous high, and those keep getting taken. The liquidity is already being built in.

The only two afternoon patterns you needAfter 1:30, either a swing low is violated — buy those sell stops and expect the level above to be taken — or, if no swing low goes, look for a sudden displacement higher then a fair value gap and buy the return into it. Reversed for the sell side.

Daily bias, and what to do without one (L7)

The bias questionThe daily chart answers one thing: where is price likely to draw to next? Until it reaches that draw and puts in a higher low, you stay with that bias. Do the same on the weekly before the week begins.

No read is not no trading. When consolidation clouds the bias, drop to intraday timeframes and hunt liquidity pools — run old highs, run old lows, get out quick. And time before price: what's the important time (8:30), then go left and find the price. The other indices read like indicators without being indicators — but a divergence with no narrative behind it means nothing.

Part 2 — Order Blocks, Power of Three & Structure

Power of Three (L2, L3)

Accumulation
Opening price near the low of the day or session — the opening range
Manipulation
The first move below (or above) the opening price — the fake move
Distribution
It rallies, makes the high, closes near it
Take the close out of itYou do not need to predict the closing price — only whether this daily range is more likely to expand higher or lower than the opening price. That is the key to bias.

It is fractal, applying to a session as readily as a day. Miss the manipulation low and get long close to the opening price — the one he likes is 8:30.

How an order block is actually found (L2, L5, L6, P3 L5–L6)

The definitionConsecutive down-close candles right before a price surge that leaves an imbalance. The block is the series, not the last candle before the move. Without the imbalance there is no order block — which is why this is not supply and demand, and why he will cut through candles and still trade the level.
The three ingredientsThe down-close candles, the imbalance created as price moves away, and the narrative that price is going higher for buy-side liquidity. No engulfing-candle requirement.

Bookmarks for the algorithm — it marks the page and returns later. In an established swing the candles are the order flow: bearish, up-close candles are resistance; bullish, down-close candles are support. The one permitted violation is a dip when a short-term low sits close by.

The opening range, and the 8:30 embargo (L3)

How to build itTake the range from the opening price up to the manipulation high — the Judas swing — and project the same distance below the opening price. That is where the day's setups form. If price leaves it, you can't chase it.

8:30 is the crosshairs time because the news embargo lifts. On the calendar, red is high impact, orange medium, yellow low. Strip down 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 minute, take the first gap and stop; none even on the 1-minute means no trade.

Market structure — the halos (L4)

1 halo
Short-term high
2 halos
Intermediate-term high
3 halos
Long-term swing high

From the chart-book days: circles over highs to classify the level of each, not just higher highs and lower lows. The nesting tells you what you're looking at — an ITH has lower swing highs either side.

Rebalance creates a key level (L5)

Write this one downEvery time price rebalances an imbalance, the swing created at that moment is an intermediate-term high or low. Price trades back up and rebalances a gap → that high is an ITH. Price drops back and fills one → that low is an ITL.

An ITH should be higher than the short-term highs either side — an ITL typically has a higher STL left and right, and between two STHs sits an ITH. When the ITH isn't higher than two STHs the market is weak: the algorithm is only rebalancing. If the next short-term high then trades above it, your idea is probably flawed — sidelines. Same if the high or low that did the rebalancing gets taken out.

The only question that mattersIs price going up for buy-side liquidity or up to rebalance? Or down to sweep short-term lows or down to rebalance? Four parts, one question.

Everything smaller is subordinate to the parent. Frame it daily FVG → hourly structure → 15-minute entries, and mark levels on the timeframe you trade — lower is overkill. LTH and LTL belong to the daily, which is what institutions work off; a break of an ITH or ITL is a significant break in structure. Limit the forecast to five days.

Applying it to forex (L1)

Frame a cross by its components: the futures of each currency on the daily — euro strong, yen weak → EUR/JPY higher. Killzones: New York 7:00–10:00 am, London 2:00–5:00 am. Intraday: does it take out a swing low, then a swing high?

Pyramiding, gearing, and the days you don't trade (L2, L4, L6)

Build the base firstThe biggest position goes in the initial entry — 3, then 2, then 1 — each add risking less than the one before. One, then two, then three is an inverted pyramid: no foundation.
After a big overnight runA big move on NASDAQ, Dow or ES roughly 2:00–5:00 am → avoid the New York morning entirely, switch to demo. Wait until 1:00 pm and anticipate the lunch or morning lows being taken.

Know when enough is enough — after a winning day, don't hurry back in. A wick through a gap does not invalidate it: if the bodies respect the gap, that is high probability.

Part 3 — Sessions, Targeting & the Daily Narrative

The workflow, step by step (L5)

Upper left
The daily — always where analysis starts
Lower left
The hourly
Right (largest)
The 15-minute — the bellwether
  1. Daily chart and bias. It won't be perfect. Stick to one direction unless proven clearly wrong.
  2. Frame the target on previous daily highs and lows — the last three days is where the liquidity pools sit.
  3. Hourly, then 15-minute. The 15 is what he returns to all day; above all it helps him trust his intraday bias. He combines 15m and 5m gaps.
  4. Refine on the 5-minute, then 4, 3, 2, 1 — the higher-timeframe imbalance is the parent.

Where there is a large imbalance, the stop goes at the top of that imbalance, not the candle before it.

The 9:30 open (L2)

The pattern in one lineAt 9:30, if there is a fair value gap with a swing low beneath it, expect that low to be taken out to flush the early buyers — then buy the original gap once price sweeps the low and returns into it.

The initial move at 9:30 is often a Judas swing. On FOMC you can trade the morning, but be done early.

The session rules (L3)

The rulesMorning 8:30–noon; lunch noon–1:00; PM after. No entries during lunch — profits are fine. No more than four trades a day, two morning, two afternoon. And old highs are a premium array until price trades above them, after which they become a discount array — which is when a broken high can act as support, especially with an imbalance at it. Once the liquidity target is met, stop using it.

One session can hold several setups: morning shorts off successive gaps, then longs into the PM pool once the sell-side objective is met. But you have no right to be angry about missing a trade.

The forex session (L4)

FX killzone
7:00–10:00 am NY — after 10:00, no new trades without a news driver
Index futures
8:30–11:00 am; he'll still take one to 10:40–10:45
News extension
A high-impact driver at 10:00 extends it to 11:00/11:30; crude inventories ~10:30 do the same for CAD
Institutional levels & the 8:30 ruleThe big figure and the 00, 20, 50 and 80 levels are where the liquidity is. When bearish in FX, refer to both the 8:30 and the midnight opening price and use the lower one as the minimum threshold for a Judas swing up. Bullish reverses it.
Fluff the exitNever aim for the exact level. Add three to five pipsten if you're new. You have a spread to account for.

What news is for: not the data, but the volatility at those specific times, which the algorithm uses to reprice.

Bias from the daily dealing range (L6)

The bias, stated plainlyIt went down to equilibrium or a short-term discount — so the next day expect it higher, and a reaction. If that day is down or flat, carry the same expectation into the next.
Dealing range
The most energetic and most recent low and high
Equilibrium
50% of that range — at or below it is a discount
Mean threshold
The midpoint of an order block

Purge and revert: price runs below a short-term low, purging sell-side liquidity, then reverts to the high of the last three days — purge day counted as day one. Above that high sit the buy stops.

Think in pairingsPrice ran below old lows, so smart money bought those sell stops and is net long. To get out they must sell to willing buyers — the buy stops above the relative equal highs. That's the draw. Without this mindset before you click enter, you are gambling.

Two opening prices: midnight NY frames the daily range and London; 8:30 frames the New York morning; the PM session starts its own cycle at 1:30. At 8:30, look to the left for the short-term swing lows you want to absorb. On a bullish day the midnight open is the price you preferably want to be buying below — but if it sits below where price is trading at or after 8:30 it isn't likely to be a factor, so use the 8:30 open; still below the midnight open after 8:30 means a heavy discount.

When not to trade (L6)

Trading vs gamblingIf you cannot reasonably outline where price is going next, you are gambling. The impulse to be in there every day is a gambler's mentality — and sloppy price action is itself a reason not to trade.

When the market is messy, consider closing the charts. Two weeks without a trade drives some people to change their style — "and they're both wrong."

Part 4 — Correlation, Tape Reading & Reading the Day

Risk on, risk off (L2, P6 L7)

The mechanismDollar up is risk off — a flight to quality, so foreign currency, index futures and stocks decline. Dollar down is risk on and they rise.

The teeter-totter: dollar and euro are inverted, so the instant the dollar reaches its buying opportunity is the instant euro is a short. Use the dollar index for EURUSD and GBPUSD bias — the 1-hour is good for picking it. Lower USDCAD, higher S&P.

The day the market refuses (L2)

The read that mattersBearish bias. Did it rally above the midnight open? No. Above the 8:30 open? No. That combination means extremely bearish — it can't even rally to a short-term premium, so it won't hand you tidy rallies to fade. Take the sneaky little entries or miss the move.

Some markets are simply too heavy to rally for you to short into. Don't jam the stop: you need time and price behind you first.

SMT divergence (L3, P6 L2)

Smart money techniqueS&P and Nasdaq are closely correlated — not all the time. Bearish, and NQ makes the higher run but ES doesn't → the run is a stop run and ES is really weak. Confirmation without an indicator, and it is the last confirmation of an idea, never the idea itself.

It appears at specific times — 2:00, 8:30, 9:30, 10:00 and 1:30 and at news. A run before or around 7:00 am means a deep retracement is coming, with the divergence usually showing around 9:30. Plot it with the compare tab, setting that pane's price source to High for highs. A sell program will reprice to the low where something was respected, not one already purged.

The trapWithout a bias you will see what looks like SMT divergence and then watch it disappear as the two move in concert again. SMT without a bias is worthless.

Where to anchor a fib (L3, L4, P3 L3)

0.5
Equilibrium — the premium/discount divide
0.62 & 0.79
The optimal trade entry levels
Standard deviations
Projections; −1.5 is a standard one
Which anchor, and whenFor premium and discount, range high to low. For OTE, the bodies — lowest and highest open-or-close — because that is the bulk of the volume and the wicks are stop runs. But on a high-volatility day like FOMC, use the wicks. That is the whole answer to why he switches.

The levels are only good if the rest of the narrative is there. Use the wrong swing high and low and you get nothing. Also: above an old high is a short-term premium, below an old low a discount — but things can be in a premium and keep going.

Where each pyramid add goes (L3)

Placement, not just sizeThe sizing rule is biggest first; the placement is just as deliberate. The first fill — the largest size — goes at the largest part of the framework; the second at the next fair value gap; the third after a retrace into the bearish order block. Each add sits at a logical, precise area: "it's not randomness, it's not willy-nilly, it's not flipping a coin."

News days (L4)

The knee-jerk sequenceFOMC — like NFP — delivers a repeatable order: an initial leg, another leg, a fake-out leg, then the real setup. Which is why you can wait for price to trade into the higher-timeframe gap.
Sweeping a high/low
A shallow run above the level, then back down and a reversal into the range
Running a high/low
Right over the top and no look back — an expansion that continues

The move ahead of the release doesn't count — "that's a gambler's setup." FOMC and NFP are extremely risky, but a wonderful case study.

The two entry patterns (L5)

1
A level of relative equal highs; price approaches, corrects, approaches again
2
It runs through those highs — buy stops taken
3
Pan left, find the nearest short-term low — your trigger
4
Price must trade below it with displacement
5
Go back through that leg for the fair value gap — that's where you sell
The filterUntil it takes out that short-term low with displacement, there's nothing going on. The displacement leg is the foundation; only then do you look for the gap. And the market does not like to leave relative equal highs — it returns to run them.

Pattern two substitutes an old fair value gap above for the equal highs: use the low of the gap as the level, then the same short-term low, shift and displacement.

When no entry appears (L5, P5 L4, P6 L3)

Negative evidence is evidenceA big move offering no model entry is tipping its hand: a rush, clearing liquidity before it does what it intends. A big run that never provides an entry is usually just running buy side before going lower.

When sell stops are run but there is no displacement back above the old low and no gap, there was no setup and no losing trade — sound logic should prevent bad trades. It doesn't mean the model is broken; it also means it will not work all the time. And which shift counts? Define the range you are working within first — the shift is the one that breaks it.

Daily rebalance theory (L6)

The routineLook back over the last three days: is there a fair value gap? If not, and a day opened, extended and closed near its low, use the previous day's low. That level is where a retracement can reach to rebalance the entire move.
What it does to peopleIt tricks people into thinking the low is in. All it did was reach a logical level that rebalances the sell-off. Don't try to pick the bottom: "I have lost more money trying to do that than any other thing."
Which liquidity first — the hard-line rulePrice running above the buy side first, without the low below being taken, is bearish and inside the bias. If it took the previous low and then rallied, that is not bearish and the idea may be invalidated. Put the fib on the displacement swing — never sell in a discount. "That's a hard-line rule."

Seasonal tendency: last week of April into May, the S&P, Nasdaq, Dow and Russell tend to be weak — usually, not always. When a major weekly or daily extreme is taken, study the last three days for the purge and revert.

Part 5 — Session Playbooks & Special Days

Counter-trend, and when it is allowed (L1, L2)

A long against a bearish daily bias is on the table only once the sell side has been taken and price has traded into the downside objective. Bullish? Find the lunch consolidation lows and wait for the break of them.

Sell side is not enough — it must be a discountRelative equal lows below are not a buy unless they are in a discount of the day's range. The buy goes inside the gap only because it is at or below equilibrium.
The warning attached (P3 L6)Counter-trend goes against higher-timeframe order flow. "You can and will absolutely lose money trading this style." Material for back testing, not live risk.

The PM session playbook (L2, L4)

The lunch-lows ruleOn a PM move, the highs or lows of lunch time most likely get swept first. Bullish and consolidating through lunch? Find the lunch lows, wait for them to be run, then the move resumes.
9:30
NY open — often creates the low of the day
~12:10
Lunch — usually a retracement or consolidation
1:30
The algorithm starts seeking liquidity; continuing higher, it seeks sell side first
3:00 pm
The algorithms spool price toward the objective into the close

The manipulation takes out breakout buyers on the triggered stops and, crucially, morning longs who trailed their stops below the lunch lows.

The narrow range day, and close-proximity entries (L3)

The day before the Fed chair speaks is usually a very quiet, small-range day. Knowing when volatility is likely to shrink matters as much as knowing when it arrives. A short that day never qualified: rally, broken low, breakdown — but the displacement leg had no fair value gap above 50% of its own range.

The rule for a missed entryFumbled the ideal entry? Getting in really close to it is acceptable — or the next shift and gap, if still worth it. The condition: price hasn't run too far away from the gap.

Consolidation days and the three o'clock setup (L6)

The definition and the clockThe market creates an initial range and stays in it until three o'clock. It used to be the bond close; now it's three to four o'clock when equities close — smart money closing positions, and once they have, it drops or rallies fast.

The tell: an outside day — higher and lower than the day before — typically gives a range or choppy day after, especially with a down close. That is a 50/50 day: it plays around equilibrium, so play the edges of the daily range. The afternoon setup, called in advance: run the buy stops above the relative equal highs, then reverse back into the midpoint of the 9:30 high and low.

Why the chop is expensiveSuch ranges stop you out then go nowhere for a long time. For anyone getting chewed up: wait until three o'clock.

Confluence, not support and resistance (L7)

The gap is the trade, not the levelEntries occur at old lows where sell side was resting — but the mechanism is a fair value gap after a run below, not broken support turning into resistance. "If the fair value gap doesn't exist, I don't trust that level." It's based on liquidity, not support and resistance. Confluence is an accumulation, spelled out that day as four conditions: a break below the level, a fair value gap formed with that break, the next level breaking too, and another fair value gap — "a confluence, not just one thing."

Reading a gap later in the day (L5)

Don't wait only for the open. No trade at 8:30 or 9:30? A fair value gap later in the day still gets you involved. The trigger that day: three candles forming a swing high inside a five-minute gap, the gap already traded through and the bias already bearish — short on that candle's close.

Back testing that trains the subconscious (L2, P1 L4)

The methodAnnotate the old move richly. Then, in the empty space on the chart, write commentary in your own words, in the first person, as though you saw it coming. Screen-capture it into your journal and re-read those journals at the end of the week.

Back testing is for discovery — learning how things actually work. Your subconscious retains the image and the words, so live it remembers having done it before: pseudo-experience. Journalling a live trade, note the time from the shift into the gap, from entry to target, and the drawdown you sat through.

What never goes in itNever write anything negative. Use positive self-talk — these entries exist to be reflected on later. "You're going to develop at your own pace and arrive at full understanding right on time."

Part 6 — Dealing Range, Algorithmic Theory & Risk

The Sunday opening gap, and drawing the dealing range (L1)

The Sunday gapPlot the Sunday gap opening across the entire week. It acts as a supply and demand zone: above it look for support, below it resistance. It earns its keep in consolidation weeks — an FOMC week — not in weeks that run away.
The correction on the dealing rangeAnchor the fib on the expansion swing — the impulsive leg running in the direction you want to trade. Long? Draw low to high of that up-leg, wait for the retracement; below 50% is the discount, better still in a gap. Don't use a high-to-low leg to measure a long.

The mean threshold (L2)

The three sensitive pricesUsing a candle as an order block, the low, the open and the middle of the range are the sensitive areas. The middle — 50% — is the mean threshold, the level the block must defend. If it doesn't hold, expect the block to fail.

Where delivery came in two stages, measure the most recent: short-term low to high, 50% is equilibrium, expect the drop into discount. Order flow is the gaps and blocks that hold — price is unlikely to run through that high resistance.

Where bias comes from, and the days you skip (L4)

Off the daily: price moves off a low and creates a swing low, so assume it wants the high back — bullish until that high is taken. After it, a day or two of retracement is logical because the rally left a gap. Levels on the hourly are transposed daily levels, not hourly support and resistance.

Non-Farm Payroll: study it, don't trade itNFP Friday is not a day to speculate on. Not because money can't be made — because you are here to learn to read price action, and the day can be volatile, choppy or a dud, with precision dropping precipitously. Determine which side of liquidity price reaches for before the 8:30 release, then just read it.
Stop trading by WednesdayMade money in the first few days? Stop and observe. Bagged nothing from Sunday through Wednesday? Don't force trades — sit with the desire and do nothing. It forges discipline.

Changing gears — abandoning a bias (L5)

Read the caveat before the lectureThat session is framed on his own authorship: "because I'm the author of these concepts I have a lot of tools at my disposal, and I have a little bit better understanding of price delivery than the average student of mine." It is an advanced manoeuvre, not a technique to copy off a 15-minute chart.

The evidence the bias was wrong: multiple lows taken and the market reversed while offering no high-probability short; the downside objective never tagged. The turn came on the bellwether 15-minute — a run higher, a short-term shift in market structure, a gap, and that gap respected. That alone justifies looking the other way in the PM.

Narrative, definedThe understanding of what price should do, why, and what it will encounter to prove that narrative is underway. But narrative by itself is not an entry: you still want displacement, then measure that leg for premium and discount.
Not a full rebalance — the contrast he draws himselfAgainst the teaching that the market comes back and fills all of a liquidity void in: "I don't teach that. There are times when that can occur, but because I understand the algorithm, that is not likely to occur most times." The imbalance does not have to completely rebalance. What replaces it: know where the market is reaching for, then look for the imbalances — any of them can be the one.
Consolidates into lunch
Mark the swing lows made during lunch, wait for the sweep, then look for the rally
No consolidation into lunch
A sweep of sell side into lunch means they'll work through lunch — expect a short-term low with equal highs above, then one more drop below it

Expecting a bullish day and price drops below the midnight open? Wait for a 5- or 15-minute shift and take the gap. You want to be buying at or below the midnight open — reversed when bearish. And you don't need the absolute high and low: taking the lion's portion of the move in the middle is all you need.

The daily target, and when to stop (L6)

Five points, then outFive points, then out — even if the framework allows for thirty. One trade in the morning at 8:30 or 9:30; get the five at 8:30 and he doesn't trade 9:30. The afternoon is only in play if the morning was missed or lost — if the morning made money, the afternoon is demo. The lesson is discipline, not greed. One ES contract at $50 a point is $250 a day, $1,250 a week.
Not a promiseThat session was ICT's son beside him, coached minute by minute with three decades of experience acting as his internal dialogue. You are not ready to do this with live funds while you are still learning the concepts — and you should not expect five points every single day.

The six keys to daily bias (L7)

The rules, in order
  1. A bias every day is unrealistic.
  2. Determine the likely weekly expansion from the weekly chart — not where the week closes, where it is likely to reach for. Strongest bias there is.
  3. Look for obvious liquidity in that direction.
  4. Identify imbalances top down — weekly, daily, 4h, 1h, 15m, then 5 down through 1.
  5. Focus only on high or medium impact calendar days. Yellow is of no interest.
  6. Look for the directional price run inside the killzones, timed to that event.
And the framing question: who's in the crosshairs? Have people been making money long? Is there a low to stop them out with?
The three-bar swing
A sweep of an old high plus that three-bar pattern is when lower prices are expected — confirmed when the next candle trades lower. Not a five-candle fractal.
10:00–11:00 am
The London close profit-taking hour; usually the opposing end of the daily range forms here. Have ~80% off between 10 and 11.
Wick days
Two big news wicks either side? Ignore them — the manipulation is done. Take the range from the swing that follows.
Protected lows
London runs energetically, price retraces, 8:30 opens near the London low → buy before 9:30; the manipulation already happened. A low that already took sell side, with its gap closed in, has no reason left to go downthat is why stops go under it.
News correlation
Trade the pair the news is for, or its correlate — CAD news for the S&P, and SMT between EUR and GBP to pick the stronger
Why not trade every day"Trading is not an Olympic sport. They don't give out gold medals for over-trading — but they do blow accounts."

Risk, drawdown and stop management (L8)

The gold standard setup
  1. Price trades down into and closes in the 15-minute fair value gap.
  2. A short-term shift in market structure.
  3. Back down into the order block — the last down-close candle — with a gap there.
  4. Which is also an optimal trade entry, 62–70%, below equilibrium.
Fair value gap + order block + OTE, after a short-term shift in market structure — the gold standard of the ICT setup.
The drawdown ladderRisk less than 1%. A full 1% loss → next trade 0.5%. Lose that → 0.25%, the floor. Make back 50% of what you lost before returning to full risk. Three straight losses that way leaves you down 1¾%. Doubling up instead reaches 10% drawdown quickly.
When the stop may moveAt 50% of the expected targeted range, trim the stop by 25%. At 75%, it goes to break even — period.
Losses are the tax on successIf you don't know where to place a stop loss, you don't know what you're doing. You will have losing trades, plural — that is a tax on success. What you control is how bad it gets. Don't touch your capital when highly emotional, and give it six months.

The times worth memorising

Midnight NY
Where the new day begins; frames Power of Three on the daily range and the London session
2:00–5:00 am
The London killzone; also where a big overnight run cancels your morning
7:00–10:00 am
The forex New York killzone
8:30 am
The news embargo lifts — the New York morning opening price, and where the hunt starts
8:30–11:00 am
The index futures window; he'll still take a trade to 10:40–10:45
9:30 am
The equities open — volatility, and usually a Judas swing opposite the real move
10:00–11:00 am
The London close profit-taking hour — take ~80% off here
11:30 am
If the order hasn't filled, pull it
Noon–1:00 pm
New York lunch — no entries. Exits are fine.
1:30 pm
The PM session — its own accumulation, manipulation, distribution
3:00–4:00 pm
The market-on-close macro; the algorithmic spool into the objective

The numbers worth memorising

1 handle
Four ticks — $50 on ES, $20 on NQ, $5 on micro ES, $2 on micro NQ
25 handles a week
The stated objective on a market like the E-mini S&P
5 points
The lowest threshold a setup should yield — take it and stop
3 candles
A swing high or low — not a five-candle fractal
50%
Equilibrium of a dealing range, and the mean threshold of an order block
62–79%
The optimal trade entry zone (the gold-standard setup cites 62–70%)
1% max
The risk ceiling — a half or a quarter percent while learning
1% → 0.5% → 0.25%
The drawdown ladder; make back 50% of the loss before returning to full risk
50% / 75%
Of the expected range: trim the stop 25%, then move it to break even
3 + 2 + 1
Pyramid biggest first — never one, then two, then three
4 trades a day
The cap — two in the morning, two in the afternoon
3–5 pips
The cushion to add to an FX exit — 10 if you're new
6 months
Three months of study and back testing, then two or three forward testing

The checklist before any trade

  1. What is the draw? An imbalance, or a liquidity pool? Name the level before anything else.
  2. What is the weekly and daily bias? Where is the week likely to reach for; where does the daily dealing range sit relative to equilibrium?
  3. Is it the right time? 8:30, 9:30, 1:30, or 3:00–4:00 — inside a killzone, with a red or orange calendar event if one is due.
  4. Has liquidity been taken? No stop run, no market structure shift.
  5. Is there displacement? Energetic, preferably closing beyond the level. A lethargic drift is not enough.
  6. Is there a fair value gap inside that leg? No gap, no trade. Strip 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 and take the first.
  7. Premium or discount? Sells at or above equilibrium; buys at or below. Never sell in a discount.
  8. Where is the stop and the target? Stop beyond the candle that created the gap; target the external liquidity, fluffed a few pips inside.
  9. Is the risk right? 1% maximum, less while learning; biggest position first if you pyramid.

What the mentorship keeps warning you about

The repeated warnings
  • Don't chase. Learn to sell while the candle is going up.
  • Don't trade every day. Stop by Wednesday if you've banked it.
  • Don't trade the noon hour, or NFP and FOMC. Case studies, not trading days.
  • Don't pick bottoms or tops. "I have lost more money trying to do that than any other thing."
  • Don't call it a setup when there isn't one. No entry means no setup.
  • Don't force it when structure disagrees. A short-term high above a rebalance ITH means your idea is probably flawed.
  • Don't increase risk after a loss. Halve it, then quarter it, and make back half of what you lost first.
  • Don't dilute the model with bolted-on indicators.
  • Don't skip the journal. "If you fail under my tutelage, it's because you don't do this."
Ready?If most of the above reads as familiar rather than new, take the Final Exam — 43 questions across all six parts. Anything you get wrong points you straight back at the lesson to re-read.
ICT 2022 Mentorship · Section Review

Final Exam

43 questions drawn from every lesson in this section. Nothing is graded until you submit — and you can retake it as many times as you like.